Home

MC6830x Emulation/Analysis Graphical User Interface

1. Softkey Interface Memory mnemonic file main module main c address data 000FC8 4 E560000 LINK AG 00000 oooFcC 4EB9000014 JSR 00014F0 OOOFD2 4EB900001A JSR 0001A46 OOOFD8 4E71 NOP OOOFDA 4EB9000015 JSR 0001598 OOOFEO 5289000076 ADDQ L 1 00076F2 OOOFE6 4879000076 PEA L 00076F2 OOOFEC 4EB9000010 JSR 000101c OOOFF2 588F ADDQ L 4 A7 OOOFF4 4A39000076 TST B OOO76FE OOOFFA 6708 BEQ B 0001004 OOOFFC 4EB9000019 JSR 0001986 001002 4E71 NOP 001004 4EB900001A JSR 0001A6A 00100A 4E71 NOP 00100c 60cc BRA B 0000FDA STATUS cws main main c pines isplay memory main memonic run trace step display modify break end ETC 29 bold bold italic normal lt RETURN gt Getting Started Display area Can show memory data values analyzer traces registers breakpoints status simulated I O global symbols local symbols pod commands the emulator s underlying Terminal Interface error log or display log You can use the UP ARROW DOWN ARROW PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN cursor keys to scroll or page up or d
2. This command allows you to trace program execution using the emulation analyzer Note that the options shown can be executed once for each trace command Refer to the TRIGGER and QUALIFIER diagrams for details on setting up a trace You can perform analysis tasks either by starting a program run and then specifying the trace parameters or by specifying the trace parameters first and then initiating the program run Once a trace begins the analyzer monitors the system busses of the emulation processor to detect the states specified in the trace command When the trace specification is satisfied and trace memory is filled a message will appear on the status line indicating the trace is complete You can then 442 again anything arm_trig2 break_on_trigger modify_ command on_halt only prestore QUALIFIER Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands trace use display trace to display the contents of the trace memory If a previous trace list is on screen the current trace automatically updates the display If the trace memory contents exceed the page size of the display the lt NEXT gt lt PREV gt lt Up arrow gt or lt Down arrow gt keys may be used to display all the trace memory contents You also can press lt CTRL gt f and lt CTRL gt g to move the display left and right You can set up trigger and storage qualifications using the specify trace command The analyzers will begin tracing when ac
3. diagram ik data status lt external_label gt a not EXPR LC thru EXPR gt To output of The RANGE parameter allows you to specify a condition for the trace measurement made up of one or more values on RANGE QUALIFIER diagram The range option can be used for state qualifier labels Range can only be used once in a trace measurement Refer to the Qualifying Trigger and Store Conditions section in the Using the Emulation Analyzer chapter for a list of the predefined values that can be assigned to the status state qualifiers Expression types are address when none is chosen The parameters are as follows The value following this softkey is searched for on the lines that monitor the emulation processor s address bus The value following this softkey is searched for on the lines that monitor the emulation processor s data bus An expression is a combination of numeric values symbols operators and parentheses specifying an address data status or executed address value See the EXPR syntax diagram for details This represents a defined external analyzer label This specifies that the analyzer search for the logical not of the specified range this includes any addresses not in the specified range 413 range status thru Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Comma
4. strcpys8 1814H 28 Abs 00 Sdv 45 Abs 97 Abs 00 Sdv 28 Abs 1656H 28 Abs 00 Sdv 44 Abs 99 Abs 10 Sdv 29 Abs 177CH 11 Abs 20 Sdv 18 Abs 59 Abs 20 Sdv 71 Abs 25 227 25 25 46 25 227 25 22T 253 25 40 25 227 157 00 46 45 00 45 00 46 45 02 46 00 259 18 00 x09 18 274 Address Range 10BOH thru Memory Activity State Percent Rel 9 Mean 41 Tim Percent Rel oy Program Activity State Percent Rel 12 Mean 54 Tim Percent Rel 11 interrupt_sim Address Range Memory Activity 1O1EH thru State Percent Rel 6 Mean 26 Tim Percent Rel She Program Activity State Percent Rel Des Mean 26 Tim Percent Rel am write_hdwr Address Range 181CH thru Memory Activity State Percent Rel 6 Mean 25 Tim Percent Rel 6 Program Activity State Percent Rel Ss Mean 25 Tim Percent Rel oe proc_specific Address Range 1A6CH thru Making Software Performance Measurements 110AH 75 Abs 20 Sdv 45 Abs 39 Abs 75 Sdv 83 Abs 10A8H 15 Abs 00 Sdv 96 Abs 97 Abs 40 Sdv 81 Abs 1894H 06 Abs 60 Sdv 10 Abs 79 Abs 60 Sdv 86 Abs 1A8CH 10 149 10 05 63 90 69 76 28 08 114 98 41 GRS 239 05 00 49 10 0 0 49 lt LO To interpret activity measurement reports 275 Making Software Performance M easure
5. Local symbols of SYMB are the ones which are children of the file and or scope specified by SYMB That is they are defined in that file or scope See the SYMB syntax pages and the Symbolic Retrieval Utilities User s Guide for further explanation of symbols Displaying the local symbols sets the current working symbol to the one specified The parameters are as follows SYMB This option represents the symbol whose children are to be listed See the SYMB syntax diagram and the Symbolic Retrieval Utilities User s Guide for more information on symbol hierarchy and representation Examples display local_symbols_in mod_name display local_symbols_in mod_name main See Also The copy local_symbols_in command 373 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display memory display memory display _ vere J EXPR Re FCODE 4 T thru 2 6 EXPR J a repetitively absolute T blocked mnemonic previous_display 5 To lt RETURN gt on offset_by J EXPR DISPLAY diagram This command displays the contents of the specified memory location or series of locations The memory contents can be displayed in mnemonic hexadecimal or real number format In addition the memory addresses can be listed offset by a 374
6. Sia J on COPY diagram This command lets you copy local symbols contained in a source file and relative segments program data or common to the selected destination Local symbols are symbols that are children of the particular file or symbol defined by SYMB that is they are defined in that file or scope For additional information on symbols refer to the SYMB syntax pages and the Symbolic Retrieval Utilities User s Guide SYMB is the current working symbol The parameters are as follows This option represents the symbol whose children are to be listed See the SYMB syntax diagram and the Symbolic Retrieval Utilities User s Guide for information on symbol hierarchy copy local_symbols_in mod_name to printer copy local_symbols_in mod_name to linenumfile The display local_symbols_in command 359 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands copy memory copy memory C copy H memory N EXPR N FCODE 4 ay mra EXPR__ D 6 Q w To output of MEMORY on COPY diagram This command copies the contents of a memory location or series of locations to the specified output The memory contents are copied in the same format as specified in the last display memory command Contents of memory can be displayed if program runs are not restricted to real time Memory conten
7. Configuring the Emulator To add memory map entries Using the command line choose Settings gt Command Line from the pull down menu in the memory map window enter the following commands to map memory for the above program delete all lt addr gt 0 thru 4fffh emulation rom 7000h thru 8fffh emulation ram Ob000h thru 16fffh emulation ram The resulting memory mapper screen is shown below g y function code attribute H 4FFFH EMUL ROM 7000H 8FFFH EMUL RAM B G H 16FFFH EMUL RAM STATUS Mapping emulation memory default unspecified blocks guarded To exit out of the memory mapper enter end 115 Configuring the Emulator To modify memory map entries To modify memory map entries e Choose Map Modify Entry from the pull down menu in the memory map window and select the entry number from the cascade menu e Position the mouse pointer over the entry you wish to modify press and hold the select mouse button and choose Modify Entry from the pop up menu These commands open the same dialog box that is used for adding memory map entries except it lets you modify the current settings for the entry In order to modify an entry when using the command line you must delete the entry and add a new entry Examples To modify a memory map entry using the pop up menu i File Map Settings l akik bytes Click and hold the j mouse select button to bring up the menu Then 2 7000H BFFFH EMUL RA
8. Note that when you set a delay specification using tgout c or tgout t trigger output delay before trace complete after trigger the trace will indicate complete as soon as the analyzer has captured the state specified even though the entire trace memory has not been filled If the notation trig1 break remains on the status line without being replaced by Emulation trace complete it indicates the trace memory is not completely filled and no more states are being captured 7 Store the entire trace memory content in a file with a command like wait measurement_complete copy trace to lt directory filename gt The wait command is inserted ahead of the copy command to ensure that the unload of trace data is complete before you try to store it Without wait you will get an ERROR message warning that the unload is still in process The lt filename gt is an ASCII filename for a binary file that can be viewed using the load trace command 8 Start a new trace with the command trace again 227 10 Using the Emulation Analyzer To capture a continuous stream of program execution no matter how large your program Resume the program run from the point where it was interrupted when the emulator broke to the monitor with the command run Wait until the notation trig1 break and or Emulation trace complete appears on the status line Then store the new trace memory content in a new file with commands like Stop_trace wait me
9. 450 13 Error Messages 451 Error Messages This chapter alphabetically lists and describes the error messages displayed on the interface status line and in the error log The error log records error messages received during the emulation session You may want to display the error log to view the error messages Sometimes several messages will be displayed for a single error to help you locate a problem quickly To prevent overrun the error log purges the oldest messages to make room for the new ones To display the error log enter display error_log Error messages are listed alphabetically by the first letter of the first word of the error messages In the error log some messages may be preceded by a number Messages in this chapter that have an error message number associated with them have the number listed in parentheses following the message These are ordered alphabetically by the first letter of the first word lt message gt 622 Cause Monitor specific message lt CONFIGURATION FILENAME gt does not exist Cause The configuration file you are trying to load does not exist Action Try the load configuration command again using a valid configuration file name lt LOGICAL NAME End continuing Cause This is a status message The emulation session is being exited with the end command When you restart the emulation session later it will continue using the same settings as in the session you j
10. Using the Emulator To step high level source lines To step high level source lines e Choose Execution Step Source and select one of the items from the cascade menu Or using the command line enter step source When stepping through instructions associated with source lines execution can remain in a loop and the message Stepping source line 1 Next PC lt address gt is displayed on the status line In this situation you can abort the step command by pressing lt CTRL gt c To step through instructions associated with the high level source lines at the current program counter step source To step through instructions associated with high level source lines at address main step source from main 160 Using the Emulator To step assembly level instructions To step assembly level instructions e Choose Execution Step Instruction and select one of the items from the cascade menu Or using the command line enter step The step command allows you to step through program execution an instruction or a number of instructions at a time Also you can step from the current program counter or from a specific address Examples To step one instruction from the current program counter step To step a number of instructions from the current program counter step 8 To step a number of instructions from a specified address step 16 from 920h 161 Using the Emulator To reset the emul
11. Modify a series of memory locations by specifying the address of the first location in the series to be modified and the values to which the contents of that location and successive locations are to be changed The first value listed will replace the contents of the first memory location The second value replaces the contents of the next memory location in the series and so on until the list is exhausted When more than one value is listed the value representations must be separated by commas See the examples for more information diagram 399 bytes EXPR FCODE long real lt REAL short words string lt STRING gt Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands modify memory A range of memory can be modified such that the content of each location in the range is changed to the single specified value or to a single or repeated sequence This type of memory modification is done by entering the limits of the memory range to be modified EXPR thru EXPR and the value or list of values EXPR EXPR to which the contents of all locations in the range are to be changed Note that if the specified address range is not large enough to contain the new data only the specified addresses are modified If the address range contains an odd number of bytes and a word operation is being executed the last word of the address range will be modified Thus the memory modification will stop one byte after the e
12. 311 Making Coordinated M easurements When CMB is enabled each emulator is required to break to background when CMB READY goes false and will wait for CMB READY to go true before returning to the run state When an enabled emulator breaks it will drive the CMB READY false and will hold it false until it is ready to resume running When an emulator is reset it also drives CMB READY false EXECUTE The CMB EXECUTE line is low true Any HP 64700 on the CMB can drive this line It serves as a global interrupt and is processed by both the emulator and the analyzer This signal causes an emulator to run from a specified address when CMB READY returns true BNC Trigger Signal The BNC trigger signal is a positive rising edge TTL level signal The BNC trigger line can be used to either drive or receive an analyzer trigger or receive a break request for the emulator Comparison Between CMB and BNC Triggers The CMB trigger and BNC trigger lines have the same logical purpose to provide a means for connecting the internal trigger signals trig1 and trig2 to external instruments The CMB and BNC trigger lines are bi directional Either signal may be used directly as a break condition The CMB trigger is level sensitive while the BNC trigger is edge sensitive The CMB trigger line puts out a true pulse following receipt of EXECUTE despite the commands used to configure it This pulse is internally ignored Note that if you use the EXECUTE functi
13. Choose Display Registers lt register class gt Or using the command line enter display registers lt register class gt When displaying registers you can display classes of registers and individual registers 173 Using the Emulator To display register contents Examples To display the IDMA register class display registers class IDMA a Oe ten Eke lew le ea Ser Cel Suice Pst er eat ete Q oo ss fF 8 ae esere r prere rm w ort Yr Uno s ee Lanes grad e ere 7 w OS ces ep coe so X TIE PEEM be ar ef mere eke Bbo To display the individual register CSR display registers individual CMR rm ort Yr I Ummas i greet liann gad tn LJ cm w oae Doe EE 2 amp css ot Bir ee Veke Setting 7 4 io Perai 3 wn E Cow lee 5 ws Ges freer So t i Baw Error Dmsiirerisn lewred oa Mereal Deere Treveter Doe ie cleered X FIE PREME Reevieg be omtr lems ede MT bet ie displi mpane CR Cese forme ase Mipi antia asea M sa Command feram Foma Creer ploctas Forward Ouarsoend Cuw Gioia 174 Using the Emulator To modify register contents To modify register contents e Choose Modify Register and use the dialog box to name the register and specify its value Clicking the Recall pushbutton lets you select register names and values from predefined or previously specified entries Placing the mouse pointer in the text entr
14. Or using the command line enter trace When you use the trace command without any options the analyzer begins recording processor bus cycles immediately and continues until the trace buffer is filled In the default trace configuration the analyzer stores all bus cycles If you are using the emulation bus analyzer with deep memory the depth of the trace list buffer depends on whether or not you installed memory modules on the analyzer card and the capacity of the memory modules installed Refer to the Hewlett Packard Emulator Bus Analyzer with deep trace memory User s Guide for details If you are using the 1K analyzer the trace list buffer is 512 or 1024 states deep depending on whether or not you turn on the state time count See To count states or time in this chapter From the demo directory usr np64000 demo debug_env hp64798 start the demo program and trace from the program start Startemul reset trace run from transfer_address 200 Using the Emulation Analyzer To stop a trace measurement To stop a trace measurement Choose Trace Stop Or using the command line enter stop_trace You must use this command to stop a trace started with a Trace gt Until Stop command refer to To trace activity leading up to a program halt later in this chapter Several other conditions may occur that will make you want to stop a trace The analyzer may not record any trace states because your trigger spe
15. ee Jere iseia mearra eresi Jesa tre Commend Cursor Teen To display information about the memory map e Choose Display Configuration Info gt Memory Map from either the configuration interface the emulator analyzer interface pull down menu Or using the command line enter display configuration_info memory_map When in the memory map section of the emulator configuration the ranges of memory that have been mapped are displayed 129 Examples Configuring the Emulator To display information about the memory map The memory map configuration information shows detailed information about the memory map and how actual mapper resources are allocated due to the current programming of the chip selects in the EMSIM register sets When the emulator automatically expands the memory map to assign actual mapper resources it looks at ranges that have been mapped during emulator configuration To display information about the memory map and its correlation with RAM choose Display Configuration Info gt Memory Map from either the configuration interface the emulator analyzer interface pull down menu Hewlett Packard Emutator Analyzer hptsdzb m6830x File Display Modity Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings Help Aton he Sip Soars Mate esee F ouv_ocheoks Recall Pro w Info Expanded Henory Hap a wore detailed information about the memory nap Type FC Artribute Comment HH FFFFFF
16. 435 lt FILENAM E gt line lt LINE gt lt IDENTIFIER gt SCOPE segment lt SEG NAME gt lt TYPE gt filename module procedure Static task Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands SYMB The parameters are as follows This is an UNIX path specifying a source file If no file is specified and the identifier referenced is not a global symbol in the executable file that was loaded then the default file is assumed the last absolute file specified by a display local_symbols_in command A default file is only assumed when other parameters such as line in the SYMB specification expect a file This specifies that the following numeric value references a line number in the specified source file Prompts you for the line number of the source file Identifier is the name of an identifier as declared in the source file Scope is the name of the portion of the program where the specified identifier is defined or active such as a procedure block This indicates that the following string specifies a standard segment such as PROG DATA or COMN or a user defined segment in the source file Prompts you for entry of the segment name When two identifier names are identical and have the same scope you can distinguish between them by entering the type in parentheses Do not type a space between the identifier name and the type specification The type will be one of the following Specifies that the identifier
17. 71 recall button 25 recalling entries 71 symbol width and copy and paste to 69 text entry 68 with action keys 71 72 with pulldown menus 71 Entry Buffer Recall dialog box operation 73 environment variables UNIX HP64KPATH 89 HP64KSYMBPATH 435 PATH 55 Softkey Interface setting while in 188 eram memory characterization 112 erom memory characterization 112 error log copy command 357 display command 364 0 file 193 event log 59 copy command 357 display command 364 o file 193 event_log 59 EXECUTE CMB signal 312 racing at 317 execution breakpoints disabling 166 displaying and seeing their status 171 172 enabling 165 setting temporary breakpoints 168 exit emulator analyzer interface 47 61 exiting emulation session 62 emulator analyzer windows 61 expressions 208 EXPR syntax 386 388 external analyzer configuration 300 general description 4 labels 302 307 mode 303 539 Index should emulation control 302 using 296 F file breakpoints copying to 193 configuration info copying to 192 data values copying to 192 display area to 192 editing 190 191 editing at address 190 editing at program counter 190 editing at symbol 190 editing from memory display 190 emulator configuration 102 emulator configuration load 105 emulator status copying to 198 error log to 198 event log to 193 global symbols to 193 local symbols to 193 memory to 192 pod
18. A window containing the following information about the failed configuration is opened e Chip select information from the emsim emulator resister set e Bus interface port information from the emsim emulator resister set e The expanded memory map e Reset mode configuration information e A complete list of the configuration inconsistencies This list is not limited to 16 messages as is the Display Configuration Info Diagnostics command This information is shown in the same format as output from the various Display Configuration Info commands Because the old configuration is reloaded when an apply to emulator fails the information displayed in this window is different from the information displayed by the Display Configuration Info commands which display information about the configuration currently loaded Refer to the Verifying the Emulator Configuration section later in this chapter for details on these types of configuration information displays 101 CAUTION Configuring the Emulator To store configuration changes to a file To store configuration changes to a file Choose File Store from the pull down menu in the top level configuration interface window and use the file selection dialog box to name the configuration file If youre using the Softkey Interface the last configuration question Configuration file name lets you name the file to which configuration information
19. Component replacement and internal adjustments must be made by qualified maintenance personnel Do not replace components with the power cable connected Under certain conditions dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cable removed To avoid injuries always disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them WARNING Do Not Service Or Adjust Alone Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present Do Not Substitute Parts Or Modify Instrument Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of the instrument Return the instrument to a Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained Dangerous Procedure Warnings Warnings such as the example below precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed Dangerous voltages capable of causing death are present in this instrument Use extreme caution when handling testing and adjusting Safety Symbols Used In Manuals The following is a list of general definitions of safety symbols used on equipment or in manuals Instruction manual symbol the product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instruction manual in order to protec
20. Disp ORES Dap Sre Prev ip imeamonic i file usr hp64000 deno debug erw hpt nain c data 4 extern void update_syatent j update system variables x extern void tnterrupt_ainfint j simulate an interrupt extern void do_sortlold_e datel char aacti_detal 8 tnt sitze maint init_ayateni SetiClear Software Breakpoint ES Source Run Until Trace Amer 7 Trace Betoro Trace About _coe bph47S8 main o Trace Until ae e e ea a Tomam cuor Te Or using the command line enter run until main main c line 98 After the command has executed notice the highlighted bar indicates the program counter has moved to the specified source line 37 Getting Started Step 7 Display data values Step 7 Display data values 1 Position the mouse pointer over num_checks in the source line that reads num_checks and click the paste mouse button notice num_checks is cut and pasted into the entry buffer 2 Choose Display Data Values Or using the command line enter display data num_checks int32 Figure 7 Hewlett Packard Emutator Analyzer hotsdzb mb830x File Display Modity Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings Aetion veys Ce na s dara GTE rum checks inn Oats iupdate a STATUS M68302 Renning ia weaiter Seftsere brosk O007becKap Biapley data remuichechs inti Command cursor m The num_checks variabl
21. External signals can be from another analyzer or an instrument connected to the CMB or BNC analyzer An instrument that captures data on signals of interest at discreet periods background The emulator mode in which foreground operation is suspended so the emulation processor can be used for communication with the emulation controller The background monitor does not occupy any processor address space background Anemulation monitor program that does not execute as part of the user emulation program and therefore operates in the emulator s background mode monitor background Memory space reserved for the emulation processor when it is operating in memory the background mode Background memory does not take up any of the microprocessor s address space BNC connector A connector that provides a means for the emulator to drive receive a trigger signal to from an external device such as a logic analyzer oscilloscope or HP 64000 UX system breakpoint A point at which emulator execution breaks from the target program and begins executing in the monitor compiler A program that translates high level language source code into object code or produces an assembly language program with subsequent translation into object code by an assembler Compilers typically generate a program listing which may list errors displayed during the translation process 533 da di micr emula emul emul ta segment splay mode embe
22. It uses a special C preprocessor to add statements that write to a data array when program branches are taken After running the program in the emulator using test input you can store the BBA information to a file Then you can generate reports based on the stored information This section shows you how to store BBA data to a file Refer to the HP Branch Validator BBA User s Guide for complete details on the BBA product and how it works To store BBA data to a file Choose File gt Store BBA Data and use the selection dialog box to specify the file name The default file name bbadump data can be selected from the dialog box 196 Using the Emulation Analyzer 197 Using the Emulation Analyzer This chapter describes tasks you may wish to perform while using the emulation analyzer These tasks are grouped into the following sections e The basics of starting stopping and displaying traces e Qualifying trigger and store conditions e Using the sequencer e Displaying the trace list e Saving and restoring trace data and specifications 198 The Basics of Starting Stopping and Displaying Traces This section describes the basic tasks that relate to starting and stopping trace measurements When you start a trace measurement the analyzer begins looking at the data on the emulation processor s bus and control signals on each analyzer clock signal The information seen on a particul
23. The host system could not load the default configuration into the emulator Action Cycle power on the emulator and run the Terminal Interface pv performance verification command on the emulator to verify that it is functioning properly Also verify proper software installation If loading default configuration still fails then call your HP 64000 representative Count out of bounds lt value gt 318 Cause You specified an occurrence count less than 1 or greater than 65535 Action Re enter the command specifying a count value from 1 to 65535 Coverage not supported 180 Cause The memory coverage command cannot be used in this emulator because there is no supporting hardware 460 Error Messages DEMO TEST BOARD not present or powered up 190 Cause Performance verification was attempted without the demo test board present Action Connect the demo test board to the emulator Disable breakpoint failed lt address gt 604 Cause System failure or target condition Action Run performance verification Terminal Interface pv command and check target system Disable breakpoint failed lt address gt 666 Cause System failure or target condition Action Check memory mapping and configuration questions Display register failed lt register gt 634 Cause The emulator was unable to display the register you requested Action To resolve this you must look at the other status messages displayed It
24. The parameters are as follows This option restores all the set options to their default settings Specifies the name of a UNIX environment variable to be set The equals sign is used to equate the lt ENV_VAR gt parameter to a particular value represented by lt VALUE gt This displays source lines in normal video This highlights the source lines on the screen dark characters on light background to differentiate the source lines from other data on the screen 421 langinfo memory noupdate number_of_ source lines ADA Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands set In certain languages you may have symbols with the same names but different types For example in IEEE695 you may have a file named main c and a procedure named main SRU would identify these as mainG module and main procedure The command display local_symbols_in main would cause an error message to appear Ambiguous symbol main procedure module Users of C tend to think the procedure is important and users of ADA tend to think the module is important By entering langinfo and C SRU will interpret the above command to be main procedure With langinfo ADA SRU will interpret the above command to be main module Identifies ANSI C as the language so SRU can use the C hierarchy to disambiguate symbols Identifies ADA as the language so SRU can use the ADA hierarchy to disambiguate symbols Identifies C_IEEE 695 as the language so
25. analyzer the emulator analyzer interface does not control the external analyzer However you can use pod commands to control the independent state analyzer via the terminal interface Refer to the 6830x Installation Service Terminal Interface User s Guide for information on using the terminal interface commands for the external analyzer when it is configured as an independent state analyzer When the external analyzer is configured as an independent timing analyzer you must use a special Timing Analyzer Interface program Refer to the Timing Analyzer Interface User s Guide for information on using the external analyzer when it is configured as an independent timing analyzer The tasks you perform with the external analyzer are grouped into the following sections e Setting up the external analyzer e Configuring the external analyzer 296 Setting Up the External Analyzer This section assumes you have already connected the external analyzer probe to the HP 64700 Card Cage Before you can use the external analyzer you must e Connect the external analyzer probe to the target system e Specify threshold voltages of external trace signals e Label the external trace signals e Select the external analyzer mode To connect the external analyzer probe to the target system 1 Assemble the Analyzer Probe The analyzer probe is a two piece assembly consisting of ribbon cable and 18 probe wires 16 data channels and
26. d Click the suspend softkey Note that tgout trig1 c lt states gt means generate trigl as an output when the state that is lt states gt before the end of the trace memory is captured in the trace memory be e trig1 means enable the emulator to break to its monitor program when it receives trig1 Select a value for lt states before end of memory gt that allows enough time and or memory space for the emulator to break to its monitor program before the trace memory is filled Otherwise some of your program execution will not be captured in the trace Many states may be executed before the emulation break occurs depending on the state of the processor when the trig signal arrives Also if your program executes critical routines in which interrupts are masked the occurrence of trig may be ignored until the critical routine is completed when using a foreground monitor If you are using a foreground monitor enter the following additional pod commands to prevent the trace memory from capturing monitor execution The following example commands will obtain this result in some emulators a Choose Settings gt Pod Command Keyboard b Enter trng addr lt address range occupied by your monitor gt trigger on range address lt address range gt where lt address range gt is expressed as lt first addr gt lt last addr gt Enter tsto r trace store not range d Click the suspend softkey io 226 Using th
27. e REA Graph of Program Activity relative state percents gt 1 99 82 KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KKKK KK Graph of Program Activity relative time percents gt 1 99 84 kkkxkxkxkxkxkxk xkxkxkkkkkkkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkkkkkkkkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkkkkkkxkx k Summary Information for 10 traces Memory Activity State count Relative count 5120 Mean sample 170 67 Mean Standard Dv 29 30 95 Confidence 12 28 Error tolerance Time count Relative Tim Us 2221 20 Program Activity State count Relative count 5120 Mean sample 170 67 Mean Standard Dv 0 58 95 Confidence 0 24 Error tolerance Time count Relative Tim Us 2221 20 Absolute Totals Absolute count state 5120 Absolute count time Us 2221 20 265 Examples Making Software Performance Measurements To set up the trace command for activity measurements To set up the trace command for activity measurements 1 Specify a trace display depth of 512 2 Trace after any state store all states and count time Before you initialize and run performance measurements the current trace command in other words the last trace command entered must be properly set up In general you want to give the SPMT as many trace states as possible to post process so you should increase the trace depth to the maximum number as shown in the following command If you wish to measure activity as a percentage of all activity the
28. enableTutorial resource to True Define the demo index file by setting the demoPopupSub indexFile or tutorialPopupSub indexFile resource For example demoPopupSub indexFile users guest gui_demos index You can use absolute paths for example users guest Index paths relative to the directory in which the interface was started for example mydir indexfile or paths relative to the product directory for example Xdemo Index topics where the product directory is something like usr hp64000 inst emul 64742A If you wish to define a default topic to be selected set the demoTopic or tutorialTopic resource to the topic string For example demoTopic About demos Refer to the previous To customize Graphical User Interface resources section for more detailed information on modifying resources 340 Part 3 Reference 341 Part3 Descriptions of the product in a dictionary or encyclopedia format 342 12 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands 343 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands This chapter describes the emulator analyzer interface commands in alphabetical order First the syntax conventions are described and the commands are summarized How Pull down Menus Map to the Command Line Pull down menu items and corresponding softkey commands are shown below Pull down Command Line File gt Context Directory cd File gt Context Symbols CWS
29. gt USP 00000000 SSP gacecrss DO D7 OGO0000 GOOREGED BOARS4EC corazze BORGNEED cocoooco ooooocoo 0200000 AO A OOQOG4OC FFFFFFFF GG0075SR GOOS7SC2 BOOO7CAC GOGSFSSA GAAOCFS4 aaaCcres Step_FC OO3230Gsp LINK H AB 40000 Next PC O032 48sp i PC 8005234 STATUS 2700 lt a b USP 00000000 SSP ooacrS4 DO D7 GG00000 GOGNESES BOASS4EC GORATZEE BORGAENS oooooooo pooooooo 02020000 AO A OOOO4DC FFFFFFFF 0000759 GOO075SC2 BOOG7TAC GOGSFSSA BURNCFS4 DOOF G lt STATES HESIO2 Stegping complete Brep Laren Mereen If eter J iorteu aedete track E ont Jee Command Cursor Eachus Forward Clear to ena Ciear Help Notice when registers are displayed stepping causes the assembly language instruction just executed to be displayed 40 Getting Started Step 10 Trace the program Step 10 Trace the program When the analyzer traces program execution it looks at the data on the emulation processor s bus and control signals at each clock cycle The information seen at a particular clock cycle is called a state When one of these states matches the trigger state you specify the analyzer stores states in trace memory When trace memory is filled the trace is said to be complete Click on the Recall button to the right of the entry buffer A selection dialog box appears You can select from entry buffer values that have been entered previously or that have been predefined Click on main in the selection dialog bo
30. gt At Q Location File gt Edit At PC Location File gt Term File gt Exit Window save session File gt Exit Locked all windows save session File gt Exit Released all windows release emulator N A N A N A N A N A vi lt file gt no_prompt_before_exit vi lt line gt lt file gt no_prompt_before_exit vi lt line gt lt file gt no_prompt_before_exit end end locked end release_system Display Context Display gt Memory Display Memory Mnemonic Q Display Memory Mnemonic at PC Display Memory Mnemonic Previous Display gt Memory Hex gt bytes Display gt Memory Hex gt words Display Memory Hex long Display Memory Real Q short Display gt Memory Real long Display gt Memory At Display gt Memory Repetitively Display Data Values Display Data Values gt New gt lt type gt Display Data Values gt Add Q lt type gt pwd pws display memory display memory EXPR mnemonic display memory mnemonic at_pc display memory mnemonic previous_display display memory EXPR blocked bytes display memory EXPR blocked words display memory EXPR blocked long display memory EXPR real short display memory EXPR real long display memory EXPR display memory repetitively display data display data EXPR lt type gt display data EXPR lt type gt 345 Emulator Analyzer Interface Comman
31. interface pins of the available ports Display Configuration Info Bus Interface Ports Emulator SIM This displays bus interface ports in the EMSIM emulator register set in a table Use this to see the SIM register values that will be loaded into the processor SIM when the monitor is entered from emulation reset Display Configuration Info gt Memory Map This displays detailed information about the memory map in a table Use this to check the way the memory map has been configured Display Configuration Info gt Reset Mode Value This displays the reset mode configuration value and operation in a table This is the value that will be driven onto the data bus to configure the processor when it comes out of reset The meaning of each data bit in the value is shown Display Configuration Info Initialization Source Code This displays the assembly language program to initialize the processor SIM and RAM based on the current contents of the EMSIM and EMRAM register sets 504 Part 5 Installation Guide 505 Part5 Instructions for installing and configuring the product 506 15 Installation 507 Installation This chapter shows you how to install interface software It also shows you how to verify installation by starting the emulator analyzer interface for the first time These installation tasks are described in the following sections e Where to find information on connectin
32. normally defaults to the backspace key See your UNIX system administrator for more details regarding keyboard definitions The parameters are as follows This causes the system to pause until a pending measurement completes a trace data upload process completes or until a lt CTRL gt c signal is receive If a measurement is not in progress the wait command will complete immediately This causes the system to wait for a lt CTRL gt c signal or for a pending d measurement to complete Whichever occurs first will satisfy the condition This causes the system to pause for a specific number of seconds This prompts you for the number of seconds to insert for the delay 447 Examples Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands wait Note that a wait command in a command file will cause execution of the command file to pause until a lt CTRL gt c signal is received if lt CTRL gt c is defined as the interrupt signal Subsequent commands in the command file will not execute while the command file is paused You can verify whether the interrupt signal is defined as lt CTRL gt c by typing set at the system prompt wait wait 5 wait measurement_complete 448 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands WINDOW WINDOW From trace syntax diagram aa enable gt QUALIFIER ei 4 disable QUALIFIER Lets you select which states are stored by the analyzer WINDOW allows you t
33. several columns at once 250 Example Using the Emulation Analyzer To select the type of countinformation in the trace list Set the width of the address label column to 30 characters and the width of the mnemonic column to 50 characters set width label 30 mnemonic 50 To select the type of count information in the trace list Choose Trace Display Options and in the dialog box select Count Format Relative or Absolute as desired Then click the OK or Apply pushbutton Or using the command line enter commands as follows e To display count information in the trace list relative to the trigger state enter display trace count absolute e To display count information in the trace list relative to the previous trace list state enter display trace count relative Count information may be displayed two ways relative which is the default or absolute When relative is selected count information is displayed relative to the previous state When absolute is selected count information is displayed relative to the trigger condition The count information in the trace list is always displayed if count display is turned on To turn on the trace counting function enter a command beginning with trace counting on the command line Refer to To count states or time later in this manual for details When using the 1K analyzer the trace memory is 512 states deep if counting states or time is turned on and 1024
34. to include the usr hp64000 bin directory and if you have installed software in a directory other than you need to set the HP64000 environment variable The following instructions show you how to set these variables at the UNIX prompt Modify your profile or login file if you wish these environment variables to be set when you log in The following instructions also assume 512 Installation Step 2 Set the necessary environment variables that you re using sh or ksh if you re using csh environment variables are set using the setenv lt VARIABLE gt lt value gt command Set the DISPLAY environment variable by entering DISPLAY lt hostname gt lt server_number gt lt screen_number gt export DISPLAY For example DISPLAY myhost 0 0 export DISPLAY Consult the X Window documentation supplied with the UNIX system documentation for an explanation of the DISPLAY environment variable Set the HP64000 environment variable If you installed the software relative to a directory other than the root directory it is strongly recommended that you use a symbolic link to make the software appear to be under usr hp64000 For example if you installed the software relative to directory users team you would enter In s users team usr hp64000 usr hp64000 If you installed the HP 64000 software relative to the root directory or established a symbolic link to usr hp64000 then you would enter HP64000 usr hp6400
35. 1XXXY supervisor cycle supdata 0XXXX XXXX XXXX 101xy supervisor data cycle supprog 0XXXX XXXX XXXX 110xy supervisor program cycle user OXXXX XXXX XXXX OXxxy user cycle userdata Oxxxx XXXX XXXX OO1xy user data cycle userprog 0XXXX XXXX XXXX 010xy user program cycle word Ollxx XXXX XXXX XXXXY word cycle write OxxxxX XXXX XXXO XXXXY memory write These predefined values may be used as other values would be used For example 212 Using the Emulation Analyzer To position the trace display on screen trace after status write is the same as trace after status 0xxxxxxxxxxx0XXXxy 213 Using the Emulation Analyzer To specify a trigger and set the trigger position To specify a trigger and set the trigger position Enter a trigger state specification in the entry buffer then choose Trace After Trace About or Trace Before When displaying memory in mnemonic format position the mouse pointer over the source line where you want to set the trace trigger press and hold the select mouse button and choose Trace After Trace Before or Trace About from the pop up menu Or using the command line enter trace after trace about or trace before Of fset 4 More data off Address Opcode or Status w Source Lines time count i __suymbols mnemonic w symbols Ss re ative HHHHHHHHHHmain c line 141 thru 162 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH RRR update_system prog maint l2 JSR up update_system prog main
36. 291 trace command setup 266 trace display depth 266 source lines display in trace list 249 set command 423 symbol display 146 source symbol modes setting 185 SPARCsystems installing software 516 minimum system requirements overview 509 SunOS minimum version 509 specify command 425 426 specify trace disassembly options 243 SPMT Software Performance Measurement Tool See software performance measure sq adv captured sequence state 231 copy command 358 display command 365 atus analyzer state qualifier oftkey 211 414 428 predefined values for 211 atus line 25 59 atus range command 218 atus values 217 atus emulator copying to a file 193 ep command 35 160 161 429 430 ep over 178 op_trace command 201 431 orage qualifier 222 ore command 432 433 absolute files 141 143 store trace command 257 store trace_spec command 256 258 summary of commands 352 SunOS minimum version 509 switching directory context in config window 103 directory context in emulator analyzer window 153 symbol context 154 SYMB syntax 434 440 symbol context changing 154 displaying 153 symbol file loading 144 symbols 144 209 displaying 144 displaying in trace list 248 displaying parent from screen 150 global to file 193 local to file 193 set command 423 SYMB syntax 434 440 sync_sim_registers command 441 Rn S S S S UNUUNU SRU Symbolic Retrieval Utilities 435 436
37. Conditions section in the Using the Emulation Analyzer chapter for a list of the predefined values that can be assigned to the status state qualifiers The default STATE expression type is address Hl A 427 address and data EXPR lt external_label gt not status lt STATUS gt Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands STATE The parameters are as follows This specifies that the expression following is an address value This is the default and is therefore not required on the command line when specifying an address expression This lets you specify a combination of status and expression values when status is specified in the state specification The value following this softkey is searched for on the lines that monitor the emulation processor s data bus An expression is a combination of numeric values symbols operators and parentheses specifying an address data status or executed address value See the EXPR syntax diagram This represents a defined external analyzer label This specifies that the analyzer will search for the logical not of a specified state this includes any address that is not in the specified state The value following this softkey is searched for on the lines that monitor other emulation processor signals This prompts you to enter a status value in
38. Control Board Speed 20 1 MHz Memory 1024 Kbytes BANK 0 HP 64171B 35 ns or HP 64172B 20 ns 1 MByte Memory Module HP64740 Emulation Analyzer Version A 02 02 13Mar91 530 Installing Updating Emulator Firmw are If there is a power failure during a firmware update If there is a power failure during a firmware update If there is a power glitch during a firmware update some bits may be lost during the download process possibly resulting in an HP 64700 that will not boot up Repeat the firmware update process If the HP 64700 is connected to the LAN in this situation and you are unable to connect to the HP 64700 after the power glitch try repeating the firmware update with the HP 64700 connected to an RS 232 or RS 422 interface 531 532 Glossary absolute file This file contains machine readable instructions and or data the instructions and or data are stored at absolute addresses Absolute files are generated by the compiler assembler linker These files are loaded into memory for execution by the target processor access mode Specifies the types of cycles used to access target system memory locations For example a byte access mode tells the monitor program to use load store byte instructions to access target memory arm condition A condition that reflects the state of a signal external to the analyzer The arm condition can be used in branch or storage qualifiers
39. File gt Load Emulator Config load configuration File gt Load Executable load lt abs_file gt File Load Program Only load lt abs_file gt nosymbols File Load Symbols Only File gt Load Trace Data File gt Load Trace Spec File gt Store gt Trace Data File gt Store gt Trace Spec File gt Store gt BBA Data File gt Copy Display File gt Copy Memory File gt Copy Data Values File gt Copy Configuration Info File gt Copy Trace File gt Copy Registers File gt Copy Breakpoints File Copy Status File gt Copy Global Symbols File gt Copy Local Symbols File Copy Pod Commands File gt Copy Error Log File gt Copy Event Log load symbols load trace lt FILE gt load trace lt FILE gt store trace store trace_spec bbaunload copy display to copy memory to copy data to copy configuration_info to copy trace to copy registers to copy software_breakpoints to copy status to copy global_symbols to copy local_symbols_in SYMB to copy pod_command to copy error_log to copy event_log to 344 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands Pull down Command Line File gt Log Playback lt command file gt File gt Log Record log_commands to File gt Log Stop log_commands off File gt Emul700 Performance Analyzer File gt Emul700 Emulator Analyzer File gt Emul700 Timing Analyzer File gt Emul700 SPA for VRTXsa File gt Emul700 SPA for VRTX File gt Edit File File gt Edit
40. Symbols from the pop up menu Examples Hewlett Packard Emutator Analyzer hptsdzb mG830x Action keys a a NA ee E E Break E E highlighted symbol by ake Pecali Os A Address ran OF feet OSS BA choosing this menu item res 0154 urite_hduvr F4 Statio syrbols Supbol nane Segnent Of feet JSR_ENTRY STaTSs Build seccessfel ac wermings were taaced dtaplay globsl_auyrbols Lion Jfa Jf aren J tioplou mesira eres ene leer Command Cursor 150 Examples Copy the full name of the highlighted symbol to the entry buffer by choosing this menu item Using the Emulator To copy and paste a full symbol name to the entry buffer To copy and paste a full symbol name to the entry buffer When displaying symbols position the mouse pointer over the symbol press and hold the select mouse button and choose Cut Full Symbol Name from the pop up menu Once the full symbol name is in the entry buffer you can use it with pull down menu items or paste it to the command line area By cutting the full symbol name you get the complete names of symbols that have been truncated Also you are guaranteed of specifying the proper scope of the symbol Hewlett Packard Emutator Analyzer hptsdzb m6830 File Display Mody Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings haton neys Dap Set Make isp Sre Prev Run ier to jf Break _ _Step Asm _ Reg 2ox aC Gk agibo l
41. a TR extension This option stores the current trace specification in the specified file with a TS extension A comma separates memory expressions in the command line store memory 800H thru 20FFH to TEMP2 store memory EXEC thru DONE to 12 10 T store trace TRACE GI store trace_spec TRACI The display memory display trace and load commands 433 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands SYMB SYMB SYMB as lt SYMB gt ra procedure entry_exit_range segment lt SEG_NAME gt l Sea PINE U a lime H lt LINEH gt m FILE lt FILENAME gt H lt FILENAME gt SCOPE lt SYMB gt SCOPE lt FILENAME gt SCOPE SCOPE lt IDENTIFIER gt lt TYPE gt 434 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands SYMB This parameter is a symbolic reference to an address address range file or other value Note that if no default file was defined by executing the command display local_symbols_in SYMB or with the cws command a source file name lt FILE gt must be specified with each local symbol in a command line Symbols may be e Combinations of paths filenames and identifiers defining a scope or referencing a particular identifier or location Gncluding procedure entry and exit poin
42. a new trace display in another emulator analyzer window 187 Examples Examples Using System Commands With the Softkey Interface system commands you can e Set UNIX environment variables while in the Softkey Interface e Display the name of the emulation module e Display the event log e Display the error log To set UNIX environment variables Using the command line enter set lt VAR gt You can set UNIX shell environment variables from within the Softkey Interface with the set lt environment_variable gt lt value gt command To set the PRINTER environment variable to Ip s set PRINTER Ip s After you set an environment variable from within the Softkey Interface you can verify the value of it by entering set To display the name of the emulation module Using the command line type the name_of_module command While operating your emulator you can verify the name of the emulation module This is also the logical name of the emulator in the emulator device file To display the name of your emulation module 188 Using the Emulator To display the event log name_of_module The name of the emulation module is displayed on the status line To display the event log Choose Display Event Log Position the mouse pointer on the status line press and hold the select mouse button and then choose Display Event Log from the pop up menu Or using
43. an address range The SPMT shows you the percentage of analyzer trace states that are in the specified address range as well as the percentage of time taken by those states Two types of activity are measured memory activity and program activity Memory activity is all activity that occurs within the address range Program activity is the activity caused by instruction execution in the address range Program activity includes opcode fetches and the cycles that result from the execution of those instructions reads and writes to memory stack pushes etc For example suppose an address range being measured for activity contains an opcode that causes a stack push which results in multiple write operations to the stack area outside the range The memory activity measurement will count only the stack push opcode cycle However the program activity measurement will count the stack push opcode cycle and the write operations to the stack By comparing the program activity and the memory activity in an address range you can get an idea of how much activity in other areas is caused by the code being measured An activity measurement report of the code prog data and stack sections of a program is shown below This section describes how to e Set up the trace command for activity measurements e Initialize activity performance measurements e Interpret activity measurement reports 263 Label prog data stack Mak
44. and start the Graphical User Interface on HP 9000 systems Minimum Sun SPARCsystem Hardware and System Requirements The following is a set of minimum hardware and system recommendations for operation of the Graphical User Interface on Sun SPARCsystem SunOS or Solaris workstations SunOS The Graphical User Interface software is designed to run on a Sun SPARCsystem with SunOS version 4 1 or 4 1 1 or greater and Solaris version 2 3 Each tape uses the QIC 24 data format 64700 Operating Environment The Graphical User Interface requires version A 04 10 or greater of the 64700 Operating Environment The Graphical User Interface version is A 04 00 Hardware and Memory Any workstation used with the Graphical User Interface should have a minimum of 16 megabytes of memory A color display is also highly recommended From here you should proceed to the section titled Installation for Sun SPARCsystems for instructions on how to install verify and start the Graphical User Interface on SPARCsystem workstations 509 Connecting the HP 64700 to a Computer or LAN Refer to the HP 64700 Series Installation Service Guide for instructions on connecting the HP 64700 to a host computer via RS 422 or RS 232 or LAN and setting the HP 64700 s configuration switches RS 422 and RS 232 are only supported on HP 9000 Series 300 400 machines 510 Installing HP 9000 Software This section shows you how to install the Grap
45. at any time to verify that all files required by the products are in place in the file system If required files are not found this script will attempt to symbolically link them from the HP64000 install directory to their proper locations Run the script HP64000 bin envinstall Step 5 Map your function keys If you are using the conventional Softkey Interface map your function keys by following the steps below Copy the function key definitions by typing cp HP64000 etc ttyswre ttyswrc This creates key mappings in the ttyswrc file in your HOME directory Remove or comment out the following line from your xinitrc file xmodmap e keysym F1 Help If any of the other keys F1 F8 are remapped using xmodmap comment out those lines also 519 Installation Step 5 Map your function keys Add the following to your profile or login file stty erase H setenv KEYMAP sun The erase character needs to be set to backspace so that the Delete key can be used for delete character If you want to continue using the F1 key for HELP you can use use F2 F9 for the Softkey Interface All you have to do is set the KEYMAP variable If you use OpenWindows type setenv KEYMAP sun 2 9 If you use xterm windows the xterm window program is located in the directory usr openwin demo type setenv KEYMAP xterm 2 9 Reminder If you are using OpenWindows add usr openwin bin to the end of the PATH definition and
46. configures the processor SIM exists but you don t know what its values are In this case you can use the default configuration run from reset to execute the initialization code and use this command to configure the emulator to match the processor SIM At any time you can verify if the SIM and emulator hardware EMSIM are programmed the same with the Display SIM Register Differences pull down menu or sync_sim_registers difference from the command line Any differences between the two register sets will be listed It should be noted that the emulator hardware is programmed solely from the EMSIM register set and is therefore static with respect to the application program No attempt is made to update the programming of the emulator hardware by tracking instructions that will program the processor SIM This section shows you how to e View the SIM register differences e Synchronize to the 6830x SIM registers e Synchronize to the EMSIM registers e Restore default values in the EMSIM registers To view the SIM register differences Choose Display SIM Register Differences from the emulator analyzer interface pull down menu Or using the command line enter sync_sim_registers difference 138 Examples Using the Emulator To synchronize to the 6830x SIM registers To display the SIM register differences Hewlett Packard Emulator Anatyzer hpleds2 m6830x File Display Modify Execution Breakpoints Trace S
47. connect the external analyzer to target system signals Any clock other than the clock source of the emulator Typically the clock of the target system is used as an external clock for emulation tests and measurements The mode in which the emulator is executing the user program In other words the mode in which the emulator operates as the target microprocessor would This is the name assigned to the detection of at least one transition in both directions between any two sampling clock pulses during a timing measurement When the same secondary branch condition is used for all terms in the analyzer s sequencer and secondary branches are always back to the first term A computer to which an HP emulator can be connected A host computer may run interface programs that control the emulator Host computers may also be used to develop programs to be downloaded into the emulator The hardware frame and power supply built to accept installation of emulation and analysis board assemblies and to provide interconnections for boards and interconnections for development stations that control the development hardware The monitor is a collection of routines that perform many of the functions needed in an emulator such as displaying the content of registers or loading code into memory so that the code can be executed during a test Another name for Terminal Interface commands The Terminal Interface is the low level interface that resides
48. current trace command should be the default in other words trace lt RETURN gt The default trace command triggers on any state and all captured states are stored It is important that time be counted by the analyzer otherwise the SPMT measurements will not be correct Also since states are stored after the trigger state the maximum number of captured states appears in each trace list You can qualify trace commands any way you like to obtain specific information However when you qualify the states that get stored in the trace memory your SPMT results will be biased by your qualifications the percentages shown will be of only those states stored in the trace list To specify a trace depth of 512 display trace depth 512 To trace after any state store all states and count time trace counting time 266 Making Software Performance Measurements To initialize activity performance measurements To initialize activity performance measurements Use the performance_measurement_initialize command After you set up the trace command you must tell the SPMT the address ranges on which you wish to make activity measurements This is done by initializing the performance measurement You can initialize the performance measurement in the following ways e Use default initialization using global symbols if the symbols database is loaded e Initialize with user defined files e Initialize with global symbols Initial
49. demos or tutorials 338 Reference Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands 344 Commands 352 bbaunld 353 break 354 cmb_execute 355 copy 356 copy local_symbols_in 359 copy memory 360 copy registers 362 copy trace 363 display 364 display configuration_info 366 display data 369 display global_symbols 372 display local_symbols_in 373 display memory 374 display registers 378 display simulated_io 379 display software_breakpoints 380 display trace 381 end 385 EXPR 386 17 Contents FCODE 389 forward 390 help 391 load 393 log_commands 395 modify 396 modify configuration 397 modify keyboard_to_simio 398 modify memory 399 modify register 402 modify SIM registers 403 performance_measurement_end 405 performance_measurement_initialize 406 performance_measurement_run 408 pod_command 409 QUALIFIER 411 RANGE 413 reset 415 run 416 SEQUENCING 418 set 420 specify 425 STATE 427 step 429 stop_trace 431 store 432 SYMB 434 sync_sim_registers 441 trace 442 TRIGGER 445 wait 447 WINDOW 449 18 13 Part 4 14 Part 5 15 Contents Error Messages Error Messages 452 Concept Guide Concepts Concepts 494 X Resources and the Graphical User Interface 495 Concepts of the EMSIM 502 Installation Guide Installation Installation 508 Connecting the HP 64700 to a Computer or LAN 510 Installing HP 9000 Software 511 Step 1 Inst
50. directory 498 XENVIRONMENT variable 499 Xdefaults file 498 usr hp64000 lib X11 HP64_schemes 501 app defaults file 498 544 Safety Summary of Safe Procedures The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of this instrument Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design manufacture and intended use of the instrument Hewlett Packard Company assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements Ground The Instrument To minimize shock hazard the instrument chassis and cabinet must be connected to an electrical ground The instrument is equipped with a three conductor ac power cable The power cable must either be plugged into an approved three contact electrical outlet or used with a three contact to two contact adapter with the grounding wire green firmly connected to an electrical ground safety ground at the power outlet The power jack and mating plug of the power cable meet International Electrotechnical Commission IEC safety standards Do Not Operate In An Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable gases or fumes Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard Keep Away From Live Circuits Operating personnel must not remove instrument covers
51. don t get a dialog box from which to choose configuration sections however you have access to the same configuration options through a series of configuration questions 98 Configuring the Emulator To start the configuration interface Examples The 6830x emulator configuration interface top level dialog box is shown below Emulator Configuration hplsds2 m6830x The menu bar 9S File Display Help Emulator Configuration Sections O General Items Clicking on one of these lines selects a particular configuration section O Reconfigure Internal Registers O Memory Map CO Emulator Pod Settings O Debug Trace Options O Simulated 10 Clicking this button loads configuration changes into Analyzer Configuration Sections the emulator E O Interactive Measurement Specification Apply to Emulator This portion of the dialog box displays configuration status information 99 Configuring the Emulator To modify a configuration section To modify a configuration section 1 Start the emulator configuration interface 2 Click on a section name in the configuration interface top level dialog box 3 Use the section dialog box to make changes to the configuration As soon as you change a configuration option the change is recorded as seen by the Changes Not Loaded message in the top level dialog If youre using the Softkey Interface The configuration questions in the General Items s
52. entries for the Symbol Scope Selection dialog box by setting X resources see the Setting X Resources chapter Displaying local symbols or displaying memory in mnemonic format causes the working symbol context to change as well The new context will be that of the local symbols or memory locations displayed 154 Executing User Programs You can use the emulator to run programs break program execution into the monitor step through the program by high level source lines or by assembly language instructions and reset the emulation processor When displaying memory in mnemonic format a highlighted bar shows the current program counter address When you step the mnemonic memory display is updated to highlight the new program counter address When displaying resisters the register display is updated to show you the contents of the registers after each step You can open multiple interface windows to display memory in mnemonic format and registers at the same time Both windows are updated after stepping ES Note A stack pointer must be initialized prior to execution If you have set the Reset Vectors option of the Emulation Configuration options to Auto Reset the stack pointer is automatically reset If you have not set Reset Vectors to Auto you must manually reset the pointers through the Emulation Configuration menu prior to each execution This section describes how to e Start the emulator running th
53. file 193 registers to file 193 trace listing to file 192 count states 220 221 count time 220 221 count occurrence 219 cursor buttons 26 D data copy command 357 display command 369 371 data analyzer state qualifier softkey 211 418 428 data range command 218 data values 183 217 adding items to existing display 184 clearing display and adding item 184 copying to a file 192 displaying 183 data values displaying 38 decimal numbers 208 demos setting up 338 340 demultiplexing using slave clocks for 304 306 demux slave clock mode 305 dequeuer how it works 244 device table file 32 55 56 dialog box 73 75 Command Recall operation 73 80 Directory Selection 153 Directory Selection operation 73 75 Entry Buffer Recall operation 71 73 File Selection operation 73 74 Trace Specification Selection operation 206 dialog box trace options 238 directory context changing in configuration window 103 changing in emulator analyzer window 153 displaying from configuration window 103 displaying from emulator analyzer window 153 Directory Selection dialog box operation 73 75 display area 25 columns 331 copying to a file 192 lines 331 332 display command 364 365 configuration info 366 368 data 369 371 error_log 364 event_log 364 global_symbols 372 local_symbols_in 373 memory 374 377 memory mnemonic 33 177 pod_command 365 registers 173 174 378 simulated_io 194 196
54. format as specified in the last display trace command Initial values are the same as specified by the last display trace command The parameters are as follows This specifies the trace list line number from which copying will begin Use this with from_line_number and thru_line_number to specify the starting and ending trace list lines to be copied Specifies the last line number of the trace list to include in the copied range copy trace to tlist copy trace from_line_number 0 thru_line_number 5 to longtrac The display trace and store trace commands 363 data error_log event_log global_ symbols Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display display DATA gt lt RETURN gt CONFIGURATION_INFO GLOBAL_SYMBOLS LOCAL_SYMBOLS_IN MEMORY REGISTERS SIMULATED_IO SOFTWARE_BREAKPOINTS ee TRACE status SS 64749507 This command displays selected information on your screen You can use the lt Up arrow gt lt Down arrow gt lt PREV gt and lt NEXT gt keys to view the displayed information For software_breakpoints data memory and trace displays you can use the lt CTRL gt g and lt CTRL gt f keys to scroll left and right if the information goes past the edge of the screen Depending on the information you select defaults may be the options sel
55. if there is not already an absolute file with the same name Ifa file represented by lt FILE gt already exists you must decide whether to keep or delete the old file If you respond with yes to the prompt the new file replaces the old one If you respond with no the store command is canceled and no data is stored The transfer address of the absolute file is set to zero The parameters are as follows This is a combination of numeric values symbols operators and parentheses specifying a memory address See the EXPR syntax diagram The function code used to define the address space being referenced See the syntax diagram for FCODE to see a list of the function codes available and for an explanation of those codes This represents a file name you specify for the absolute file identifier or trace file where data is to be stored If you want to name a file beginning with a number you must precede the file name with a backslash so the system will recognize it as a file name This causes selected memory locations to be stored in the specified HP64000 format file with a X extension 432 thru to trace trace_spec Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands store This allows you to specify that ranges of memory be stored Use this in the store memory command to separate memory locations from the file identifier This option causes the current trace data to be stored in the specified file with
56. in the SRU symbol database for the absolute file to reference between source lines and assembly language information Refer to Chapter 6 Using the Emulator for more information on SRU and symbol handling 249 Using the Emulation Analyzer To change the column width To change the column width Choose Settings Display Modes and select desired widths for information in the trace list by using the dialog box Refer to the Examples page under To display symbols in the trace list earlier in this chapter for details of how to use the dialog box Or using the command line enter commands as follows e To set the column width for the address column in the trace list enter set width label lt WIDTH gt e To set the column width for the mnemonic column in the trace list enter set width mnemonic lt WIDTH gt e To set the column width for source lines in the trace list enter set width source lt WIDTH gt lt WIDTH gt is an integer between 1 and 80 specifying the width of the column in characters lt WIDTH gt is restricted to certain values which are shown if you press the lt WIDTH gt softkey You can display more information by widening a column or ignore the information by narrowing the column For example you might want to widen the label column so that you can see the complete names of the symbols in that column You can combine multiple options on the command line to set the width for
57. is a source file These refer to module symbols For Ada they are packages Other language systems may allow user defined module names Any procedure or function symbol For languages that allow a change of scope without explicit naming SRU assigns an identifier and tags it with type procedure Static symbols which includes global variables The logical address of these symbols will not change Task symbols which are specifically defined by the processor and language system in use A colon is used to specify the UNIX file path from the line segment or symbol specifier When following the file name with a line or segment selection there must be a space after the colon For a symbol there must not be a space after the colon 436 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands SYMB Examples The following short C code example should help illustrate how symbols are maintained by SRU and referenced in your emulation commands File users dave control c int port_one main int port_value port ptr port _one port_value 10 process_port port_ptr port_value end main File system project1 porthand c include utils c void process_port int port_num int port_data static int i static int i2 for i 0 i lt 64 i i2 i 2 port_num port_data i2 delay Stati int i i 3 port_data port_data i end of process_port File system project1 uti
58. line entry area Allows you to enter commands from the command line 25 Getting Started e Softkey pushbuttons Clicking on these pushbuttons or pressing softkeys places the command in the command line entry area You can press and hold the select mouse button to access the Command Line pop up menu e Command buttons includes command recall button The command Return button is the same as pressing the carriage return key it sends the command in the command line entry area to the emulator analyzer The command Recall button allows you to recall previous or predefined commands When you click on the command Recall button a dialog box appears that allows you to select a command e Cursor buttons for command line area control Allow you to move the cursor in the command line entry area forward or backward clear to the end of the command line or clear the whole command line entry area You can choose not to display the command line area by turning it off For the most common emulator analyzer operations the pull down menus pop up menus and action keys provide all the control you need Choosing menu items that require use of the command line will automatically turn the command line back on Graphical User Interface Conventions Choosing Menu Commands This chapter uses a shorthand notation for indicating that you should choose a particular menu item For example the following instruction Choose File gt Load Configu
59. load commands one for each function code specifier This is necessary to load the various sections of the absolute file into the appropriate function code qualified memory ranges 118 Examples Configuring the Emulator To map memory ranges that use function codes When you do this be sure that all address ranges not mapped that is the other memory mapper term are mapped as target RAM When other is mapped as guarded guarded memory access errors from the attempt to load the absolute file sections that are outside the specified function code range can prevent the absolute file sections that are inside the specified function range from being loaded Suppose you re developing a system with the following characteristics e Input port at 100 hex e Output port at 400 hex e Supervisor program from 1000 through 1fff hex e Supervisor data from 2000 through 2fff hex e User program from 3000 through 3fff hex e User data from 3000 through 3fff hex The last two terms have address ranges that overlap You can use function codes to cause these terms to be mapped to different blocks of memory Suppose also that the only things that exist in your target system at this time are the input and output ports and some control logic no memory is available You can reflect this by mapping the I O ports to target system memory space and the rest of memory to emulation memory space by entering the following mapper commands using the c
60. local symbols Using the command line To display local symbols in a module display local_symbols_in update_sys Hewlett Packard Emutator Analyzer hpisdzb m6830 Fite Display Modity Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings Help Aton bere vaste isp Sre Prev Run rer to Break _ _Step Asm JC Reg aox Te s J updste_syslrodslo gt y Tange _ Segrent BO7EER dats BESEEO const Filename aybols Filename update sys STATUS cm epdete_ags Biapley local_mpbols_in updete_aye Lorn rrace JL stop Jdisvtou meets brook J one lener Command Cursor To display local symbols in a procedure display local_symbols_in update_sys save_points 148 Using the Emulator To display local symbols To display address ranges associated with the high level source line numbers display local_symbols_in update_sys update_sys c Hewlett Packard Envulator Analyzer hptsdzb m6830 File Display Modity Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings Help nation keys tate Oee Bro Prev orf oe prog iA WHH G v prog 6148 STATUS cms epdete_ags update_ags c Biapley local_mpmbols_in update_aya updete_aya c 149 Using the Emulator To display a symbol s parent symbol To display a symbol s parent symbol e When displaying symbols position the mouse pointer over the symbol press and hold the select mouse button and choose Display Parent
61. memory location where the symbol you specify may be located For example if a particular symbol is associated with a range of addresses start will represent the first address in that range This defines either the algebraic negation minus sign or the logical negation NOT sign Parentheses may be used in expressions to enclose numbers For every opening parenthesis a closing parenthesis must exist Note that when C appears on the right side of the status line a valid expression exists The NORMAL key can be accessed at any time but is only valid when C is on the command line 387 Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands EXPR Note that when a thru softkey has been entered a lt EXPR gt prompt appears This saves you from tedious repeated entry of long symbols and expressions For example disp_buf thru 25 is the same as disp_buf thru disp_buf 25 O5fxh Offffh disp_buf 5 symb_tbl offset 2 start mod_name line 15 end The SYMB syntax description 388 none p S sd Sp u ud up Examples Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands FCODE FCODE fcode none sd U ami see Qa The function code is used to define the address space being referenced Select the appropriate function code from those listed below Data space Causes the emulator to ignore the function code bits Program s
62. message will be printed if you have enabled breaks on writes to ROM and the emulation processor attempted a write to a memory location mapped as ROM Action None except troubleshooting your program 490 Part 4 Concept Guide 491 Part 4 Topics that explain concepts and apply them to advanced tasks 492 14 Concepts 493 Concepts This chapter provides conceptual information on the following topics e X resources and the Graphical User Interface e Concepts of the EMSIM 494 X Resources and the Graphical User Interface This section contains more detailed information about X resources and scheme files that control the appearance and operation of the Graphical User Interface This section e Describes the X Window concepts surrounding resource specification e Describes the Graphical User Interface s implementation of scheme files X Resource Specifications An X resource specification is a resource name and a value The resource name identifies the element whose appearance or behavior is to be defined and the value specifies how the element should look or behave For example consider the following resource specification Application form row done background red The resource name is Application form row done background and the value is red Resource Names Follow Widget Hierarchy A widget is an OSF Motif graphic device from which X applications are built F
63. not platform specific therefore they should be placed in the HOME HP64_schemes directory All other scheme files should be placed in the HOME HP64_schemes lt platform gt directory For example cp usr hp64000 lib X11 HP64_schemes HP UX Softkey Color HOME HP64_schemes HP UX Softkey MyColor Note that if your custom scheme file has the same name as the default scheme file the load order requires resources in the custom file to explicitly override resources in the default file Modify the HOME HP64_schemes lt platform gt Softkey lt scheme gt file For example you could modify the HOME HP64_schemes HP UX Softkey MyColor file to change the defined foreground and background colors Also since the scheme file name is different than the default you could comment out various resource settings to cause general foreground and background color definitions to apply to the Graphical User Interface At least one resource must be defined in your color scheme file for it to be recognized 334 Setting X Resources To use customized scheme files 4 If your custom scheme file has a different name than the default you must modify the scheme resource definitions The Graphical User Interface application defaults file contains resources that specify which scheme files are used If your custom scheme files are named differently than the default scheme files you must modify these resource settings so that your customized scheme file
64. occurred while attempting to connect via LAN Action Possibly connecting to an emulator many miles away be patient Illegal status combination Cause You tried to specify combinations of status qualifiers in expressions incorrectly when entering commands Action Refer to the Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands chapter for information about syntax of commands 467 Error Messages Illegal symbol name Cause You tried to specify incorrect symbol names when entering commands Action Specify correct symbol names To see global symbol names use the display global_symbols command To see local symbol names use the display local_symbols_in lt SYMB gt command Incompatible compatibility table entry 206 Cause The emulation firmware ROM is not compatible with the analysis or system firmware in your HP 64700 system Action The ROMs in your emulator must be compatible with each other for your emulation system to work correctly Contact your Hewlett Packard Representative Incompatible with 64700 firmware version 10352 Cause The installed interface firmware combination is incorrect or incompatible Action Upgrade the interface software of product firmware Initialization failed Cause The emulator could not be initialized Action Make sure your data communication switch settings are correct and that all Softkey Interface software has been loaded properly Cycle power on the emulator then try starting up t
65. of the SIM emsim registers e Loading and storing absolute files e Using symbols e Using context commands e Executing user programs starting stopping stepping and resetting the emulator e Using execution breakpoints e Displaying and modifying registers e Displaying and modifying memory e Displaying data values e Changing the interface settings e Using system commands e Using Simulated I O e Using Basis Branch Analysis 136 Using the EMSIM Registers The 6830x processors contain a System Integration Block SIB which integrates various peripherals with with the M68000 core Programming certain parts of the SIB will affect operation of the emulator These emulator sensitive parts of the SIB are referred to as the processor s System Integration Module SIM The SIM contains the BAR and SCR registers along with the chip select port control and interrupt control registers plus any clock control registers if present For the 68302 emulator 64798C the SIM registers are BAR SCR BRO ORO BR1 OR1 BR2 OR2 BR3 OR3 PACNT PADDR PBCNT PBADDR and GIMR The Programming of the SIM registers by the user affects how the emulator must be configured to operate properly For example the GIMR determines how interrupt level 7 is detected by the processor The emulator uses interrupt level 7 to break to the monitor thus must be configured according to the expectations of the processor The chip select re
66. of the display to scroll up and down Use the arrows at the bottom of the display if any to scroll left and right Using the command line enter commands as follows e To roll the trace display to the left press lt Ctrl gt f simultaneously e To roll the trace display to the right press lt Ctrl gt g simultaneously e To roll the display down one line press the down arrow key e To roll the display up one line press the up arrow key e To move to the previous page in the trace list press the Pg Up or Prev key e To move to the next page in the trace list press the Pg Dn or Next key Though the trace display is set to 256 or more states only 15 lines may be displayed in the interface window depending on your terminal type You can move through the trace list display using various key combinations You can roll the display left and right only if the trace list is wider than 80 columns This may occur if you increased the width of the columns To disassemble the trace list Choose Trace Display Options and in the dialog box select Data Format Mnemonic Then click the OK or Apply pushbutton Use the mouse to place the cursor on a line in the trace list where you want disassembly to begin Then press the select mouse button and click on Disassemble From in the trace list pop up menu Or using the command line enter commands as follows e To disassemble instruction data in the trace list enter display trace mnemo
67. outside of the currently displayed address range This feature works even if stepping is performed in a different emulation window than one displaying memory mnemonic If no value is entered for lt NUMBER gt times only one step instruction is executed each time you press lt RETURN gt Multiple instructions can be executed by holding down the lt RETURN gt key Also the default step is for assembly code lines not source code lines 429 EXPR FCODE from lt NUM BER gt silently transfer_address source Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands step If the from address option defined by EXPR or transfer_address is omitted stepping begins at the next program counter address The parameters are as follows An expression is a combination of numeric values symbols operators and parentheses specifying a memory address See the EXPR syntax diagram The function code used to define the address space being referenced See the syntax diagram for FCODE to see a list of the function codes available and for an explanation of those codes Use this option to specify the address from which program stepping begins This defines the number of instructions that will be executed by the step command The number of instructions to be executed can be entered in binary B octal O or Q decimal D or hexadecimal H notation When you specify a number of steps this option updates the register
68. permission is prohibited except as allowed under copyright laws RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 II of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 52 227 7013 HEWL ETT PACKARD Company 3000 Hanover St Palo Alto CA 94304 1181 Number of Number of Logical Name Processor 1 em68k m68000 2 em80960 i80960 3 em6830x m6830x Emulator to Update intr usually cntl C or DEL to abort To update firmware in the HP 64700 that contains the 6830x emulator enter WEMA Product 64700 64703 64704 64706 64740 64744 64798 64760 UO AUNE Product to Update intr usually cntl C or DEL to abort 528 Installing Updating Emulator Firmware To update emulator firmware with progflash To update the HP 64798 6830x emulator firmware enter 4 Enable progress messages y n y To enable status messages enter y Checking System firmware revision Mainframe is a 64700B Reading configuration from usr hp64000 inst update 64798 cfg ROM identifier address 2FFFFOH Required hardware identifier 1FFFH 12FFH 1201H 1202H 1203H 1204H 1205H 1206H Control ROM start address 280000H Control ROM size 40000H Control ROM width 16 Programming voltage control address 2FFFFEH Programming voltage control v
69. qualifier in the emulation trace specification or is currently specified in the emulation trace format Action You stop the trace or must change the trace command before you can delete the label Unable to delete label used by external state analyzer lt label gt 1106 Cause This error occurs when you attempt to delete an external trace label which is currently being used as a qualifier in the external state trace specification or is currently specified in the external trace format Action You stop the trace or must change the trace command before you can delete the label Unable to delete label used by external timing analyzer lt label gt 1107 Cause This error occurs when you attempt to delete an external trace label which is currently being used as a qualifier in the external timing trace specification Action Remove the label from the external timing analyzer specifications and then delete the label Unable to load new memory map old map reloaded 725 Cause There is not enough emulation memory left for this request Action Reduce the amount of emulation memory requested 486 Error Messages Unable to modify register lt register gt lt value gt 632 Cause The emulator was unable to modify the register you requested Action To resolve this you must look at the other status messages displayed It s likely that emulator was unable to break to the monitor to perform the register modification See
70. register sets This command identifies errors that result from inconsistencies between related configuration values These errors should be resolved in order for the emulator to operate correctly This command also provides status and warning messages about expectations and limitations of the emulator of which you should be aware If no messages are returned no inconsistencies are found in the emulator configuration 133 Examples Configuring the Emulator To check for configuration inconsistencies To check for inconsistencies between the configuration and the EMSIM registers choose Display Configuration Info Diagnostics from either the configuration interface the emulator analyzer interface pull down menu Hewlett Packard Emulator Anatyzer hpleds2 m6830 File Display Modity Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings Kation ker Waste op Sr Prev ftom Mero Break Step asm _ Regan ved t nit get list expectations snd eeulstor of abich the user should be made susre or 6 HOA amsor No Lnconsi ster or potential problems STATES HESW2 Heening in mooi ter Sefere break 0002bcePse fh splay confi guration_into Ceen Mereen Jf atar Jfisortes otera coe 134 Using the Emulator 135 Using the Emulator This chapter describes general tasks you may wish to perform while using the emulator These tasks are grouped into the following sections e Using the emulation copy
71. resources identify scheme files that contain additional X resource specifications Scheme files group resource specifications for different displays computing environments and languages Resources for Graphical User Interface Schemes There are five X resources that identify scheme files HP64_Softkey labelScheme Names the scheme file to use for labels and button text Values can be Label LANG or a custom scheme file name The default uses the LANG environment variable if it is set and if a scheme file named Softkey LANG exists in one of the directories searched for scheme files otherwise the default is Label HP64_Softkey platformScheme Names the subdirectory for the platform specific color size and input scheme files This resource should be set to the platform on which the X server is running and displaying the Graphical User Interface if it is different than the platform where the application is running Values can be HP UX SunOS pc xview or a custom platform scheme directory name HP64_Softkey colorScheme Names the color scheme file Values can be Color BW or a custom scheme file name 499 Softkey Label Softkey BW Softkey Color Softkey Large Softkey S mall Softkey Input Concepts HP64_Softkey sizeScheme Names the size scheme file which defines the fonts and the spacing used Values can be Large Small or a custom scheme file name HP64_Softkey inputScheme Names the input sch
72. screen 207 Bb Qq0o D d default Hh Qualifying Trigger and Store Conditions This section describes tasks relating to the qualification of trigger and storage states You can trigger on or store specific states or specific values on a set of trace signals which are identified by trace labels Also you can prestore states The prestore qualifier is a second storage qualifier used for storing states that occur before the normally stored states Prestore is useful for capturing entry points to procedures or for identifying where global variables are accessed from This section describes how to e Specify a trigger and set the trigger position e Use address data and status values in trace expressions e Enter a range in a trace expression e Trigger on a number of occurrences of some state e Break emulator on execution on the analyzer trigger Count states or time e Define a storage qualifier e Define a prestore qualifier e Trace activity leading up to a program halt Expressions in Trace Commands When modifying the analysis specification you can enter expressions which consist of values symbols and operators Values Values are numbers in hexadecimal decimal octal or binary These number bases are specified by the following characters Binary example 10010110b Octal example 3770 or 377q Decimal example 2048d or 2048 Hexadecimal example 0a7fh You must precede any hexad
73. software breakpoint or could have resulted from a lt CTRL gt c break Action Retry the operation If breaks are occurring continuously you may wish to disable some of the break conditions Memory range overflow Cause A modify memory command is attempted that would cross physical 0 Action Limit the modify memory command to not overflow physical 0 or break the command into two separate modify commands Memory range overflow 710 Cause Accessing a word or short word for example display memory Offffffff blocked word will cause a rounding error that overflows physical memory Action Reduce memory display request 473 Error Messages Message overflow 141 Cause The display configuration_info diagnostics command may emit more messages than HP 64700 will allow This occurs when more than 16 messages have been emitted M6830x probe not connected or configured incorrectly 160 Cause The emulator probe hardware is not that for the M6830x emulator Action make sure the three cables from the emulator control board to the emulator are properly connected Make sure you are using the proper hardware Negated patterns not allowed in timing 2030 Cause This error occurs when you attempt to specify a not equals expression when defining the external timing trigger You can only specify labels which equal patterns of 1 s 0 s or X s Action Do not attempt to specify negated timing patterns No address
74. specify the address range associated with each label the SPMT will search the symbol database for the addresses of each label An easy way to create the addr_ranges file is to use the copy global_symbols command to copy the global symbols to a file named addr_ranges then fork a shell to UNIX by entering lt RETURNS gt on the Softkey Interface command line and edit the file so that it contains the procedure names shown above Enter a lt CTRL d at the UNIX prompt to return to the Softkey Interface To initialize the activity measurement with a user defined address range file performance_measurement_initialize addr_ranges 270 Making Software Performance M easurements To interpret activity measurement reports To interpret activity measurement reports View the performance measurement report Activity measurements are measurements of the number of accesses reads or writes within an address range The reports generated for activity measurements show you the percentage of analyzer trace states that are in the specified address range as well as the percentage of time taken by those states The performance measurement must include four traces before statistics mean and standard deviation appear in the activity report The information you will see in activity measurement reports is described below Memory Activity All activity found within the address range Program Activity All activity caused by instruction executio
75. terms The part of the analyzer that allows it to search for a certain sequence of states before triggering Occurs when the analyzer finds the primary or secondary branch state specified at a certain level and begins searching for the states specified at another level The microprocessor system which the emulator plugs into This is memory space that resides within your target system hardware A collection of states captured on the emulation bus in terms of the emulation bus analyzer or on the analyzer trace signals in terms of the external analyzer and stored in trace memory The captured analyzer state about which other captured states are stored The trigger state specifies when the trace measurement is taken 536 Index A about trigger position specification 214 216 absolute files 393 loading 141 loading without symbols 142 storing memory contents into 143 access size target memory 533 action keys 25 custom 336 operation 72 with command files 336 with entry buffer 71 72 activity measurements SPMT 263 additional symbols for address 272 confidence level 273 error tolerance 273 interpreting reports 271 280 mean 271 relative and absolute counts 272 standard deviation 272 symbols within range 272 trace command setup 266 address not range command 218 values 217 address analyzer state qualifier softkey 211 418 428 address overlays memory mapping 118 address qualifiers
76. that are presently open 465 Error Messages File perf out does not exist Cause You tried to execute the restore command to continue a previous software performance measurement and the SPMT software found that no performance_measurement_end command was previously executed to create a file from which restore could be performed Action Execute a new SPMT measurement File perf out not generated by measurement software Cause The file named perf out exists in the current directory but it was not created by the performance_measurement_end command Action Rename the old perf out file or move it to another directory File transfer aborted 410 Cause A transfer operation was aborted due to a break received most likely a lt CTRL gt c from the keyboard Action If you typed lt CTRL gt c you probably did so because you thought the transfer was about to fail Retry the transfer making sure to use the correct command options If you are unsuccessful make sure that the data communications parameters are set correctly on the host and on the HP 64700 then retry the operation Fuse F1 blown on HP64748C ABG Control Board 191 Cause Hardware fault Guarded memory access break 614 Cause This message is displayed if the emulation processor attempts to read or write memory mapped as guarded Action Troubleshoot your program or you may have mapped memory incorrectly Guarded memory break lt addre
77. the from address and the to address The following equation is used to calculate the average time amount of time for all intervals mean gt number of intervals 286 mean Ssumq Om Pm Making Software Performance M easurements To interpret duration measurement reports Standard Deviation Deviation from the mean of time The following equation is used to calculate standard deviation N std dev Wot E 2s sumq N mean i Where Number of intervals Average time Sum of squares of time in the intervals Error Tolerance and Confidence Level An approximate error may exist in displayed information Error tolerance for a level of confidence is calculated using the mean of the standard deviations and the mean of the means Error tolerance gives an indication of the stability of the information For example if the error is 5 for a confidence level of 95 then you can be 95 confident that the information has an error of 5 or less The Student s T distribution is used in these calculations because it improves the accuracy for small samples As the size of the sample increases the Student s T distribution approaches the normal distribution The following equation is used to calculate error tolerance error pct ae x 100 Where Mean of the standard deviations in each time range Table entry in Student s T table for a given confidence level Number of intervals Mean of the means
78. the J and K clock inputs attached to a connector Either end of the ribbon cable may be connected to the 18 wire connector and the connectors are keyed so they may only be attached one way Align the key of the ribbon cable connector with the slot in the 18 wire connector and firmly press the connectors together RIBBON CABLE 18 WIRE CONNECTOR 297 Using the External State Analyzer To connect the external analyzer probe to the target system 2 Attach grabbers to probe wires Each of the 18 probe wires has a signal and a ground connection Each probe wire is labeled for easy identification Thirty six grabbers are provided for the signal and ground connections of each of the 18 probe wires The signal and ground connections are attached to the pin in the grabber handle CONNECTING PIN GRABBER HANDLE 298 Using the External State Analyzer To connect the external analyzer probe to the target system Turn OFF target system power before connecting analyzer probe wires to the target system The probe grabbers are difficult to handle with precision and it is extremely easy to short the pins of a chip or other connectors which are close together with the probe wire while trying to connect it CAUTION 3 You can connect the grabbers to pins connectors wires etc in the target system Pull the hilt of the grabber towards the back of the grabber handle to uncover the wire hook When
79. the SIM registers are BAR SCR BRO ORO BR1 OR1 BR2 OR2 BR38 OR3 PACNT PADDR PBCNT PBDDR and GIMR The programming of the SIM registers by the user affects how the emulator must be configured to operate properly For example the GIMR determines how interrupt level 7 is detected by the processor The emulator uses interrupt level 7 to break to the monitor and so must be configured to what the processor expects The chip select registers determine the DTACK source for a bus cycle within the range of a chip select This information is needed for the emulator to properly complete bus cycles The EMSIM registers which are an emulator version of the SIM registers are used to configure the emulator hardware The EMSIM registers are usually set to the after initialization code values desired for the SIM registers By default the EMSIM registers contain the processor reset SIM values refer to the appropriate Motorola MC6830x User s Manual for specific values Therefore the default programming of the emulator hardware matches the SIM reset values For the 68302 emulator 64798C the EMSIM registersare EMBAR EMSCR EMBRO EMORO EMBR1 EMOR1 EMBR2 EMOR2 EMBR3 EMOR3 EMPACNT EMPADDR EMPBCNT EMPBDDR and EMGIMR Some processors such as the MC68LC302 do not connect certain upper address signals to the outside of the chip For the MC68LC302 the upper four address bits A20 through A23 which are sent to the emulation memory m
80. the command line Status values can be entered from softkeys or typed into the keyboard Numeric values may be entered using symbols operators and parentheses to specify a status value See the EXPR syntax diagram trace before status write trace about address 1000H status write The trace command and the QUALIFIER syntax description and the trace command examples 428 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands step step lt NUMBER gt source Yi EXPR m FCODE P T transfer_ address ey silently The step command allows sequential analysis of program instructions by causing the emulation processor to execute a specified number of assembly instructions or source lines You can display the contents of the processor registers trace memory and emulation or target memory after each step command Source line stepping is implemented by single stepping assembly instructions until the next PC is beyond the address range of the current source line When attempting source line stepping on assembly code with no associated source line stepping will complete when a source line is found Therefore stepping only assembly code may step forever To abort stepping press lt CTRL gt c When displaying memory mnemonic and stepping the next instruction that will step is highlighted The memory mnemonic display autopages to the new address if the next PC goes
81. the cursor arrives at the beginning of a command word or token the softkey labels change to display the possible choices at that level of the command See To edit the command line using the mouse and the command line pushbuttons and To edit the command line using the keyboard for information about additional editing operations you can perform To recall commands Click the pushbutton labeled Recall in the Command Line to display the dialog box Choose a command from the buffer list You can also enter a command directly into the text entry area of the dialog box Because all command entry methods in the interface pull down menus action keys and command line entries are echoed to the command line entry area the contents of the Command Recall dialog box is not restricted to just commands entered directly into the command line entry area The Command Recall dialog box contains a list of interface commands executed during the session as well as any predefined commands present at interface startup 80 Entering Commands To get help about the command line If you exit the emulation analysis session with the interface locked commands in the recall buffer are saved and will be present when you restart the interface You can predefine entries for the Command Recall dialog box and define the maximum number of entries by setting X resources refer to the Setting X Resources chapter See To use dialog boxes for
82. the demo 32 Step 2 Display the program in memory 33 Step 3 Run from the transfer address 34 Step 4 Step high level source lines 35 Step 5 Display the previous mnemonic display 36 Step 6 Run until an address 37 Step 7 Display data values 38 Step 8 Display registers 39 Step 9 Step assembly level instructions 40 Step 10 Trace the program 41 Step 11 Patch assembly language code 43 Step 12 Exit the emulator analyzer interface 47 User s Guide Plugging into a Target System Plugging the Emulator into a Target System 52 Starting and Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces Starting and Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces 54 Starting the Emulator Analyzer Interface 55 Contents To start the emulator analyzer interface 55 To start the interface using the default configuration 57 To runa command file on interface startup 57 To display the status of emulators 57 To unlock an interface that was left locked by another user 58 Opening Other HP 64700 Interface Windows 59 To open additional emulator analyzer windows 59 To open the software performance analyzer SPA interface window 60 Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces 61 To close an interface window 61 To exit a debug emulation session 62 Entering Commands Entering Commands 64 Using Menus the Entry Buffer and Action Keys 65 To choose a pull down menu item using the mouse method 1 65 To choose a pull down menu item using the mouse method 2 66 To choose a pull down menu item us
83. the file being executed in the emulator target system To reload and display a trace listing saved from that emulation session requires reloading the symbols for test1 Load a trace from a file load trace tracel 259 260 Making Software Performance Measurements 261 Making Software Performance Measurements The Software Performance Measurement Tool SPMT is a feature of the Softkey Interface that allows you to make software performance measurements on your programs The SPMT allows you to make some of the measurements that are possible with the HP 64708 Software Performance Analyzer and its Graphical User Interface HP B1487 The SPMT post processes information from the analyzer trace list When you end a performance measurement the SPMT dumps the post processed information to a binary file which is then read using the perf82 report generator utility Two types of software performance measurements can be made with the SPMT activity measurements and duration measurements This chapter describes tasks you perform while using the Software Performance Measurement Tool SPMT These tasks are grouped into the following sections e Activity performance measurements e Duration performance measurements e Running performance measurements and creating reports 262 Activity Performance Measurements Activity measurements are measurements of the number of accesses reads or writes within
84. the wire hook is around the desired pin or connector release the hilt to allow the grabber spring tension to hold the connection HP PART NO a CLIP 10024A 299 Configuring the External Analyzer After you have assembled the external analyzer probe and connected it to the emulator and target system the next step is to configure the external analyzer The external analyzer is a versatile instrument and you can configure it to suit your needs For example you can specify threshold voltage levels on the external analyzer channels and you can operate the external analyzer in several different modes The default configuration specifies that the external analyzer is aligned with the emulation analyzer TTL level threshold voltages are defined as well as an external label named xbits which contains all 16 channels In order to configure the external analyzer you must first start the configuration interface and access the External Analyzer configuration section refer to the Using the Configuration Interface section in the Configuring the Emulator chapter 300 Using the External State Analyzer To connect the external analyzer probe to the target system Figure 24 External Analyzer Mode Emulator Controls External Bits Yes No Thresh Volt Low Byte amp J Clock Thresh Volt High Byte amp K Clock External Analyzer Mode Slave Clock Settings Slave Clock Mode
85. to be an unused prefetch of the exit state Note that if you are making duration measurements on a function that is recursive or one that has multiple entry and or exit points you may wind up with invalid information This section describes how to e Set up the trace command for duration measurements e Initialize duration performance measurements e Interpret duration measurement reports To set up the trace command for duration measurements 1 Specify a trace display depth of 512 2 Trace after and store only function start and end addresses For duration measurements the trace command must be set up to store only the entry and exit points of the module of interest Since the trigger state is always stored you should trigger on the entry or exit points For example 282 CAUTION Examples Making Software Performance M easurements To set up the trace command for duration measurements trace after symbol_entry or symbol_exit only symbol_entry or symbol_exit counting time The previous command depends on the generation of correct exit address symbols by the software development tools Or trace after module_name start or module_name end only module_name start or module_name end counting time Where symbol_entry and symbol_exit are symbols from the user program Or where module_name is the name of a C function or Pascal procedure and is listed as a procedure symbol in the global symbol displ
86. to the selected destination This represents the name of the help file to be copied Available help file names are displayed on the softkey labels This represents an UNIX filter or pipe where you want to route the output of the copy command UNIX commands must be preceded by an exclamation point An exclamation point following the UNIX command continues command line execution after the UNIX command executes Emulation is not affected when using an UNIX command that is a shell intrinsic Copies all the children of a given symbol to the selected destination See the SYMB syntax page and the Symbolic Retrieval Utilities User s Guide for information on symbol hierarchy Copies a list of the contents of memory to the selected destination This causes any copied information to overwrite an existing file with the same name specified by lt FILE gt If this option is not selected the default operation is to append the copied information to the end of an existing file with the same name that you specify Copies the information into a file without headings This allows you to copy the most recent commands sent to the HP 64700 Series emulator analyzer 357 printer registers software _ breakpoints status to trace wait_for_exit Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands copy This option specifies your system printer as the destination device for the copy command Before you can specify the p
87. to the trigger qualifier This specifies a number of qualifier occurrences of a range or state on which the analyzer is to trigger This determines which of the traced states will be stored in trace memory This prompts you to enter a number of qualifier occurrences 445 Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands TRIGGER trace after MAIN trace after 1000H then data 5 The trace command and examples Also refer to the Making Coordinated Measurements chapter 446 measurement _complete or seconds lt TIM E gt Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands wait wait wait E a lt RETURN gt Ns lt TIME gt wae seconds or measurement_complete Sy lt TIME gt x seconds This command allows you to present delays to the system The wait command can be an enhancement to a command file or to normal operation at the main emulation level Delays allow the emulation system and target processor time to reach a certain condition or state before executing the next emulation command The wait command does not appear on the softkey labels You must type the wait command into the keyboard After you type wait the command parameters will be accessible through the softkeys The system will pause until it receives a lt CTRL gt c signal Note that if set intr lt CTRL gt c was not executed on your system lt CTRL gt c
88. u key combination To copy and paste to the entry buffer To copy and paste a discrete text string as determined by the interface position the mouse pointer over the text to copy and click the paste mouse button To specify the exact text to copy to the entry buffer press and hold the paste mouse button drag the mouse pointer to highlight the text to copy and paste release the paste mouse button You can copy and paste from the display area the status line and from the command line entry area When you position the pointer and click the mouse button the interface expands the highlight to include the most complete text string it considers to be discrete Discrete here means that the interface will stop expanding the 68 Entering Commands To copy and paste to the entry buffer highlight in a given direction when it discovers a delimiting character not determined to be part of the string A common delimiter would of course be a space When you press and hold the mouse button and drag the pointer to highlight text the interface copies all highlighted text to the entry buffer when you release the mouse button Because the interface displays absolute addresses as hex values any copied and pasted string that can be interpreted as a hexadecimal value that is the string contains only numbers 0 through 9 and characters a through f automatically has an h appended Copy and paste and the Entry Buffer If you have
89. update_systemQ function main c line 102 trace after address main main c line 102 occurs 20 219 Examples Using the Emulation Analyzer To break emulator execution on the analyzer trigger To break emulator execution on the analyzer trigger Enter a trigger state specification in the entry buffer then choose Trace Until When displaying memory in mnemonic format position the mouse pointer over the program line which you wish to trace before press and hold the select mouse button and choose Trace Until from the pop up menu Or using the command line use the break_on_trigger option to the trace command The break_on_trigger option to the trace command allows you to cause the emulator to break when the analyzer finds the trigger state Note that the actual break may be several cycles after the analyzer trigger To trace before source line 102 and cause the emulator to break into the monitor when the analyzer triggers trace before address main main c line 102 break_on_trigger To count states or time Create your first specification form on the command line That will enter the proper format in the Trace Specification Selection dialog box Obtain that dialog box by choosing Trace Trace Spec You can click on your specification in the dialog box edit it if desired and click OK Or using the command line enter commands as follows e To count occurrences of a particular bus state in t
90. window registers in another an analyzer trace in a third and data in the fourth 55 Starting and Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces To start the emulator analyzer interface Examples To start the emulator analyzer interface for the 6830x emulator emul700 em6830x The em6830x in the command above is the logical emulator name given in the HP 64700 emulator device table file usr hp64000 etc 64700tab net Blank lines and the rest of each line after a character are ignored The information in each line must be in the specified order with one line for each HP series 64700 emulator Use blanks or tabs to separate fields Channel Logical Processor Remainder of Information for the Channel Type Name Type IP address for LAN connections lan em68 30x m6830x 21 17 9 143 serial em68 30x m6830x myhost dev emcom23 OFF 9600 NONE XON 2 8 If you re currently running the X Window System the Graphical User Interface starts otherwise the Softkey Interface starts The status message shows that the default configuration file has been loaded If the command is not successful you will be given an error message and returned to the UNIX prompt Error messages are described in the Error Messages chapter 56 Examples Starting and Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces To start the interface using the default configuration To start the interface using the default configuration Use the emul70
91. 0 d lt emul_name gt command In the emul700 d lt emul_name gt command the d option starts the default configuration The d option is ignored if the interface is already running in another window or on another terminal To run acommand file on interface startup Use the emul700 c lt cmd_file gt lt emul_name gt command You can cause command files to be run upon starting the interface by using the c lt cmd_file gt option of the emul700 command Refer to the Using Command Files section in the Entering Commands chapter for information on creating command files To start the emulator analyzer interface and run the startup command file emul700 c startup em6830x To display the status of emulators Use the emul700 1 or emul700 lv command The l option of the emul700 command lists the status of all emulators defined in the 64700tab and 64700tab net files If a logical emulator name is included in the command just the status of that emulator is listed You can also use the v option with the l option for a verbose listing of the status information 57 Starting and Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces To unlock an interface that was left locked by another user Examples To list verbosely the status of the emulator whose logical name is em6830x emul700 lv em6830x The information may be similar to em6830x m6830x running user guest description M6830x emulation 512K bytes emul mem user
92. 0 export HP64000 If you did not install relative to the root directory or do not wish to establish a symbolic link you can set the HP64000 variable to the full path that contains the HP 64000 software Again if you installed relative to users team you would enter HP64000 users team usr hp64000 export HP64000 Set the PATH environment variable to include the usr hp64000 bin directory by entering PATH PATH HP64000 bin export PATH Including usr hp64000 bin in your PATH relieves you from prefixing HP 64700 executables with the directory path Set the MANPATH environment variable to include the HP64000 man and HP64000 contrib man directories by entering MANPATH MANPATH HP64000 man HP64000 contrib man export MANPATH Including these directories in your MANPATH variable lets you access the online man page information included with the software 513 Installation Step 3 Verify the softw are installation Step 3 Verify the software installation A number of new filesets were installed on your system during the software installation process This and following steps assume that you chose to load the Graphical User Interface filesets You can use this step to further verify that the filesets necessary to successfully start the Graphical User Interface have been loaded and that customize scripts have run correctly Of course the update process gives you mechanisms for verifying installation but these checks can hel
93. 0 2 WORD env NORMAL CODE 00000400 00000FC0 00000BC1 2 WORD prog NORMAL CODE 00000FC2 00001489 00000AC8 2 WORD const NORMAL RO 00001448A 00001ACF 00000046 2 WORD lib NORMAL CODE 00001AD0 00002663 00000B94 2 WORD libc NORMAL CODE 00002664 00004881 0000221E 2 WORD libm 00004882 00004882 00000000 0 BYTE mon NORMAL CODE 00004882 000049CB 0000014A 2 WORD envdata NORMAL DATA 00007000 00007155 00000156 4 LONG data NORMAL DATA 00007156 00007721 000005CC 2 WORD idata 00007722 00007722 00000000 0 BYTE udata 00007722 00007722 00000000 0 BYTE libdata NORMAL DATA 00007724 00007727 00000004 4 LONG libcdata NORMAL DATA 00007728 00008153 00000A2C 2 WORD mondata NORMAL DATA 00008154 00008177 00000024 2 WORD stack NORMAL DATA 0000B000 00012FFF 00008000 4 LONG heap NORMAL DATA 00013000 00016FFD 00003FFE 4 LONG Notice the ABSOLUTE DATA CODE and ROM sections occupy locations 0 through 49CBH Because the contents of these sections will eventually reside in target system ROM this area should be characterized as ROM when mapped This will prevent these locations from being written over accidentally If breaks on writes to ROM are enabled instructions that attempt to write to these locations will cause emulator execution to break into the monitor Also notice the DATA sections occupy locations 7000H through 8177H and OBOOOH through 16FFDH Since these sections are written to they should be characterized as RAM when mapped 114
94. 00 Series Maximum Total Length of Cable Restrictions on the CMB Emulators Connection 2 to 8 100 meters None 9 to 16 50 meters None 9 to 16 100 meters Only 8 emulators may have rear panel pullups connected 17 to 32 50 meters Only 16 emulators may have rear panel pullups connected A modification must be performed by your HP Customer Engineer Emulators using the CMB must use background emulation monitors At least 3 4 of the HP 64700 Series emulators connected to the CMB must be powered up before proper operation of the entire CMB configuration can be assured To connect to the rear panel BNC CAUTION The BNC line on the HP 64700 accepts input and output of TTL levels only TTL levels should not be less than 0 volts or greater than 5 volts Failure to observe these specifications may result in damage to the HP 64700 Card Cage 315 Making Coordinated Measurements To connect to the rear panel BNC 1 Connect one end of a 50 ohm coaxial cable with male BNC connectors to the HP 64700 BNC receptacle and the other end to the appropriate BNC receptacle on the other measuring instrument 02 r n ig ALIGN SLOTS ON SIDES OF PLUG WITH TABS ON SIDES OF JACK PUSH TOGETHER AND TURN UNTIL CONNECTORS LOCK 64700E15 The BNC connector is capable of driving TTL level signals into a 50 ohm load A positive rising edge is the trigger signa
95. 04fh to memlist The display memory modify memory and store memory commands 361 lt CLASS gt lt REGISTER gt Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands copy registers copy registers copy hm registers A To output of REGISTERS lt CLASS gt a on COPY diagram lt REGISTER gt This command copies the contents of the processor registers to a file or printer The copy register process does not occur in real time The emulation system must be configured for nonreal time operation to list the registers while the processor is running With no options specified the basic register class is copied This includes the local and global registers The parameters are as follows Specifies a particular class of the emulator registers copy registers global to printer copy registers to reglist The display registers and modify registers commands 362 from_line_number lt LINE gt thru_line_number Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands copy trace copy trace rom_line_number lt LINE gt I thru_line_number lt LINE gt a Nz To output of TRACE on COPY diagram This command copies the contents of the trace buffer to a file or to the printer Trace information is copied in the same
96. 1 2 5 7005 _aystemtot O00Rs 7200 mpr deta rd 4 033 oS 005 syatentotOQ000RH IHR mpr deta rd 4 32 Sf 007 ayatent ot00000C sEDSF mpr data rd 4 08 oS 068 myat eni ot00000E IAA spr deta rd 3 5 083 ayatent of 000010 126A spr data rd 4 06 u5 010 syatent ot 000012 JEF IF spr deta rd 4 2 65 t01 _ayetemtotO 00014 146707 mpr data rd 4 6 uS 012 _aystemtotO O00165 J00 mpr deta rd 4 2 Sh 013 syatent ot 00018 106E mpr data rd 46 3 014 9 _aystemtctOQ00IA 8 SF7FS mpr dete rd 4 2 S5 v 015 syatent ot0000 C FESS mpr deta rd 4 08 oS STATES HESIO2 Heneing ia meaitor Software break 0002c06Rs A eplay trace Cee oe ers ee re The default display mode settings cause source lines and symbols to appear in the trace list Captured states are numbered in the left hand column of the trace list Line 0 always contains the state that caused the analyzer to trigger Other columns contain address information data values opcode or status information and time count information 42 Getting Started Step 11 Patch assembly language code Step 11 Patch assembly language code The Patch action key lets you patch code in your program 1 With main still in the entry buffer click on the Run Xfer til action key 2 To display memory with assembly level instructions intermixed with the high level source lines click on the Disp Sre amp Asm action key Figure 11 Hewlett Packard Emulator Anatyzer hpleds
97. 2 m6830 File Display Mody Execution Ereakpoints Trace Settings Memory iip teremontc iftle usr hp64O00 dency debug eri hp TE main c adiraar labs data g2 extern void interrupt _ inl imt j gt strulate an interrupt 7 x 33 extern void do_sortlold_e datel char asctt_detell 8 imt size 4 naini 3 r naimn nain 4ES60000 LINK F6 000 ocen 208 HOWE L EH FA HOVE L a ooze 2470000075 MOVER L cazec 257c000075 MOVERA L intt_ayatent gt otez 14800001 HOVE B 01 AZ azs 4EB JSR init init _ayaten proc_spec_imitt gt meer 4EBSO0003A JSR Pp proc_spec_init a 33 109 wht le true STATES HESI2 Reneing is mooi ter Sofware break DOO2bcePsp onlo Ce ee ee e ea a E conor Te 3 Click on the address for main in the source display to enter the address into the entry buffer 4 Click on the Patch action key A window appears and the vi editor is started Notice that the address for main appears in the ORG statement 5 Add the line LINK A6 1234h 43 Getting Started Step 11 Patch assembly language code Figure 12 PCHS700 Assembly Patch File PCHOOO FCAh s Date Tue Jul 5 11 01 36 MDT 1994 Dir usr hp64000 demo debug_env hp64749 Owner markb INCLUDE PCHSINC s ORG OOOFCAh you may need to change this Link A6 12348 2 VPs BWW BoB zee se PCHOOOFCAh s 12 lines 236 characters 6 Exit out of the editor saving your changes The file y
98. 211 address range command range command 218 address range file format SPMT measurements 268 after trigger position specification 214 216 ambiguous address error message 118 analyzer 533 arming other HP 64700 analyzers 5 breaking emulator execution into the monitor 5 breaking execution of other HP 64700 Series emulators 5 definition 4 general description 4 occurrence count 219 state qualifiers 211 trace at EXECUTE 317 trigger condition 214 216 using the 198 analyzer probe assembling 297 connecting to the target system 299 analyzer status occurrence left information 204 sequence term information 204 app defaults directory HP 9000 computers 498 Sun SPARCsystem computers 498 application resource See X resource arm information 204 arm_trig2 in trace command 443 B background 533 emulation monitor 533 memory 533 tracing 123 background execution tracing 123 bases number 208 bbaunload command syntax 353 before trigger position specification 214 216 binary numbers 208 blocks emulation memory size of 110 BNC connector 5 310 trigger signal 312 break command 159 169 170 syntax 354 breakpoints 34 copying to a file 193 disabling execution breakpoints 166 displaying and seeing status 171 172 enabling 165 setting temporary breakpoints 168 breaks on write to ROM 122 Cc capture continuous stream of execution 225 228 cascade menu 65 cautions BNC accepts o
99. 379 software_breakpoints 380 status 365 symbols 144 trace 201 204 381 384 display mode 534 display software_breakpoints command 171 172 display trace 237 positioning 207 display trace absolute command 246 247 display trace absolute status binary command 246 247 display trace absolute status hex command 246 247 538 Index display trace absolute status mnemonic command 246 247 display trace command 240 259 display trace count absolute command 251 252 display trace count command 251 252 display trace count relative command 251 252 display trace depth command 254 display trace dequeue off command 244 245 display trace dequeue on command 244 245 display trace disassemble_from_line_number command 241 242 align_data_from_line option 244 245 options 243 display trace mnemonic command 241 242 display trace offset_by command 253 displays copying 357 don t care digits 209 downloading absolute files 5 141 dual port emulation memory 107 duration measurements SPMT 281 average time 286 confidence level 287 error tolerance 287 interpreting reports 286 290 maximum time 286 minimum time 286 number of intervals 286 recursion considerations 281 selecting 284 285 standard deviation 287 trace command setup 282 283 E editing command line entry area with pop up menu 79 command line entry area with pushbuttons 79 file 190 191 331 file at address 190 331 file at pro
100. 4 To display program memory associated with a trace list line 255 To open an edit window into the source file associated with a trace list line 255 14 Contents Saving and Restoring Trace Data and Specifications 256 To store a trace specification 256 To store trace data 257 To load a trace specification 258 To load trace data 259 Making Software Performance Measurements Making Software Performance Measurements 262 Activity Performance Measurements 263 To set up the trace command for activity measurements 266 To initialize activity performance measurements 267 To interpret activity measurement reports 271 Duration Performance Measurements 281 To set up the trace command for duration measurements 282 To initialize duration performance measurements 284 To interpret duration measurement reports 286 Running Measurements and Creating Reports 291 To run performance measurements 291 To end performance measurements 292 To create a performance measurement report 293 Using the External State Analyzer Using the External State Analyzer 296 Setting Up the External Analyzer 297 To connect the external analyzer probe to the target system 297 Configuring the External Analyzer 300 To control the external analyzer with the emulator analyzer interface 302 15 10 Contents To specify the threshold voltage 302 To specify the external analyzer mode 303 To specify the slave clock mode 304 To define labels for the e
101. 45 44 18 45 96 10 86 06 time p KKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKKKKK KkKKK KKK KKK kxk stat reents gt 1 percents gt 1 278 Ma set_outputs 28 97 RRR RR update_system 28 99 RRR RK read_conditions LL SDI Ss SRR strcpy8 12 39 eeK interrupt_sim 5 97 x write_hdwr 5 79 x proc_specific 3 70 combsort 1 90 Graph of Program Activity relative tim king Software Performance Measurements To interpret activity measurement reports set_outputs 29 28 RRR RRR RR update_system 29 29 KKK KK KK KK KKK KKK read_conditions LLL BAP EES strcpy8 11 83 x interrupt_sim 5 81 x write_hdwr 5 86 proc_specific BE Tog KE combsort 1 80 Summary Information for 20 traces Memory Activity State count Relative count 8455 Mean sample 30 20 Mean Standard Dv 75 44 95 Confidence 116 98 Time count Relative Tim Us 3500 Program Activity State count Relative count 8838 Mean sample 31 56 Mean Standard Dv 79 24 95 Confidence 117 55 Time count Relative Tim Us 3641 Absolute Totals Absolute count state Absolute count time percents gt Error tolerance 92 Error tolerance 08 10240 Us 4188 56 279 Making Software Performance M easurements To interpret activity measurement reports The measurements for each label are printed in descending order according to the amount of activity You can se
102. 613 Cause Status message 453 Error Messages Analyzer limitation all range resources in use Analyzer limitation all pattern resources in use Analyzer limitation all expression resources in use 10360 Cause Your trace specification would use more than the maximum number of resources available to the analyzer Action Simplify the trace specification Analyzer trace running 1304 Cause This error occurs when you attempt to change the external analyzer mode while a trace is in progress Action Halt the trace before changing the external analyzer mode BNC trigger break 616 Cause This status message will be displayed if you have configured the emulator to break on a BNC trigger signal and the BNC trigger line is activated during a program run The emulator is broken to the monitor Break caused by CMB not ready 611 Cause This status message is printed during coordinated measurements if the CMB READY line goes false The emulator breaks to the monitor When CMB READY is false it indicates that one or more of the instruments participating in the measurement is running in the monitor Action None information only Break condition configuration aborted 653 Cause Occurs when lt CTRL gt c is entered during the configuration of break conditions Break due to cause other than step 689 Cause An activity other than a step command caused the emulator to break This could include any of the break c
103. 8G84 14 aaa pgm word rd ds16 prog main G4416 159A pgm word rd ds16 Hhtttttttmain c line 103 HHHHHHHHHHHH HH prog maint 4 418 ADDQ L 11 E E E E E E ES sysstack 8007F90 va 2 21 data long wr ds16 sysstack 007F92 FEG data word wr ds16 HHHHHHHHHHUpdste_sys c line 1 thru 47 HRRRHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH Hinclude lt stdio h gt void update_system Tracing after the trigger state says states that occur after the trigger state should be saved in other words the trigger is positioned at the top of the trace Tracing before the trigger state says states that occur before the trigger state should be saved in other words the trigger is positioned at the bottom of the trace Tracing about the trigger state says states that occur before and after the trigger state should be saved in other words the trigger is positioned at the center of the trace 214 Using the Emulation Analyzer To specify a trigger and set the trigger position When the analyzer counts time or states the actual trigger position is within 1 state of the number specified When counts are turned OFF the actual trigger position is within 3 states of the number specified Usually when you enter a trace about command the trigger state Cine 0 is labeled about However if there are three or fewer states before the trigger the trigger state is labeled after Likewise if there are 3 or fewer states after the trigger the trigger stat
104. About this Manual We ve added this manual to the Agilent website in an effort to help you support your product This manual is the best copy we could find it may be incomplete or contain dated information If we find a more recent copy in the future we will add it to the Agilent website Support for Your Product Agilent no longer sells or supports this product Our service centers may be able to perform calibration if no repair parts are needed but no other support from Agilent is available You will find any other available product information on the Agilent Test amp Measurement website www tm agilent com HP References in this Manual This manual may contain references to HP or Hewlett Packard Please note that Hewlett Packard s former test and measurement semiconductor products and chemical analysis businesses are now part of Agilent Technologies We have made no changes to this manual copy In other documentation to reduce potential confusion the only change to product numbers and names has been in the company name prefix where a product number name was HP XXXX the current name number is now Agilent XXXX For example model number HP8648A is now model number Agilent 8648A User s Guide for the Graphical User Interface HP 64798 MC6830x Emulation Analysis Notice Hewlett Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and f
105. Depth Then click the OK or Apply pushbutton Or using the command line enter display trace depth lt DEPTH gt lt DEPTH gt is the number of states to be available in the trace list for displaying copying or storing to a file If you are using the emulation bus analyzer with deep memory the depth of the trace list buffer depends on whether or not you installed memory modules on the analyzer card and the capacity of the memory modules installed Refer to the Hewlett Packard Emulator Bus Analyzer with deep memory User s Guide for details If you are using the 1K analyzer the trace list buffer is 512 or 1024 states deep depending on whether or not you turn on the state time count See To count states or time in this chapter When you display the trace list the interface requests the number of states specified by the trace depth from the emulator If you want faster trace display you can decrease the trace depth To display more states you can increase the trace depth Notice that the trace depth setting only regulates the number of states sent from the emulation bus analyzer to the interface You still need to use the Pg Up and Pg Dn keys to page through the trace list 254 Examples Using the Emulation Analyzer To display program memory associated with a trace list line Set the depth of the trace memory to 256 states Choose Trace Display Options and in the dialog box enter 256 in the field besid
106. EXPR syntax diagram The function code used to define the address space being referenced See the syntax diagram for FCODE to see a list of the function codes available and for an explanation of those codes This specifies the address from which program execution is to begin This option resets the processor prior to running This represents the starting address of the program loaded into emulation or target memory The transfer address is defined in the linker map and is part of the symbol database associated with the absolute file Causes a software breakpoint to be set at the specified address before the program is run run run from 810H run from COLD_START run from transfer_address until 910H The step command 417 find_sequence QUALIFIER Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands SEQUENCING SEQUENCING From trace syntax diagram et ee QUALIFIER Fi Sa occurs OH lt n TIMES gt then restart ts QUALIFIER eo Lets you specify complex branching activity that must be satisfied to trigger the analyzer Sequencing provides you with parameters for the trace command that let you define branching conditions for the analyzer trigger You are limited to a total of seven sequence terms including the trigger if no windowing specification is given If windowing is selected you are limited to a total of four sequence terms The analyzer default is n
107. H countertt update_sy 848862 ADDQ L 1 D2 update_sy 000064 NOP The first column in the trace list contains the line number The trigger is always on line 0 The second column contains the address information associated with the trace states Addresses in this column may be locations of instruction opcodes on fetch cycles or they may be sources or destinations of operand cycles The third column shows mnemonic information about the emulation bus cycle The next column shows the count information time is counted by default Relative indicates that each count is relative to the previous state If your analyzer card contains external analysis for example HP 64703 the next column shows the data captured on the external trace signals You can use the lt NEXT gt and lt PREV gt keys to scroll through the trace list a page at a time The lt Up arrow gt and lt Down arrow gt keys will scroll through the trace list a line at a time You can also display the trace list centered around a specific line number for example display trace 100 Refer to the Modifying the Trace Display section for more information on the trace list display 202 Examples Using the Emulation Analyzer To display the trace status Note that when a trigger condition is found but not enough states are captured to fill trace memory the status line will show the trace is still running You can display all but the last captured state in thi
108. H IHP block ad GOAFFFH emul ran P 2 A FFH emul rom 3 COFFFFH emul ran 4 BOTFFFH emul ran 5 FFFFFFH targ ran her sddrossos guarded v STATUS N6SJOZ Runaing ia mesiter Seftmere break G007bcePsp Aiaplay configuration info memory nap Ses es oo Notice the entry labeled info Ranges with this label do not take up mapper resources they just show information about the processor s address space Another info entry will be listed if the internal RAM is enabled with the EMRAMBAR register 130 Configuring the Emulator To display information about the reset mode configuration To display information about the reset mode configuration e Choose Display Configuration Info Reset Mode Value from either the configuration interface the emulator analyzer interface pull down menu Or using the command line enter display configuration_info reset_mode Examples To display information about the reset mode configuration choose Display Configuration Info gt Reset Mode Value from either the configuration interface or the emulator analyzer interface pull down menu Hewlett Packard Emulator Analyzer hpisdzb m6830x File Display Modity Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings tite es k nuv_cheoks STATES 68302 Remning ia wentter Seftmere break O0027bcelap Command conve 131 Configuring the Emulator To display assembly language instructions for setting up the SIM To disp
109. HP64_Softkey HP64_Softkey tmp NOTE The HP64_Softkey application defaults file is re created each time Graphical User Interface software is installed or updated You can use the UNIX diff command to check for differences between the new HP64_Softkey application defaults file and the old application defaults file that is saved as usr hp64000 lib X11 HP64_schemes old HP64_Softkey Modify the temporary file Modify the resource that defines the behavior or appearance that you wish to change For example to change the number of lines in the main display area to 36 vi HP64_Softkey tmp Search for the string HP64_Softkey lines You should see lines similar to the following The lines and columns set the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the main display area in characters respectively Minimum values are 18 lines and 80 columns These minimums are silently enforced The application cannot be resized by using the window manager HP64_Softkey lines 24 HP64_Softkey columns 85 332 Setting X Resources To modify the Graphical User Interface resources Edit the line containing HP64_Softkey lines so that it is uncommented and is set to the new value The lines and columns set the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the main display area in characters respectively Minimum values are 18 lines and 80 columns These minimums are silently enforced Note The application cannot be resized by using the wind
110. Hanover Street Palo Alto CA 94304 U S A Rights for non DOD U S Government Departments and Agencies are as set forth in FAR 52 227 19 c 1 2 Printing History New editions are complete revisions of the manual The date on the title page changes only when a new edition is published A software code may be printed before the date this indicates the version level of the software product at the time the manual was issued Many product updates and fixes do not require manual changes and manual corrections may be done without accompanying product changes Therefore do not expect a one to one correspondence between product updates and manual revisions Edition 1 B3093 97000 July 1996 6830x Emulation and Analysis The HP 64798 6830x emulators replace the microprocessor in your embedded microprocessor system also called the target system so that you can control execution and view or modify processor and target system resources The emulator requires an emulation analyzer that captures 64 channels of emulation processor bus cycle information synchronously with the processor s clock signal The HP 64703 Emulation Bus Analyzer meets this requirement The HP 64703 Emulation Bus Analyzer also has an anexternal analyzer that captures up to 16 channels of data external to the emulator You can also use the HP 64704 or HP 64794 Emulation Bus Analyzer which has 80 channels however these analyzers do not have external analysis cha
111. J Clock Edge L Clock Edge K Clock Edge M Clock Edge External Label Definition Define Label Label Name Start Width Polarity Yes No i xbits a Pos gt Neg Yes No low_byte e Pos gt Neg Yes No hi_byte s Pos O Neg Yes No bith 1 Pos gt Neg Yes No Fbitl a Pos O Neg Yes No bit2 1 Pos O Neg Yes No bit3 1 Pos gt Neg Yes No bit w Pos O Neg If youre using the Softkey Interface from a terminal or terminal emulation window you don t get a dialog box from which to choose configuration sections however you have access to the same configuration options through a series of configuration questions To access the questions in the 301 _ Using the External State Analyzer To control the external analyzer with the emulator analyzer interface External Analyzer section answer yes to the Modify external analyzer configuration question This section describes how to e Specify whether the emulation emulator analyzer interface should control the external analyzer e Specify the threshold voltages for the external channels Select the external analyzer mode e Specify the slave clock mode when configured as an independent state analyzer e Define labels for the external analyzer channels To control the external analyzer with the emulator analyzer interface Choose yes or no for the Should emulation control the external bit
112. L allows you exit the SYMB definition and access softkeys that are not displayed when defining expressions You can press this key after you have defined an expression to view other available options 351 Commands Emulator analyzer Softkey Interface commands are summarized in the table below and described in the following pages IUNIX_COMMAND bbaunload break cd change directory cmb_execute lt command file gt copy configuration_info copy data copy display copy error_log copy event_log copy global_symbols copy help copy local_symbols_in copy memory copy pod_command copy registers copy software_breakpoints copy status copy trace cws change working symbol display configuration_info display data display error_log display event_log display global_symbols display local_symbols_in display memory display pod_command display registers display simulated_io display software_breakpoints display status display trace end forward help load lt absolute_file gt load configuration load emul_mem load fg_mon load trace load trace_spec load user_memory log_commands modify configuration modify keyboard_to_simio 1 This option is not available in real time mode 2 This is only available when simulated I O is defined 3 These commands are not displayed on softkeys 4 This option is not available in real time mode if addresses are in user memory modi
113. LAY diagram This command displays information written to the simulated I O display buffer After you have enabled polling for simulated I O during the emulation configuration process six simulated I O addresses can be defined You then define files used for standard input standard output and standard error For details about setting up simulated I O refer to the Simulated I O User s Guide Examples display simulated_io See Also The modify configuration and modify keyboard_to_simio commands 379 C display X software_breakpoints Ia EXPR offset_by Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display software_breakpoints display software_breakpoints lt RETURN gt on o Examples See Also offset _by J e DISPLAY diagram This command displays the currently defined software breakpoints and their status If the emulation session is continued from a previous session the listing will include any previously defined breakpoints The column marked status shows whether the breakpoint is pending inactivated or unknown A pending breakpoint causes the processor to enter the emulation monitor upon execution of that breakpoint Executed breakpoints are listed as inactivated Entries that show an inactive status can be reactivated by executing the modify software_breakpoints set command A label column also may be displayed for addresses that cor
114. LRESDIR HP64_schemes User defined scheme files located in directory HOME HP64_schemes note the dot in the directory name Custom Scheme Files You can modify scheme files by copying them to the directory for user defined schemes and changing the resource specifications in the file For example if you wish to modify the color scheme and your platform is HP UX you can copy the usr hp64000 lib X11 HP64_schemes HP UX Softkey Color file to HOME HP64_schemes HP UX Softkey Color and modify its resource specifications You can create custom scheme files by modifying the X resource for the particular scheme and by placing the custom scheme file in the directory for user defined schemes For example if the following resource specifications are made HP64_Softkey platformScheme HP UX HP64_Softkey colorScheme MyColor The custom scheme file would be SHOME HP64_schemes HP UX Softkey MyColor 501 Concepts of the EMSIM The 6830x rocessors contain a System Integration Block SIB which integrates various peripherals with the M68000 core How certain parts of the SIB are programmed affect operation of the emulator These emulator sensitive parts of the SIB are referred to as the processor s System Integration Module SIM The SIM contains the BAR and SCR registers along with the chip select port control and interrupt control registers plus any clock control registers if present For the 68302 emulator 64798C
115. Logical Processor Host Physical Mode Bits Size Type Name Type Name Device XON OFF NONE RTS 2 8 serial em6830x m68 30x myhost dev emcom23 OFF NONE RTS 2 8 521 Installation Step 2 Start the interface with the emul700 command Step 2 Start the interface with the emul700 command 1 Apply power to the emulator you wish to access after making sure the emulator is connected to the LAN or to your host system On the HP 64700 Series Emulator the power switch is located on the front panel near the bottom edge Push the switch in to turn power on to the emulator 2 Wait afew seconds to allow the emulator to complete its startup initialization 3 Choose a terminal window from which to start the Graphical User Interface 4 Start the Graphical User Interface by entering emul700 command and giving the logical name of the emulator as an argument to the command as in HP64000 bin emul700 lt logical_name gt amp or emul700 lt logical name gt amp if HP64000 bin is in your path If you are running the X server if the Graphical User Interface is installed and if your DISPLAY environment variable is set the emul700 command will start the Graphical User Interface Otherwise emul700 starts the conventional Softkey Interface You should include an ampersand amp with the command to start the Graphical User Interface as a background process Doing so frees the t
116. M choose the Modify Entry B GGH 16FFFH EMUL RAM item to modify the highlighted memory map entry STATUS Mapping emulation memory default unspecified blocks guarded Use the dialog box to modify the entry and click the Modify button to add the modified range to the memory map 116 Configuring the Emulator To delete memory map entries To delete memory map entries Choose Map Delete Entry from the pull down menu in the memory map window and select the entry number from the cascade menu Position the mouse pointer over the entry you wish to delete press and hold the select mouse button and choose Delete Entry from the pop up menu Or using the command line enter delete lt ENTRY gt Note that programs should be reloaded after deleting mapper terms The memory mapper may re assign blocks of emulation memory after the insertion or deletion of mapper terms To characterize unmapped ranges Choose Map Default Memory Type from the pull down menu in the memory map window and select the memory type from the cascade menu Or using the command line enter default lt memory_type gt Unmapped memory ranges are treated as target system RAM by default Unmapped memory ranges cannot be characterized as emulation memory 117 Configuring the Emulator To map memory ranges that use function codes To map memory ranges that use function codes Specify function codes with addres
117. Note that for displays that show memory contents the values will be updated when a command executes that changes memory contents such as modify memory load and so on 423 lt VALUE gt width source label mnemonic lt WIDTH gt Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands set Specifies the logical value to which a particular UNIX environment variable is to be set This allows you to specify the width Gn columns of the source lines in the memory mnemonic display To adjust the width of the source lines in the trace display increase the widths of the label and or mnemonic fields This lets you specify the address width Gin columns of the address field in the trace list or label symbols field in any of the other displays This lets you specify the width Gin columns of the mnemonic field in memory mnemonics trace list and register step mnemonics displays It also changes the width of the status field in the trace list This prompts you for the column width of the source label mnemonic or symbols field Note that lt CTRL gt f and lt CTRL gt g may be used to shift the display left or right to display information which is off the screen set source on inverse_video on tabs_are 2 set symbols on width label 30 mnemonic 20 set PRINTER Ip s set HP64KSYMBPATH filel procl file2 proc2 code_block_1i The display data display memory display software_br
118. Q Modify Register Modify SIM Registers gt Copy Processor SIM to Emulator SIM Modify SIM Registers gt Copy Emulator SIM to Processor SIM Modify SIM Registers gt Default Emulator SIM to Reset Values modify configuration modify memory modify memory EXPR modify register sync_sim_registers from_6830x_to_config sync_sim_registers to_6830x_from_config sync_sym_registers default_emsim 346 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands Pull down Command Line Execution Run gt from PC Execution gt Run from Q Execution Run from Transfer Address Execution gt Run gt from Reset Execution gt Run until Q Execution Step Source from PC Execution Step Source gt from Q Execution Step Source from Transfer Address Execution Step Instruction gt from PC Execution Step Instruction from Q Execution Step Instruction gt from Transfer Address run run from EXPR run from transfer_address run from reset run until EXPR step source step source from EXPR step source from transfer_address step step from EXPR step from transfer_address Execution Break break Execution gt Reset reset Breakpoints Display display software_breakpoints Breakpoints Enable modify software_breakpoints enable disable Breakpoints Permanent Q Breakpoints gt Temporary QO Breakpoints Set All Breakpoints Clear Breakpoints gt Clear All modify software_b
119. Retry the transfer Make sure you are using the correct command options for both the host and the HP 64700 The data communications parameters need to be set correctly for both devices Also if you are ina remote location from the host it is possible that line noise may cause the failure Run failed during CMB execute 694 Cause System failure or target condition Action Run performance verification Terminal Interface pv command and check target system Sample period out of bounds lt bounds gt 2022 Cause The external timing sample period must be between 10 ns and 50 ms in a 1 2 5 sequence Action Re enter the command with the sample period between the bounds shown Session aborted Cause This will only happen when running multiple emulation windows and a fatal system error occurs Action Find the window that caused the error and see the error message that it displayed All the additional windows will simply state session aborted Cycle power on the emulator and enter emul700 u lt logical name gt to make sure the emulator is unlocked Session cannot be continued ending released Cause The emulation session is ending automatically because it could not be continued from the previous session When the session has ended the emulator will be released meaning that others can access and use it Action When you restart the emulation session later the new session will use all default settings 480 Error Mes
120. SRU can use the C_IEEE 695 hierarchy to disambiguate symbols An alternate method for making the langinfo specification is to use the environment variable HP64SYM ORDER By making the following entry in your profile the langinfo setting will always be C for example HP64SYMORDER C I want to use the C disambiguating hierarchy export HP64SYMORDER let children processes know about it Sets update option for memory displays only When using multiple windows or terminals and specifying this option the display buffer in that window or terminal will not update when a new measurement completes Displays showing memory contents are not updated when a command executes that could have caused the values in memory to change modify memory load etc This allows you to specify the number of source lines displayed for the actual processor instructions with which they correlate Only source lines up to the previous actual source line will be displayed Using this option you can specify how many comment lines are displayed preceding the actual source line The default value is 5 422 lt NUMSRC gt source memory off on only symbols OER on high low all tabs_are lt TABS gt trace update Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands set This prompts you for the number of source lines to be displayed Values in the range 1 through 50 may be entered This displays source lines of memory This option prevents incl
121. The processor will be reset and then allowed to run 157 Examples Using the Emulator To run programs until an address To run programs until an address e When displaying memory in mnemonic format position the mouse pointer over the line that you want to run until then press and hold the select mouse button and choose Run Until from the pop up menu Position the mouse pointer in the entry buffer and enter the address you want to run from then choose Execution Run until Or using the command line enter run until lt address gt When you run until an address a software breakpoint is set at the address and the program is run from the current program counter When using the command line you can combine the various types of run commands for example you can run from the transfer address until another address To run from the transfer address until the address of the global symbol main run from transfer_address until main 158 Using the Emulator To stop break from user program execution To stop break from user program execution e Choose Execution Break Or using the command line enter break This command generates a break to the monitor Software breakpoints and the run until command allow you to stop execution at particular points in the user program C Examples To break emulator execution from the user program to the monitor break 159 Examples
122. _ambols Commend cursor m To display local symbols e When displaying symbols position the mouse pointer over a symbol on the symbol display screen and click the select mouse button e When displaying symbols position the mouse pointer over the symbol press and hold the select mouse button and choose Display Local Symbols from the pop up menu e Position the mouse cursor in the entry buffer and enter the module whose local symbols are to be displayed then choose Display Local Symbols Or using the command line enter display local_symbols_in lt module gt To display the address ranges associated with the high level program s source file line numbers you must display the local symbols in the file 146 Using the Emulator To display local symbols Examples To use the Symbols Display pop up menu Hewlett Packard Emutator Analyzer hptsdzb m8309 File Display Modity Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings Help E ME CE CE Break Step Asm A C Gl ya 4 ls in eos View the local symbols associated with the highlighted symbol by Segnent choosing this menu item ane prog sprintt libo strop prog atrrorp libo ali rdi write write hder Display Parent Symbols Statio symbols Sybo mane FE JER ENTRY STaTes Build seccesafel oc wernings were traced displey global_sapbols Command Conse 147 Using the Emulator To display
123. a signal is driven on the trig line This signal may be used to stop user program execution but the trigger signal may also be driven on the CMB and BNC connectors Also it s possible for signals to be driven and received on the CMB or BNC connectors So for example while the analyzer s trigger signal can be driven on the CMB and BNC connectors signals can also be received from the CMB and BNC connectors and used to stop user program execution In this case the emulator will break into the monitor on either the analyzer trigger or on the reception of a trigger signal from the CMB or BNC You can disable connections made by the internal trig and trig2 lines by choosing neither or no to the appropriate interactive measurement configuration options In order to modify the interactive measurement specification you must first start the configuration interface and access the Interactive 320 Making Coordinated Measurements To disable synchronous measurements Measurement Specification configuration section refer to the Using the Configuration Interface section in the Configuring the Emulator chapter Figure 30 Interactive Measurement Specification BNC on Trig Neither mz CMBT on Trig Neither F3 BNC on Trig2 Neither Fz CMBT on Trig2 Neither mz Emulator Break Receive Trig Yes gt No Analyzer on Trig2 Neither mz External Analyzer on Trig2 Neither mz If youre using the Softkey Interface from a t
124. absolute at_pc blocked bytes EXPR FCODE long Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display memory value which allows the information to be easily compared to the program listing When displaying memory mnemonic and stepping the next instruction that will step is highlighted The memory mnemonic display autopages to the new address if the next PC goes outside the currently displayed address range This feature works even if stepping is performed in a different emulation window than the one displaying memory mnemonic Pending software breakpoints are shown in the memory mnemonic display by an asterisk in the leftmost column of the assembly instruction or source line that has a pending breakpoint A label column symbols may be displayed for all memory displays except blocked mode Memory mnemonic may be displayed with source and assembly code intermixed or with source code only Symbols also can be displayed in the memory mnemonic string See the set command Initial values are the same as specified by the command display memory 0 blocked bytes offset_by 0 Defaults are values specified in a previous display memory command The symbols and source defaults are set source off symbols off The parameters are as follows Formats the memory listing in a single column Displays the memory at the address pointed to by the current program counter value Formats the memory listing in multiple columns Displays the
125. absolute or blocked memory listing as byte values An expression is a combination of numeric values symbols operators and parentheses specifying a memory address or memory offset value See the EXPR syntax diagram The function code used to define the address space being referenced See the syntax diagram for FCODE to see a list of the function codes available and for an explanation of those codes Displays memory in a 64 bit real number format or 32 bit long words when preceded by blocked or absolute 375 mnemonic offset_by previous display real repetitively short thru words Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display memory This causes the memory listing to be formatted in assembly language instruction mnemonics with associated operands When specifying mnemonic format you should include a starting address that corresponds to the first byte of an operand to ensure that the listed mnemonics are correct If set source only is on you will see only the high level language statements and corresponding line numbers This option lets you specify an offset that is subtracted from each of the absolute addresses before the addresses and corresponding memory contents are listed You might select the offset value so that each module appears to start at address 0000H The memory contents listing will then appear similar to the assembler or compiler listing This option is also useful for displaying symbols and source li
126. ackard Company certifies that this product met its published specifications at he time of shipment from the actory Hewlett Packard further certifies that its calibration measurements are raceable to the United States National Bureau of Standards o the extent allowed by the Bureau s calibration facility and to the calibration acilities of other International Standards Organization members Warranty This Hewlett Packard system product is warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 90 days from date of installation During the warranty period HP will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective Warranty service of this product will be performed at Buyer s facility at no charge within HP service travel areas Outside HP service travel areas warranty service will be performed at Buyer s facility only upon HP s prior agreement and Buyer shall pay HP s round trip travel expenses In all other cases products must be returned to a service facility designated by HP For products returned to HP or warranty service Buyer shall prepay shipping charges o HP and HP shall pay shipping charges to return he product to Buyer However Buyer shall pay all shipping charges duties and axes for products returned o HP from another country HP warrants that its software and firmware designated by HP for use with an instrument will execute its programming ins
127. add the following line to your profile setenv OPENWINHOME usr openwin After you have mapped your function keys you must start the X server and an X window manager Cif you are not currently running an X server 520 Verifying the Installation This section shows you how to e Determine the logical name of your emulator e Start the emulator analyzer interface for the first time e Exit the emulator analyzer interface Step 1 Determine the logical name of your emulator The logical name of an emulator is a label associated with a set of communications parameters in the HP64000 etc 64700tab net file The 64700tab net file is placed in the directory as part of the installation process Display the 64700tab net file by entering more usr hp64700 etc 64700tab net at the HP UX prompt Page through the file until you find the emulator you are going to use This step will require some matching of information to an emulator but it should not be difficult to determine which emulator you want to address Examples A typical entry for a 6830x emulator connected to the LAN would appear as follows Channel Logical Processor Remainder of Information for the Channel Type Name Type IP address for LAN connections lan em6830x m6830x 21 17 9 143 A typical entry for a 6830x emulator connected to an RS 422 port would appear as follows Xpar Parity Flow Stop Char Channel
128. address are specified the processor will start running your program at that address Otherwise the run will occur from the address currently stored in the processor s program counter Arun from reset command will reset the processor and then allow it to run It is equivalent to entering a reset command followed by arun command If the emulator is configured to participate in the READY signal on the CMB then this emulator will release the READY signal so that it will go TRUE if all other HP 64700 emulators participating on that signal are also ready See the cmb_execute command description Qualifying arun command with an until parameter causes a software breakpoint to be set before the program is run If you omit the address option EXPR the emulator begins program execution at the current address specified by the emulation processor program counter If an absolute file containing a transfer address has just been loaded execution starts at that address 416 address EXPR FCODE from reset transfer_address until Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands run The parameters are as follows Specifies an address for a temporary register breakpoint that will be programmed into one of the processor s two breakpoint registers Up to two addresses may be specified An expression is a combination of numeric values symbols operators and parentheses specifying a memory address See the
129. adv in the first column you may have to press lt PREV gt in order to see the states captured prior to the trigger These are the states associated with or captured for each sequence term Just as the trigger state is always stored in trace memory the states captured in the sequence are always stored if the trace buffer is deep enough 231 Examples Using the Emulation Analyzer To specify a global restart state To specify a global restart state Create your first specification form on the command line That will enter the proper format in the Trace Specification Selection dialog box Obtain the dialog box by choosing Trace Trace Spec You can click on your specification in the dialog box edit it if desired and click OK Or using the command line enter trace find_sequence lt bus_state gt occurs lt times gt then lt bus_state gt occurs lt times gt restart lt bus_state gt trigger lt bus_state gt lt bus_state gt represents a combination of address data and status expressions that must be matched to satisfy the trigger or sequence qualifier lt times gt is the number of times the selected bus state must occur to satisfy the qualifier The restart qualifier allows you to restart the trace sequence whenever a certain instruction or data access occurs For example you might have a complicated trace sequence that searches for an intermittent failure condition You could set the restart term to rest
130. akpoints Enable selection is a switch e Inside the breakpoints list display press and hold the select mouse button and then choose Enable Disable Software Breakpoints from the pop up menu Or using the command line enter modify software_breakpoints disable Sometimes you will want to temporarily disable the execution breakpoints feature without removing the existing breakpoints Use one of the above commands to do this When you disable breakpoints the emulator replaces the BKPT instructions at all breakpoint locations with the original instructions It marks the breakpoint table entries as inactive The processor won t break to monitor when the instructions at inactive locations are executed If you later enable breakpoints the ones in the table are still inactive To use them you must set them by choosing Breakpoints Set All or on the command line entering the modify software_breakpoints set command 166 Using the Emulator To seta permanent breakpoint To set a permanent breakpoint When displaying memory in mnemonic format position the mouse pointer over the program line where you wish to set the breakpoint and click the select mouse button Or press and hold the select mouse button and choose Set Clear Software Breakpoint from the pop up menu Place an absolute or symbolic address in the entry buffer then choose Breakpoints Permanent Or using the command line enter modify software_breakpoin
131. al Windows Emulator Analyzer Or using the command line enter emul700 lt emul_name gt You can open additional Graphical User Interface windows or terminal emulation windows containing the Softkey Interface When you open an additional window the status line will show that this session is joining a session already in progress and the event log is displayed You can enter commands in any window When you enter commands in different windows the command entered in the first window must complete before the command entered in the second window can start The status lines and the event log displays are updated in all windows 59 Starting and Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces To open the software performance analyzer SPA interface window To open the software performance analyzer SPA interface window Choose File gt Emul700 Graphic Windows Performance Analyzer Or using the command line enter emul700 u xperf lt emul_name gt For information on how to use the software performance analyzer refer to the Software Performance Analyzer User s Guide 60 Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces There are several options available when exiting the HP 64700 interfaces You can simply close one of the open interface windows or you can exit the debug session by closing all the open windows When exiting the debug session you can lock the emulator so that you can continue later or you can release the emulation system s
132. alifier lt times gt is the number of times that bus state must occur to satisfy the qualifier You can use the sequencing and windowing specifications together to make specification of complex qualifiers easier If you use the windowing specification the sequence specification is limited to four sequence terms Also note that when you use a windowing specification you cannot use a restart term with your sequence specification Use the analyzer sequencer to trace states occurring between the start of the example program and the call to the message interpreter then trigger after access to the variable that stores the value of current humidity but only if it is accessed after a specific series of events trace enable main disable proc_spec find_sequence update_sys get_targets then update_sys write_hdwr trigger after current_humid 236 Displaying the Trace List The trace list is your view of the analyzer s record of processor bus activity You can specify what is shown in the trace list to make it easier to find the information of interest For example you can display symbol information where available or source lines from the high level languages used to write the target system program You can also change column widths and set options for trace list disassembly Display control is available through the Trace Display Options dialog box the trace list pop up menu and the command line You can combine most options wit
133. all the software from the media 511 Step 2 Set the necessary environment variables 512 Step 3 Verify the software installation 514 Step 4 Start the X server and the Motif Window Manager mwm 515 Step 5 Start HP VUE 515 Installing Sun SPARCsystem Software 516 Step 1 Install the software from the media 516 Step 2 Start the X server and OpenWindows 517 Step 3 Set the necessary environment variables 517 Step 4 Verify the software installation 519 Step 5 Map your function keys 519 19 16 Contents Verifying the Installation 521 Step 1 Determine the logical name of your emulator 521 Step 2 Start the interface with the emul700 command 522 Step 3 Exit the Graphical User Interface 523 Installing Updating Emulator Firmware Installing Updating Emulator Firmware 526 To update emulator firmware with progflash 527 To display current firmware version information 530 If there is a power failure during a firmware update 531 20 Part 1 Quick Start Guide 21 Part1 A one glance overview of the product and a few task instructions to help you get comfortable 22 Getting Started 23 The Emulator Analyzer Interface At a Glance When an X Window System that supports OSF Motif interfaces is running on the host computer the emulator analyzer interface is the Graphical User Interface which provides pull down and pop up menus point and click setting of breakpoints cut and past
134. alue FFFFH Programming voltage control mask OH Rebooting HP64700 Checking Hardware id code Erasing Flash ROM Downloading ROM code usr hp64000 inst update 64798 X Code start 280000H should equal control ROM start Code size 2348CH must be less than control ROM size Finishing up Rebooting HP64700 Flash programming SUCCEEDED You could perform the same update as in the previous example with the following command progflash v em6830x 64798 lt RETURN gt 529 Installing Updating Emulator Firmware To display current firmware version information To display current firmware version information e Use the Terminal Interface ver command to view the version information for firmware currently in the HP 64700 When using the Graphical User Interface or Softkey Interface you can enter Terminal Interface commands with the pod_command command For example display pod_command lt RETURN gt pod_command ver lt RETURN gt Examples The Terminal Interface ver command displays information similar to Copyright c Hewlett Packard Co 1987 All Rights Reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under copyright laws HP64700B Series Emulation System Version B 01 00 20Dec93 Location Flash System RAM 1 Mbyte HP64798C Motorola 68302 Emulator Version A 03 00 Control HP 64748C Emulation
135. ame given in the HP 64700 emulator device table file usr hp64000 etc 64700tab net You can enter the LAN name address instead of the logical emulator name 32 Getting Started Step 2 Display the program in memory Step 2 Display the program in memory 1 If the symbol main is not already in the entry buffer move the mouse pointer to the entry buffer notice the flashing I beam cursor and type in main 2 Choose Display Memory Mnemonic Or using the command line enter display memory main mnemonic Figure 3 Hewlett Packard Emuletor Anatyzen hpleds2 mbi830x File Display Modity Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings Dip var Diop DREG Dap Sre Prev Entry buffer Memory immemontc file usr hpE4O00 deme debug _ern hp647S8 nain c a ackireen labo data 31 extern void update_ a yateni j update ayeten vertables A extern void interrupt_sinfint J2 simulate an interrupt 7 extern void do_sortlold_e dsta char ascti_detel 8 imt size t az J H B maint 37 intt_ayatemt gt 3 proc apec initi i 108 ahile true 101 102 update_ayaten 103 rem _checkatt 1H interrupt _ inl nun_checka 185 tf graph 106 graph_datal gt 107 proc_spectfict STATES cess main esr bpS4000 denei debeg_cov bp47S8 msin c fi apla Aror Pan NmeHONLO Ce Joes Ive Woes ee ee Ee Command coer Te The default display mode settings cause
136. an also use this method to reenable an existing breakpoint at that address If you choose Breakpoints Set All or use the modify software_breakpoints set command without an address parameter all existing breakpoints in the breakpoints table will be enabled The breakpoints feature must be enabled before individual breakpoints can be set When displaying memory in mnemonic format asterisks appear next to breakpoint addresses An asterisk shows the breakpoint is active Also if assembly level code is being displayed the disassembled instruction mnemonic at the breakpoint address will show the breakpoint instruction 168 Examples Using the Emulator To clear an execution breakpoint Set a new breakpoint at get_targets modify software_breakpoints set update_sys get_targets Reenable all existing breakpoints modify software_breakpoints set To clear an execution breakpoint Type in the name of the breakpoint you want to clear in the entry buffer Then choose Breakpoints Clear Choose Breakpoints Clear All to clear all existing breakpoints in the breakpoint table Inside the breakpoints list display press and hold the select mouse button and then choose Clear delete Breakpoint from the pop up menu to clear the selected breakpoint Or using the command line enter commands as follows e To remove an existing breakpoint at a location given by lt address gt enter modify software_breakpoints c
137. apping hardware and the bus analyzer hardware 502 Concepts must be re created from the chip select signals This address regeneration hardware in the emulator is programmed based on the EMSIM register set The emulator needs access to the full 24 bit address bus which is maintained internally in the processor If the address regeneration hardware is not properly programmed that is if the EMSIM register set is not kept correct the emulator may show analyzer trace information incorrectly and the emulator may not map emulation memory correctly EMSIM Utility Command Modify SIM Registers This capability lets the user compare and transfer register values between the SIM and EMSIM register sets Note even though the word sim is used in the command all operations also include the RAM and EMRAM register sets Modify SIM Registers Copy Emulator SIM to Processor SIM This transfers the current values of the EMSIM registers into the SIM registers This happens automatically each time a break to the monitor from emulation reset occurs This ensures that the processor is prepared to properly access memory when a program is downloaded to the emulator Modify SIM Registers Copy Processor SIM to Emulator SIM This transfers the current values of the SIM registers into the EMSIM registers This is useful if initialization code that configures the processor SIM exists but you don t know its values In this case you can use the de
138. ar clock is called a state When one of these states matches the trigger state you specify the analyzer stores states in trace memory When trace memory is filled the trace is said to be complete The default trigger state specification is any state so when you start a trace measurement after initializing the analyzer the analyzer will trigger on the first state it sees and store the following states in trace memory Once you start a trace measurement you can view the progress of the measurement by displaying the trace status In some situations for example when the trigger state is never found the trace measurement does not complete In these situations you can halt the trace measurement Once a trace is displayed you can use the cursor keys and other keys to position the trace list on the display To speed up the display of traces you can reduce the depth of the trace list Also when entering trace commands there is a special command that allows you to recall and modify the last trace command entered This section describes how to e Start a trace measurement e Display the trace list e Display the trace status e Change the trace depth Modify the last trace command entered 199 Example Using the Emulation Analyzer To start a trace measurement e Repeat the previous trace command e Position the trace display on the screen To start a trace measurement Choose Trace gt Everything
139. arameter HP 9000 to a command file you can use either HP 9000 or HP 9000 The special parameter amp ArG_lEfT gets set to all the remaining parameters specified when the command file was invoked This lets you use variable size parameter lists If no parameters are left amp ArG_lEfT gets set to NULL Consider the command file example named CMDFILE shown below PARMS amp ADDR amp VALUE1 modify a location or list of locations in memory and display the result modify memory amp ADDR words to amp VALUE1 amp ArG_lEfT 86 Entering Commands To access online help information display memory amp ADDR blocked words When you execute CMDFILE you will be prompted with Define command file parameter amp ADDR To pass the parameter enter the address of the first memory location to be modified You will then be prompted for amp VALUE1 If you enter for example 0 1 20 Offffh 4 5 4 the first parameter 0 1 20 is passed to amp VALUE 1 and the remaining parameters Offffh and 4 5 4 are passed to amp ArG_lEfT You can also pass the parameters when you invoke the command file for example CMDFILE 1000h 0 1 20 Offffh 4 5 4 Other Things to Know About Command Files You should know the following about using command files Command files may contain shell variables Only those shell variables beginning with followed by an identifier will be supported An identifier is a sequence of l
140. are entered in the Softkey Interface Additionally the graphical interface makes the softkey labels pushbuttons so commands may be entered using the mouse If you are using the Softkey Interface using the command line with the keyboard is the only way to enter commands This section describes how to e Turn the command line off on e Enter commands e Edit commands e Recall commands e Display the help window To turn the command line on or off To turn the command line on or off using the pull down menu choose Settings gt Command Line To turn the command line on or off using the status line pop up menu position the mouse pointer within the status line area press and hold the select mouse button and choose Command Line Off from the menu To turn the command line off using the command line entry area pop up menu position the mouse pointer within the entry area press and hold the select mouse button and choose Command Line Off from the menu 77 Entering Commands To enter a command Turns display of the command line area on or off On means that the command line is displayed and you can use the softkey label pushbuttons the command return and recall pushbuttons and the cursor pushbuttons for command line editing Off means the command line is not displayed and you use only the pull down menus and the action keys to control the interface The command line area begins just below the status line and
141. arget system memory locations mapped as ROM or guarded memory will result in a break to the monitor but are not inhibited that is the write still occurs 112 Configuring the Emulator To add memory map entries The first two methods of mapping memory ranges give you the following dialog box Figure 20 Subtract or add the address The starting address of onfiguration Memory Ma increment value The end the range to be added Add New Map Entry address is changed by the same amount thereby moving the The ending address of Start Address block of memory the range to be added 9 End Address Address Increment 100 hange only the end address Specifies the increment value thereby changing the size of the for the and buttons of the Memory Type Emul RAM block of memory start and end address fields Function Code Emul Attributes M ultiply or divide the increment value by 2 Adds the defined range to the memory map These buttons may be held down to repeat the action Closes the dialog box 113 Configuring the Emulator To add memory map entries Examples Consider the following section summary from the linker load map output listing SECTION SUMMARY SECTION ATTRIBUTE START END LENGTH ALIGN ABSOLUTE DATA 00000000 0000002F 00000030 0 BYTE 0 NORMAL 00000030 00000030 0000000
142. art the sequence whenever a bus cycle occurred that ensures that the code segment would perform correctly Thus the trace will be satisfied only when that restart term never occurs and the code segment fails In the demo program suppose you wish to trigger on the following sequence of events the save_points function the interrupt_sim function and the do_sort function However you only want to trigger when the interrupt_sim calls the do_sort function In other words if the proc_specific function is entered before the do_sort function is entered you know interrupt_sim did not call do_sort this time and the analyzer should start searching again from the beginning Again suppose you wish to store only opcode fetches of the assembly language LINK A6 0 instruction data values that equal 4E56H To set up this sequencing trace specification enter the following trace command 232 Using the Emulation Analyzer To specify a global restart state trace find_sequence save_points then interrupt_sim restart proc_specific trigger about do_sort only data 4e56h set source off Label Address Opcode or Status 007 up update_system AB Hakka 7 006 upda get_targets AB Hx 005 read_condi tions AG tee amp 004 upda set_outputs AB Hee amp 003 updat write_hdwr AG Heke sq adv upda save_points AB Hakka sq adv ma interrupt_sim AB Hx pro main do_sort AB Hee kk pro main stropyd AG Hkk pro main s
143. assembly language modules which may include symbols generated internally by a compiler 248 Using the Emulation Analyzer To display source lines in the trace list The Settings Source Symbol Modes Settings Display Modes or set symbols command remains in effect until you enter a new Settings Source Symbol Modes Settings Display Modes or set symbols command with different options Refer to Chapter 6 Using the Emulator for details of how to set up and use the Display Modes dialog box To display source lines in the trace list Choose Settings Source Symbol Modes Source Mixed or Settings Source Symbol Modes Source Only Choose Settings Display Modes and in the dialog box click on Source in Trace and select either Source Mixed or Source Only from the submenu Or using the command line enter commands as follows e To display mixed source and assembly language in the trace list enter set source on e To display only source language statements in the trace list enter set source only e To display only assembly language in the trace list enter set source off If you developed your target programs in a high level language such as C you can display the source code in the trace list with the corresponding assembly language statements Or you can choose to display only the source listing without the assembly language information The analyzer uses the line number information
144. asurement_complete copy trace to lt directory filename 1 gt Note that filename 1 in the above command suggests use of consecutive filenames to store your execution files such as FILENAME1 FILENAME2 etc Repeat steps 8 through 10 above until all program execution has been captured Your destination directory will have a set of files that taken together contain all of your program execution Note that if you did not prevent capture of foreground monitor cycles in step 3 above the last few trace lines in each file may contain monitor cycles 228 Using the Sequencer When you use the analyzer s sequencer you can specify traces that trigger on a series or sequence of states You can specify a state which when found causes the analyzer to restart the search for the sequence of states Also the analyzer s sequencer allows you to trace windows of code execution This section describes how to e Trigger after a sequence of states e Specify a global restart state e Trace windows of program execution e Specify both sequencing and windowing The sequencing and windowing capabilities from within the Softkey Interface are not as powerful or flexible as they are from within the Terminal Interface For example in the Terminal Interface you can specify different restart states for each sequence term and you can set up a windowing trace specification where the trigger does not have to be in the window If you do no
145. at e Place an absolute or symbolic address in the entry buffer then choose Display Memory Real and select the size from the cascade menu Or using the command line enter display memory lt address gt real lt size gt Displays memory as a list of real number values beginning at the address in the entry buffer Short means four byte real numbers and long means eight byte real numbers 180 Examples To display memory in 64 bit real number format display memory real long Memory 00 2DA 00 2E2 B0 2EA B07 2F2 G72FA 007302 00730A 007312 00731A 007322 00732A 887332 00733A 007342 00734A 007352 00735A _ascii_old_d sp long real update address label data ireal 6 41347881874187E 154 6 01347001874255E 154 6 01347001900370E 154 6 0134700 1882768E 154 6 6134788187422 1E 154 6 81347081874255E 154 6 8134700 1988484E 154 6 8134788188288 1E 154 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Using the Emulator To display memory at an address 0134700187422 1E 154 01347001874255E 154 4134788 1988438E 154 8134788 1882835E 154 8134788 187 4255E 154 4134788187422 1E 154 44788848826633E 154 4134788189 1755E 154 41394780 1874268E 154 To display memory at an address e Place an absolute or symbolic address in the entry buffer then choose DisplayMemory gt At This command displays memory in the same format as that of the last memory display command If no prev
146. at the previous trace command 207 To position the trace display on screen 207 Qualifying Trigger and Store Conditions 208 To specify a trigger and set the trigger position 214 To use address data and status values in trace expressions 217 To enter a range ina trace expression 218 To trigger on a number of occurrences of some state 219 13 Contents To break emulator execution on the analyzer trigger 220 To count states or time 220 To define a storage qualifier 222 To define a prestore qualifier 223 To trace activity leading up to a program halt 225 To capture a continuous stream of program execution no matter how large your program 225 Using the Sequencer 229 To trigger after a sequence of states 230 To specify a global restart state 232 To trace windows of program execution 234 To specify both sequencing and windowing 236 Displaying the Trace List 237 To display the trace about a line number 240 To move through the trace list 241 To disassemble the trace list 241 To specify trace disassembly options 243 To specify trace dequeueing options 244 To display the trace without disassembly 246 To display symbols in the trace list 248 To display source lines in the trace list 249 To change the column width 250 To select the type of count information in the trace list 251 To offset addresses in the trace list 253 To reset the trace display defaults 254 To change the number of states available for display 25
147. ater using the load trace_spec command Store a trace specification to a file store trace_spec tspec TS To store trace data Choose File Store Trace Data In the dialog box select an existing filename or specify a new filename to contain the present trace memory content then click OK Or using the command line enter store trace lt filename gt lt filename gt is any UNIX file name including paths The trace data file is a binary file The extension TR is automatically added to the file name A trace data file can be reloaded and displayed like other trace listings You can store the trace data resulting from a measurement This can be useful if you want to compare the results of later measurements with a reference result obtained in an earlier measurement Store a trace to a file store trace tracel TR 257 Example Using the Emulation Analyzer To load a trace specification To load a trace specification Choose File gt Load Trace Spec In the dialog box click on the name of the trace specification you want to load placing it in the Load Trace Specification box then click OK Or using the command line enter load trace_spec lt filename gt lt filename gt is any UNIX file name including paths The extension TS is assumed Once you save a trace specification in a file using the File gt Store Trace Spec or store trace_spec command you can load it using the appropriate c
148. ation processor To reset the emulation processor e Choose Execution Reset Or using the command line enter reset The reset command causes the processor to be held in a reset state until a break run or step command is entered A CMB execute signal will also cause the emulator to run if reset 162 Using Execution Breakpoints Breakpoints allow you to stop target program execution at a particular address and transfer control to the emulation monitor Suppose your system crashes when it executes in a certain area of your program You can set a breakpoint in your program at a location just before the crash occurs When the processor executes the breakpoint the emulator will force a break to the monitor You can display registers or memory to understand the state of the system before the crash occurs Then you can step through the program instructions and examine changes in the system registers that lead up to the system crash Software breakpoints are implemented in the 6830x emulator by replacing opcodes with TRAP instructions You can configure the emulator to use one of the 16 different TRAP instructions for software breakpoints The default emulator configuration specifies that the TRAP 0FH is used for software breakpoints In order to successfully set a software breakpoint the emulator must be able to write to the memory location specified Therefore software breakpoints cannot be set in target memory while the em
149. ative HHHHHHHHHHmain c line 239 thru 241 HRRHHHHHHHRHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH this comb gap top g A lt top itt BBEA MOVEA L 728 ns HHHHHHHHHHmain c line 22 thru 229 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH RHR Sw1tc 3 4 combsort 4498 MOVE L AS DA combsort 9A CMPI L taggeaeaae DA da main switches aaa data long ds16 switchest aaaa2 paga data word ds16 data main gap aaa data long ds16 main gap 4aaa2 G1B data word ds16 combsort 4 4a39C aaa pgm word ds16 Notice in the resulting trace you have to press the lt NEXT gt key that the enable and disable states have the sq adv string in the line number column This is because the windowing feature uses the analyzer s sequencer 235 Example Using the Emulation Analyzer To specify both sequencing and windowing To specify both sequencing and windowing Create your first specification form on the command line That will enter the proper format in the Trace Specification Selection dialog box Obtain that dialog box by choosing Trace Trace Spec You can click on your specification in the dialog box edit it if desired and click OK Or using the command line enter trace enable lt bus_state gt disable lt bus_state gt find_sequence lt bus_state gt then lt bus_state gt trigger lt bus_state gt lt bus_state gt represents a combination of address data and status expressions that must be matched to satisfy the trigger or sequence qu
150. ator fails 101 To store configuration changes to a file 102 To change the configuration directory context 103 To display the configuration context 103 Contents To access help topics 104 To access context sensitive f1 help 105 To exit the configuration interface 105 To load an existing configuration file 105 Modifying the General Items and Monitor Setup 106 When Restricting the Emulator to Real time Runs 107 Reconfiguring the Emulator Copy of the SIM Registers 108 To define values for the emulator copy of the SIM registers 109 Mapping Memory 110 To add memory map entries 112 To modify memory map entries 116 To delete memory map entries 117 To characterize unmapped ranges 117 To map memory ranges that use function codes 118 Modifying the Emulator Pod Settings 121 Setting the Debug Trace Options 122 To configure breaks on writes to ROM 122 To configure the trace mode 123 Setting Simulated I O 124 Verifying the Emulator Configuration 125 To display information about chip selects 125 To display information about bus interface ports 127 To display information about the memory map 129 To display information about the reset mode configuration 131 To display assembly language instructions for setting up the SIM 132 To check for configuration inconsistencies 133 10 Contents 6 Using the Emulator Using the Emulator 136 Using the EMSIM Registers 137 To view the SIM register differences 138 To synchr
151. atus message An emulation session which was ended earlier with the end command has been restarted The host system reported that the session was continued using settings from the previous session and that the continue file loaded properly Continuing previous session user interface defaulted Cause The previous emulation session was continued and the Softkey Interface was set to the default state Could not access emulation memory 161 Cause The cycle is hung or CLKO has been turned off or there is no clock processor Action Reset the processor 459 Error Messages Could not create lt CONFIGURATION BINARY FILENAME gt Cause The system could not create a binary emulation configuration file file EB Action Check the file EB write permission and verify that the specified directory exists and is writeable Could not create default configuration Cause The host system could not create a default configuration for the emulation session Action Check disk space under usr hp64000 and verify proper software installation Could not exec configuration process Cause The host system could not fork the configuration process or could not execute the configuration process Action Make sure that the host system is operating properly and that all Softkey Interface files were loaded properly during the installation process Try starting the emulation session again Could not load default configuration Cause
152. atus messages to be displayed during operation The lt emul_name gt option is the logical emulator name as specified in the usr hp64000 etc 64700tab net file The lt products gt option names the products whose firmware is to be updated If you enter the progflash command without options it becomes interactive If you don t include the lt emul_name gt option it displays the logical names in the usr hp64000 etc 64700tab net file and asks you to choose one If you don t include the lt products gt option it displays the products which have firmware update files on the system and asks you to choose one In the interactive mode only one product at a time can be updated You can abort the interactive progflash command by pressing lt CTRL gt c Progflash will print Flash programming SUCCEEDED and return 0 if it is successful otherwise it will print Flash programming FAILED and return a nonzero error You can verify the update by displaying the firmware version information 527 Installing Updating Emulator Firmware To update emulator firmw are with progflash Examples To install or update the HP 64798 emulator firmware progflash lt RETURN gt HPB1471 19309 A 05 00 03Jan94 64700 SERIES EMULATION COMMON FILES A Hewlett Packard Software Product Copyright Hewlett Packard Co 1988 All Rights Reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written Use
153. ave entered the performance_measurement_end command you can use the perf32 report generator to look at the data saved in the perf out file Note that the perf out file is a binary file Do not try to read it with the UNIX more or cat commands The perf32 report generator utility described in the following section must be used to read the contents of the perf out file 292 Examples m f lt file gt Making Software Performance M easurements To create a performance measurement report To cause the processed trace information to be dumped to the perf out file performance_measurement_end To create a performance measurement report Use the perf32 command at the UNIX prompt The perf32 report generator utility must be used to read the information in the perf out file and other files dumped by the SPMT in other words renamed perf out files The perf32 utility is run from the UNIX shell You can fork a shell while in the Softkey Interface and run perf32 or you can exit the Softkey Interface and run perf82 Options to perf32 A default report containing all performance measurement information is generated when the perf32 command is used without any options The options available with perf32 allow you to limit the information in the generated report These options are described below Produce outputs limited to histograms Produce a summary limited to the statistical data Produce a summary limited to
154. ay To specify a trace display depth of 512 display trace depth 512 To set up the trace command for duration measurements on the interrupt_sim function trace after interrupt_sim start or interrupt_sim end only interrupt_sim start or interrupt_sim end counting time The trace specification sets up the analyzer to capture only the states that contain the start address of the interrupt_sim function or the end address of the interrupt_sim function Since the trigger state is also stored the analyzer is set up to trigger on the entry or exit address of the interrupt_sim function With these states in memory the analyzer will derive two measurements time from start to end of interrupt_sim and time from end to start of interrupt_sim 283 Making Software Performance Measurements To initialize duration performance measurements To initialize duration performance measurements Use the performance_measurement_initialize command with the duration option After you set up the trace command you must tell the SPMT the time ranges to be used in the duration measurement This is done by initializing the performance measurement You can initialize the performance measurement in the following ways e Initialize with user defined files Restore a previous performance measurement if the emulation system has been exited and re entered Initialization with User Defined Ranges You can specifically give the SPMT time ranges to
155. ay be more convenient for you to view the trace data without instruction disassembly The Data Format Absolute selection in the Trace Display Options dialog box or the display trace absolute command allows you to do this Notice that once you enter this format selection subsequent trace lists will displayed in this format until you select the mnemonic format with the dialog box or display trace mnemonic command again You can select the display format for the status information when you choose Data Format Absolute in the dialog box or when you use the display trace absolute command The status information can be displayed in binary hex or as mnemonics that indicate the nature of the current bus cycle such as a read or write 246 Examples Using the Emulation Analyzer To display the trace without disassembly Display the trace list without instruction disassembly and with status information in binary format Choose Trace Display Options and in the dialog box select Data Format Absolute Select Status Format Binary Then click the OK or Apply pushbutton Or using the command line enter display trace absolute status binary Display the trace list without instruction disassembly and with status information in hexadecimal format make appropriate entries in the Trace Display Options dialog box or enter the following command display trace absolute status hex Display the trace list without instruction di
156. be the various display commands 365 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display configuration_info display configuration_info display configuration _inio diagnostics To lt RETURN gt on sim_chip selects lt MODIFY gt diagram emsim_chip_selects bus_interface_ports embus_interface_parts reset_mode init_source_code erorri 64749501 This command displays information about emulator configuration and processor SIM programming You can also display diagnostic information about inconsistencies found in the emulator configuration 366 diagnostics sim_chip_ selects emsim_chip _ selects bus _interface_ports embus_interface _ports memory_map reset_mode init_source_code Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display configuration_info The parameters are as follows Checks all parts of the emulator configuration and reports any inconsistencies It identifies errors that result from inconsistencies between related configuration values These errors should be resolved in order for the emulator to operate correctly This option primarily checks for inconsistencies between the mapper and the EMSIM registers but it also provides status messages about expectations and limitations of the emulator of which you should be aware These checks are primarily between the reset mode configuration value an
157. bled and the patch main menu appears Type a and press lt RETURN gt to apply the patch Notice in the emulator analyzer interface that the instruction at address main has been changed back to what it was originally When patching a single address make sure the new instruction takes up the same number of bytes as the old instruction otherwise you may inadvertently modify code that follows Type main 4 thru main 15 in the entry buffer By entering an address range in the entry buffer that is lt address gt thru lt address gt before clicking on the Patch action key you can modify a patch template file which allows you to insert as much or as little code as you wish If you make a mistake while editing the patch then save the changes when you enter the file again to fix the mistake a duplicate symbol error will appear on the INCLUDE PCHSINC s line when the patch is reassembled Although this message is displayed it will not affect the new patch assembly 45 Figure 14 Getting Started Step 11 Patch assembly language code 13 Click on the Patch action key again A window running the vi editor again appears Suppose you want to patch the demo program so that the proc_spec_initQ function is called before the init_systemQ function Suppose also that there is memory available at address 8800H Edit the patch template file as shown below PCHS700 Assem
158. bly Patch File PCHOOOFCAht 4 s Date Tue Jul 5 12 11 11 MDT 1994 Dir usr hp64000 demo debug_env hp64749 Owner markb INCLUDE PCHSINC s ORG OOOFCAht 4 you may need to change this BRA patch You may want to change this name ORG 8800h You MUST set this address patch NOP PHltertel you may need to modify labels and operands of the following code to match your assembler syntax Patching Range OOOFCAh 4 thru OOOFCAh 15 Insert new code here IIIIILI JSR _proc_spec_init JSR _init_system BRA OOOFCAh 16 You MUST set this address also Notice that symbols can be used in the patch file 14 Exit out of the editor saving your changes The file you just edited is assembled and the patch main menu appears 15 Type a and press lt RETURN gt to apply the patch You can step through the program to view execution of the patch 46 Getting Started Step 12 Exit the emulator analyzer interface Step 12 Exit the emulator analyzer interface e To exit the emulator analyzer interface and release the emulator choose File gt Exit Released Or using the command line enter end release_system 47 48 Part 2 User s Guide Part2 A complete set of task instructions and problem solving guidelines with a few basic concepts 50 Plugging into a Target System CAUTION Plugging the Emulator into a Target System For information about plugging the emulat
159. bout creating action keys To use dialog boxes Click on an item in the dialog box list to copy the item to the text entry area Edit the item in the text entry area if desired Click on the OK pushbutton to make the selection and close the dialog box click on the Apply pushbutton to make the selection and leave the dialog box open or click on the Cancel pushbutton to cancel the selection and close the dialog box The graphical interface uses a number of dialog boxes for selection and recall as described in the following Selects the working directory You can change to a previously accessed directory a predefined directory or specify a new directory From the working directory lets you select an existing file name or specify a new file name Lets you recall a previously used entry buffer text string a predefined entry buffer text string or a newly entered entry buffer string to the entry buffer text area Lets you recall a previously executed command a predefined command or a newly entered command to the command line The dialog boxes share some common properties e Most dialog boxes can be left on the screen between uses e Dialog boxes can be moved around the screen and do not have to be positioned over the graphical interface window e Ifyou iconify the interface window all dialog boxes are iconified along with the main window Except for the File Selection dialog box predefined entries for each dialog b
160. breakpoints only within memory ranges mapped to emulation or target RAM or ROM Breakpoint remove aborted 669 Cause Occurs when lt CTRL gt c is entered when clearing a software breakpoint Cannot create module file Cause Insufficient disk space for the module file Action Check disk space under usr hp64000 455 Error Messages Cannot default emulator already in use 10332 Cause You tried to start an emulator interface but your attempt failed because the emulator is already in use by someone else Action Current user must release the emulator Cannot initialize PC and SSP 154 Cause When the emultor breaks to the monitor from reset the emulator may try to initialize SSP as PC by reading memory reset vactor location 0 4 Ifa memory access fails then this message will occur Note that you may specify the initial value of SSP and PC through the configuration menu Action Initialize SSP and PC before running and or use the configuation menu to changed the method of setting up SSP and PC Cannot interpret emulator output 10350 Cause There may be characters dropped in the information returned from the emulator Action Ignore this message unless it becomes frequent If it becomes frequent you may have a fatal error call your HP 64700 representative Cannot lock emulator failure in obtaining the accessid Cannot lock emulator failure in lt ERRNO MSG gt Cannot modify program counter to an o
161. byte of data bus valid Using the Emulation Analyzer To position the trace display on screen Emulation Analyzer Trace Signals Analyzer Status Signal Signal Channel Bit Name Description 63 15 DATA_MSB 0 upper byte of data bus not valid 1 upper byte of data bus valid State Qualifiers Whenever a state can be specified in the trace command trigger state storage state prestore state etc you will see the following softkeys that allow you to qualify the state address The value following this softkey is searched for on the lines that monitor the emulation processor s address bus data The value following this softkey is searched for on the lines that monitor the emulation processor s data bus status The value following this softkey is searched for on the lines that monitor other emulation processor signals When a value is specified without one of these softkeys it is assumed to be an address value Predefined Values for Qualifiers When you specify status qualifiers for analyzer states by pressing the status softkey you will be given the following softkeys which are predefined values for the qualifiers 211 Using the Emulation Analyzer To position the trace display on screen Qualifier Status Values Description bgd OxxxxX XXXX XXXX XXXOY emulator in background berr 0xx01 XXXX XXXX XXXXY bus cycle bus error data OxxxxX XXXX XXXX X01
162. cannot be included in the command This option allows you to qualify the states that are stored as defined by QUALIFIER This option instructs the analyzer to save specific states that occur prior to states that are stored as specified with the only option This determines which of the traced states will be stored or prestored in the trace memory for display upon completion of the trace Events can be 443 repetitively SEQUENCING TRIGGER WINDOW Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands trace selectively saved by using trace only to enter the specific events to be saved When this is used only the indicated states are stored in the trace memory See the QUALIFIER syntax This initiates a new trace after the results of the previous trace are displayed The trace will continue until a stop_trace or a new trace command is issued When using this option you cannot use the on_halt option Allows you to specify up to seven sequence terms including the trigger The analyzer must find each of these terms in the given order before searching for the trigger You are limited to four sequence terms if windowing is enabled See the SEQUENCING syntax pages for more details This represents the event on the emulation bus to be used as the starting ending or centering event for the trace See the TRIGGER syntax diagram When using this option you cannot include the on_halt option Selectively enables and d
163. ce on command 249 set source only command 249 set symbols all command 248 set symbols high command 248 set symbols low command 248 set symbols off command 248 set symbols on command 248 set width label command 250 set width mnemonic command 250 set width source command 250 shell variables 87 sig INT 291 signals CMB 311 SIM registers 403 404 simulated I O 96 398 display command 379 displaying screen 194 196 keyboard input 195 size scheme 330 500 slave clocks 304 306 softkey driven help information 84 86 87 softkey pushbuttons 26 softkeys 82 software installation for HP 9000 511 installation for SPARCsystems 516 software breakpoints clearing all breakpoints 171 clearing 169 170 copy command 358 display command 380 software performance measurements 261 264 280 282 290 292 294 absolute information 271 activity measurements 263 adding traces 269 285 duration 281 542 Index end 405 ending 292 how they are made 262 initialize 406 407 initializing 267 270 284 285 initializing default 267 initializing duration measurements 284 285 initializing user defined ranges 267 284 initializing with global symbols 268 initializing with local symbols 269 memory activity 263 271 module duration 281 module usage 281 program activity 263 271 recursion 281 relative information 271 restoring the current measurement 269 285 run 408 running
164. cification isn t correct or because you have a target system problem At other times a valid trace may be capturing data slowly You can use the stop_trace command to prevent the analyzer from storing additional data You do not have to stop a trace in order to begin viewing a partial trace because the interface supports incremental trace uploading After the trigger condition occurs the interface begins uploading and displaying trace states as they are captured To display the trace list Choose Trace Display or Display Trace Or using the command line enter display trace You can display captured trace data with thedisplay trace command The available options to the display trace command are described in the Modifying the Trace Display section later in this chapter 201 Using the Emulation Analyzer To display the trace list Examples To display the trace display trace Of fset H More data off screen Label Address Opcode or Status w Source Lines time count update_syt 448 66 NOP 441 update_sy G68 CMP L 04 02 002 update_syt 4G6A BLT B p update_system 00a062 803 update_sy 8G6C NOP HHHHHHHHHHUpdate_sys c line 61 PHRRHHHHHHHHHRHHHHHHHHHHHHHRHHHHHHHHHH countertt update_syt 48862 ADDO L 1 02 update_sy 000064 NOP update_sy 000O66 NOP update_sy 000H68 CMP L D4 D2 update_sy 00OO6A BLT B p update_system 00062 update_syt 44G6C NOP HHHHHHHHHHUpdate_sys c line 61 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
165. command line text entry area Click selects first item in pop up menus Press and hold displays menus Displays pull down menus Actuates pushbuttons outside of the display area 27 Getting Started The following table shows the default keyboard bindings Keyboard Key Bindings Sun SPARCsystem Generic Key Name HP 9000 SunOS or Solaris menu select extend char extend char insert insert char insert char delete delete char delete char left arrow left arrow left arrow rightarrow right arrow right arrow up arrow up arrow up arrow down arrow down arrow down arrow escape escape escape TAB TAB TAB 28 Figure 2 Display area Status line Command line a ee Getting Started The Softkey Interface The emulator analyzer interface can also be the Softkey Interface which is provided for several types of terminals terminal emulators and bitmapped displays When using the Softkey Interface commands are entered from the keyboard
166. command or if no previous command has been executed displays memory as hexadecimal bytes beginning at address zero 176 Using the Emulator To display memory in mnemonic format To display memory in mnemonic format To display memory at a particular address place an absolute or symbolic address in the entry buffer then choose Display gt Memory Mnemonic or using the command line enter the display memory lt address gt mnemonic command To display memory at the current program counter address choose Display Memory Mnemonic at PC or using the command line enter the display memory mnemonic at_ pc command A highlighted bar shows the location of the current program counter address This allows you to view the program counter while stepping through user program execution E Whether source lines assembly language instructions or symbols are included in the display depends on the modes you choose with the Settings Source Symbols Modes or Settings Display Modes pull down menu items See the Changing the Interface Settings section If symbols are loaded into the interface the default is to display source only 177 Using the Emulator To return to the previous mnemonic display To return to the previous mnemonic display e Choose Display gt Memory Mnemonic Previous Or using the command line enter display memory mnemonic previous_display This command is useful for quickly returning to the previ
167. command into multiple commands so that the address ranges start and end in the same segment Read memory failed at lt PHYSICAL ADDRESS gt store aborted Cause While storing memory from the emulator to a file a read memory error occurred Action Use the display error_log command to view any errors You may need to modify the configuration and map memory before storing the file again Read PC failed during break 603 Cause System failure or target condition Action Try again Record checksum failure 400 Cause During a transfer operation the checksum specified in a file did not agree with that calculated by the HP 64700 Action Retry the transfer operation Ifthe failure is repeated make sure that both your host and the HP 64700 data communications parameters are configured correctly Records expected lt number gt records received lt number gt 401 Cause The HP 64700 received a different number of records than it expected to receive during a transfer operation Action Retry the transfer If the failure is repeated make sure that the data communications parameters are set correctly on the host and on the HP 64700 478 Error Messages Register access aborted 630 Cause Occurs when a lt CTRL gt c is entered during register display Register class cannot be modified lt register_class gt 637 Cause You tried to modify a register class instead of an individual register Action You can only mod
168. command paste mouse button to paste the text in the command line entry area at the current cursor position The entire contents of the entry buffer are pasted into the command line at the current cursor position Although a paste from the display area to the entry buffer affects all displayed entry buffers in all open windows a paste from the entry buffer to the command line only affects the command line of the window in which you are currently working See To copy and paste to the entry buffer for information about pasting information from the display into the entry buffer To use the action keys If the action key uses the contents of the entry buffer place the desired information in the entry buffer Position the mouse pointer over the action key and click the action key Action keys are user definable pushbuttons that perform interface or system functions Action keys can use information from the entry buffer this makes it possible to create action keys that are more general and flexible 72 Directory Selection File Selection Entry Buffer Recall Command Recall Entering Commands To use dialog boxes Several action keys are predefined when you first start the Graphical User Interface You can use the predefined action keys but you ll really appreciate action keys when you define and use your own Action keys are defined by setting an X resource Refer to the chapter Setting X Resources for more information a
169. commands copying to 193 registers to 193 trace listing to 192 file extensions EA configuration files 102 file formats address range for SPMT measurements 268 time range for SPMT measure 284 File Selection dialog box operation 73 74 firmware updates 5 firmware version 530 foreground 535 foreground operation tracing 123 formal parameters command files 86 forward command syntax 390 function codes mapping memory 118 120 memory mapping 118 need for separately linked modules 118 functions step over 178 G global restart qualifier 535 global symbols 33 209 372 copy command 357 display command 145 372 initializing the SPMT measurement with 268 to file 193 grabbers connecting to analyzer probe 298 guarded memory accesses 112 119 H halfbright 78 79 hand pointer 25 68 hardware HP 9000 memory needs 508 HP 9000 minimum performance 508 HP 9000 minimums overview 508 SPARCsystem memory needs 509 SPARCsystem min performance 509 SPARCsystem minimums overview 509 help command line 81 copy command 357 help index 76 on line 84 86 87 softkey driven information 84 86 87 help command 391 392 help index displaying 76 hexadecimal numbers 208 high level interface using pod commands within 225 228 HP 64700 Operating Environment minimum version 509 HP 9000 700 series Motif libraries 508 HP UX minimum version 508 installing software 511 minimum system requirements overvie
170. contents 173 To modify register contents 175 Displaying and Modifying Memory 176 To display memory 176 To display memory in mnemonic format 177 To return to the previous mnemonic display 178 To display memory in hexadecimal format 179 To display memory in real number format 180 To display memory at an address 181 To display memory repetitively 182 To modify memory 182 Displaying Data Values 183 To display data values 183 To clear the data values display and adda new item 184 To add items to the data values display 184 Changing the Interface Settings 185 To set the source symbol modes 185 To set the display modes 186 12 Contents Using System Commands 188 To set UNIX environment variables 188 To display the name of the emulation module 188 To display the event log 189 To display the error log 189 To edit files 190 To copy information to a file or printer 192 To open a terminal emulation window 193 Using Simulated I O 194 To display the simulated I O screen 194 To use simulated I O keyboard input 195 Using Basis Branch Analysis 196 To store BBA data toa file 196 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Using the Emulation Analyzer 198 The Basics of Starting Stopping and Displaying Traces 199 To start a trace measurement 200 To stop a trace measurement 201 To display the trace list 201 To display the trace status 203 To change the trace depth 205 To modify the last trace command entered 206 To repe
171. context sensitive help on an individual item To define values for the emulator copy of the SIM registers Click on the register field and enter the desired value Then apply the changes to the emulator Refer to the Using the EMSIM Registers section in the Using the Emulator chapter for information on how these registers are used Refer to the Concepts chapter for conceptual information about these registers 109 Mapping Memory Because the emulator can use target system memory or emulation memory or both it is necessary to map ranges of memory so that the emulator knows where to direct its accesses Up to 8 ranges of memory can be mapped and the resolution of mapped ranges is 256 bytes that is the memory ranges must begin on 256 byte boundaries and must be at least 256 bytes in length Emulation memory is made available to the mapper in 64 Kbyte blocks When you map an address range to emulation memory at least one block is assigned to the range When a block of emulation memory is assigned to a range it is no longer available even though part of the block may be unused Direct memory access DMA to emulation memory is not permitted You should map all memory ranges used by your programs before loading programs into memory In order to map memory you must first start the configuration interface and access the Memory Map configuration section refer to the previous Using the Configuration Interfac
172. continues to the bottom of the emulator analyzer window The status line is not part of the command line and continues to be displayed whether the command line is on or off Choosing certain pull down menu items while the command line is off causes the command line to be turned on That is because the menu item chosen requires some input at the command line that cannot be supplied another way To enter a command Build a command using the softkey label pushbuttons by successively positioning the mouse pointer on a pushbutton and clicking the pushbutton select mouse button until a complete command is formed Execute the completed command by clicking the Return pushbutton found near the bottom of the command line in the Command group Or Execute the completed command using the Command Line entry area pop up menu Position the mouse pointer in the command line entry area press and hold the select mouse button until the Command Line pop up menu appears then choose the Execute Command menu item You may need to combine pushbutton and keyboard entry to form a complete command A complete command is a string of softkey labels and text entered with the keyboard You know a command is complete when Return pushbutton is not halfbright The interface does not check or act on a command however until the command is executed In contrast commands resulting from pull down menu choices and action keys are supplied with the needed carria
173. ction does not affect the operation of analyzer cross triggering You can use the specify trace command to specify that an analyzer measurement begin upon reception of the CMB EXECUTE signal The trace measurement defined by the specify trace command will be started when the EXECUTE signal becomes active When the trace measurement begins you will see the message CMB execute emulation trace started When you enter a normal trace command trace at execute is disabled and the analyzer ignores the CMB EXECUTE signal 317 Examples Making Coordinated Measurements To start synchronous measurements To enable synchronous measurements specify run from le8h To trace when synchronous execution begins specify trace after address main To start synchronous measurements Enter the cmb_execute command The cmb_execute command will cause the EXECUTE line to be pulsed thereby initiating a synchronous measurement CMB interaction does not have to be enabled in order to use either of these commands When you enable CMB interaction you only specify how the emulator will react to the CMB EXECUTE signal All emulators whose CMB interaction is enabled will break into the monitor when any one of those emulators breaks into its monitor To disable synchronous measurements Enter the specify run disable command You can disable the emulator s interaction with the CMB by using the specify run disable command When in
174. culations because it improves the accuracy for small samples As the size of the sample increases the Student s T distribution approaches the normal distribution The following equation is used to calculate error tolerance error pct a x 100 Where Mean of the standard deviations Table entry in Student s T table for a given confidence level Number of traces in the measurement Mean of the means i e mean sample Consider the following activity measurement report generated with the commands shown display trace depth 512 trace counting time performance_measurement_initialize addr_ranges performance_measurement_run 20 performance_measurement_end perf32 more 273 Making Software Performance M easurements To interpret activity measurement reports Label set_outputs Address Range 1784H thru Memory Activity State Percent Rel 30 Mean 128 Tim Percent Rel 30 Program Activity State Percent Rel 28 Mean 128 Tim Percent Rel 29 update_system Address Range 159CH thru Memory Activity State Percent Rel 30 Mean 128 Tim Percent Rel 30 Program Activity State Percent Rel 28 Mean 128 Tim Percent Rel 29 read_conditions Address Range 16EEH thru Memory Activity State Percent Rel 12 Mean 51 Tim Percent Rel 12 Program Activity State Percent Rel 11 Mean 51 Tim Percent Rel 11
175. d hex byte format beginning at address zero Data Values Copies the contents of the defined data values last displayed An error occurs if you try to copy data values to a file if you have not yet displayed data values Configuration Info Copies the contents of the configuration information last displayed An error occurs if you try to copy configuration information to a file if you have not yet displayed any Trace The most recently captured trace is copied to the file The copied trace listing is formatted according to the current display mode You can set the display mode with the Settings Source Symbols Modes or Settings Display Modes pull down menu items See the Changing the Interface Settings section 192 Using the Emulator To open a terminal emulation window Registers Copies the current values of the BASIC register class to a file To copy the contents of the other register classes first display the registers in that class and then use the File gt Copy Display command Breakpoints Copies the breakpoints list If no breakpoints are present in the list only the enable disable status is copied Status Copies the emulator analyzer status display Global Symbols Copies the global symbols If symbols have not been loaded this menu item is grayed out and unresponsive Local Symbols Copies the local symbols from the symbol scope named by an enclosing symbol in the entry bu
176. d in the current trace You can enter a new unload depth specification after a trace is complete to increase the amount of trace memory that is unloaded if desired 205 Using the Emulation Analyzer To modify the last trace command entered To modify the last trace command entered Choose Trace Trace Spec and use the dialog box to select and edit a trace command Or using the command line enter trace modify command The Trace Specification Selection dialog box lets you recall edit and enter trace commands that have been executed during the emulation session or trace commands that have been predefined If you make an error in a trace command or want to change the measurement slightly it s often easier to recall the previous trace command and edit it than it is to enter a new trace command You can predefine trace specifications and set the maximum number of entries for the dialog box by setting X resources see the Setting X Resources chapter The trace modify_command command recalls the last trace command The advantage of this command over command recall is that you do not have to move forward and backward over other commands to find the last trace command also the last trace command is always available no matter how many commands have since been entered 206 Using the Emulation Analyzer To repeat the previous trace command To repeat the previous trace command Choose Trace Again To continual
177. d the EMSIM registers If no messages are returned no inconsistencies are found in the emulator configuration Display chip select information from the sim processor register set or the emsim emulator register set The resulting display shows How the chip select is assigned The base address The block size Other information from the option register Display bus interface information from the sim processor register set or the emsim emulator register set The resulting display shows the pin assignments for the available ports When in the memory map section of the emulator configuration the ranges of memory that have been mapped are displayed The memory map configuration information shows detailed information about the memory map and how actual mapper resources are allocated due to the current programming of the chip selects in the EMSIM register sets Displays information about the reset mode configuration value whether it is generated internally by the emulator or externally by the target system Displays the assembly language program that will initialize the processor as defined by the current EMSIM register contents 367 Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display configuration_info display configuration_info diagnostics display configuration_info memory_map The sync_sim_registers and modify configuration commands Also see the Verifying the Emulator Configuration secti
178. data 257 Trace Specification Selection dialog box 206 543 Index trigger position 214 216 TRIGGER in trace command 445 446 race again command 207 258 trom memory characterization 112 race command 200 442 444 TTL softkey for specifying threshold setting up for SPMT measurements 266 voltages 303 race counting anystate command 220 221 tutorials setting up 338 340 class name for applications 496 class name for widgets 496 command line options 499 commonly modified graphical interface resources 330 race counting command 220 221 race counting off command 220 221 251 252 race counting time command 220 221 race depth how to change 205 race disassembly specifying options 243 race display 237 depth SPMT measurements 266 positioning 207 source symbol modes 185 race expressions address values 217 data values 217 range 218 command files using in 85 status values 217 widget resource trace list disassembly 241 242 display specific line number 240 display source lines 249 move through 241 offset addresses 253 popup menu 239 race on_halt command 225 race only command 222 race options dialog box 238 race prestore anything command 223 224 race prestore command 223 224 race signals emulation analyzer 210 race_spec load command 394 store command 433 racing background operation 123 ram memory characterization 112 condition 214 216 position 214 216 posi
179. dd value 164 Cause The emulator will not allow you to modify the content of the program counter to an odd value Cannot modify stack pointer to an odd value 163 Cause The emulator will not allow you to modify the stack pointer to an odd value Cannot start Ending previous session try again Cause The host system could not start a new emulation session and is ending the previous session Action After the previous session has ended try starting a new emulation session If that fails try emul700 u lt logical name gt to unlock the emulator and cycle power if needed 456 Error Messages Cannot start Pod initialization failed Cause The host system could not start a new emulation session because it could not initialize the emulator Action Cycle power on the emulator verify that there are no red lights on the front of the emulator You may need to run the Terminal Interface pv command to verify that the emulator is functioning properly before starting a new session Cannot unlock emulator emulator in use by user lt USER NAME gt 10328 Cause The emulator is already in use by the named user Action Current user must release the emulator Cannot unlock emulator emulator not locked 10328 Cause You have issued a command to unlock an emulator that is not locked Action The emulator is available now You can start the interface Cannot unlock emulator lock file missing Cannot unlock emulator se
180. dded oprocessor system tion analy sis system ation bus ation bus analyzer emulation memory emulation memory map emulation monitor program emulation probe emulation processor Glossary A segment that contains data other than immediate data for an executable segment A data segment is identified by a specific type code in the descriptor of the segment When displaying memory this mode tells the emulator the size of the memory locations to display When modifying memory the display mode tells the emulator the size of the values to be written to memory The microprocessor system which the emulator plugs into A set of hardware and software capable of performing emulation functions on a target system that uses a particular microprocessor The emulation bus contains all of the signals on the pins of the emulation microprocessor The internal analyzer that captures emulator bus cycle information synchronously with the processor s clock signal This is memory space that resides in your emulator hardware The emulation memory map defines the addresses supported by memory hardware during emulation You set up this map during the emulation configuration process In it you assign hardware memory in your emulator and or in your target system to support ranges of addresses In this map you also define the behavior of the memory so that it will act as RAM hardware or ROM hardware to emulate the type o
181. ddress Action Specify a starting address that is less than or equal to the ending address 481 Error Messages Starting new session continue file loaded Cause This is a status message The emulator was started using a new emulation session and the continue file loaded properly Starting new session user interface defaulted Cause The emulator was started using a new emulation session and the user interface was set to default selections Action Call your HP Service Representative Status unknown run emul700 lt LOGICAL NAME gt Cause The host system cannot determine the status of the emulator Action To verify communication between the emulator and the host system and display the emulator status enter the emul700 l lt logical name gt command The emulator logical name is located in the usr hp64000 etc 64700tab net or 64700tab file Step count must be 1 through 999 Cause You tried to use a step count greater than 999 Action Use a step count less than 1000 Step display failed 688 Cause System failure or target condition Action Check memory mapping and configuration questions Stepping aborted number steps completed lt number gt 686 Cause This message is displayed if a break was received during a step command with a step count greater than zero The break could have been due to any of the break conditions or a lt CTRL gt c break The number of steps completed is displayed Stepp
182. dified but a new trace will not be started To start a trace with the newly loaded trace specification enter trace again or specify trace again not trace If you specify trace a new trace will begin with the default trace specification not the one you loaded Loads only those portions of the absolute file that reside in memory ranges mapped as target memory load sortl load configuration config3 The display trace command 394 lt FILE gt noappend off to Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands log_commands log_commands lt FILE gt off lt RETURN gt This command allows you to record commands that are executed during an emulation session Commands executed during an emulation session are stored in a file until this feature is turned off This is a handy method for creating command files To execute the saved commands after the file is closed type the filename on the command line The parameters are as follows This represents the file where you want to store commands that are executed during an emulation session If the named file is an existing file this option causes the new commands to overwrite any information present in the file If this option is not specified new commands are appended to the existing contents of the file This option turns off the capability to log commands This allows you to specify a file for the log
183. ds Pull down Command Line Display Configuration Info Display Configuration Info Diagnostics Display Configuration Info gt Chip Selects SIM Display Configuration Info Chip Selects Emulator SIM Display Configuration Info Bus Interface Ports SIM Display Configuration Info Bus Interface Ports Emulator SIM Display Configuration Info gt Memory Map Display Configuration Info gt Reset Mode Value Display Configuration Info lInitialization Source Code Display SIM Register Differences Display Trace Display Registers Display Breakpoints Display Status Display Simulated IO Display Global Symbols Display Local Symbols Q Display Pod Commands Display Error Log Display Event Log display configuration_info display configuration_info diagnostics display configuration_info sim_chip_selects display configuration_info emsim_chip_selects display configuration_info bus_interface_ports display configuration_info embus_interface_ports display configuration_info memory_map display configuration_info reset_mode display configuration_info init_source_code sync_sim_registers difference display trace display registers display software_breakpoints display status display simulated_io display global_symbols display local_symbols_in SYMB display pod_command display error_log display event_log Modify Emulator Config Modify Memory Modify Memory at
184. ds set set lt ENV_VAR gt lt VALUE gt default source on Rasy off C_IEE695 inverse_video tabs_are D en number_of _source_lines J lt NUMSRC gt i on T ff ie update t obei J awot g jaena d lt WIDTH gt s Le DH ewIDTH gt source lt WIDTH gt y 64782504 To lt RETURN gt on DISPLAY diagram 420 default lt ENV_VAR gt inverse video off Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands set Controls the display format for the data memory register software breakpoint and trace displays With the set command you can adjust the display format results for various measurements making them easier to read and interpret Formatting of source lines symbol display selection and width and update after measurement can be defined to your needs The display command uses the set command specifications to format measurement results for the display window Another option to the set command lt ENV_VAR gt lt VALUE allows you to set and export system variables to the UNIX environment The default display format parameters are the same as those set by the commands set update set source off symbols off You can return the display format to this state by entering set default
185. e gt Context gt Symbols symSelect textColumns symSelect listVisibleItemCount symSelectSub entries Trace gt Trace Spec modtrace textColumns modtrace list VisibleItemCount modtraceSub entries Entry Buffer Q recall textColumns recall listVisibleltemCount recallSub entries Command Line command recallCmd textColumns recall recallCmd listVisibleItemCount recallCmdSub entries Command Line pod simio recallKbd textColumns recall recallkbd_listVisibleltemCount recallKbdSub entries The default number of text columns in the pop up is 50 The default number of visible lines in the pop up is 12 The entries resource is defined as a list of strings see the following example Up to 40 unique values are saved in each of the recall buffers as specified by the resource settings XcRecall maxDepth 40 and XcRecall onlyUnique True 337 Setting X Resources To setup demos or tutorials Examples To set the initial values for the directory selection dialog box when the Graphical User Interface is used with 6830x emulators modify the m6830x dirSelectSub entries resource m6830x dirSelectSub entries HOME Mea users projectl users project2 6830x Refer to the previous To modify the Graphical User Interface resources section for more detailed information on modifying resources To set up demos or tutorials You can add d
186. e online help customizable action keys and pop up recall buffers etc The Graphical User Interface Figure 1 Hewlett Packard Enutator Analyzer hpisdzb m6830x OO Rt ee Menu bar File Display Modity Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings Actionkeys Action keys Memory imeemonto ifile naintnodule mein Entry buffer ae j Upelste aetan v otd interrot stat tne airulste an p Entry buffer recall old do_sortiold_el cali char sso button Display area Scroll bar thils Crrus 181 182 updste_systeml gt 163 ram check s 164 Lnterrupt_sinliinum_ checks Status line 165 LE Lgnaph 105 graph_datal gt 167 proo_specl fiol i Command line a STATUS N6SIOZ Runaiag ia meaiter Command line entry area Softkey pushbuttons Command buttons Cursor buttons for command line area control 24 Getting Started Menu Bar Provides pull down menus from which you select commands When menu items are not applicable they appear half bright and do not respond to mouse clicks Action Keys User defined pushbuttons You can label these pushbuttons and define the action to be performed Entry Buffer Wherever you see in a pull down menu the contents of the entry buffer are used in that command You can type values into the entry buffer or you can cut and paste values into the entry buffer from the display area or from the command line entry area You can also s
187. e section When you select the Memory Map configuration option the following window appears 110 Figure 19 Configuring the Emulator To define values for the emulator copy of the SIM registers File Map Settings Wasik bytes Function code attribute H 1FFFFH EMUL RAM STATUS Napping emulation memory default unspecified blocks guarded This section shows you how to e Add memory map entries e Modify memory map entries e Delete memory map entries Characterize unmapped ranges e Map memory ranges that use function codes 111 Configuring the Emulator To add memory map entries To add memory map entries Choose Map Add New Entry from the pull down menu in the memory map window Press and hold the select mouse button and choose Add New Entry from the pop up menu Using the command line Settings gt Command Line enter the address range memory type and possibly a blk1 b1k8 attribute for emulation memory ranges You can characterize memory ranges as emulation RAM emulation ROM target system RAM target system ROM or as guarded memory Guarded memory accesses will cause emulator execution to break into the monitor program Writes to locations characterized as ROM will cause emulator execution to break into the monitor program if the Break processor on write to ROM trace debug configuration option is enabled Writes to emulation ROM will be inhibited Writes by user code to t
188. e Emulation Analyzer To capture a continuous stream of program execution no matter how large your program Note that trng addr lt addr gt lt addr gt means define an address range for the analyzer tsto r means store all trace activity except activity occurring in the defined address range 4 Start the analyzer trace with the Trace Again command 5 Start your program running using Execution Run from from Transfer Address or from Reset as appropriate The Trace Again or trace again command starts the analyzer trace with the most recent trace specifications including the pod_command specifications you entered The trace command cannot be used by itself because it defaults the be e trig1 trng addr and tsto r specifications returning them to their default values before the trace begins You can see the progress of your trace with the command Display Status A line in the Trace Status listing will show how many states have been captured 6 The notation trigl break usually followed by Emulation trace complete will appear on the status line If trig break remains on the status line without Emulation trace complete manually stop the trace with the command Trace Stop You must wait for the notation trig1 break and or Emulation trace complete to appear on the status line this ensures the trace memory is filled during the trace except for the unfilled space you specified in step 2 above
189. e Unload Depth Then click the OK or Apply pushbutton Set the depth of the trace to 1024 states display trace depth 1024 To display program memory associated with a trace list line Using the mouse place the cursor on the line in the trace list where you want to see the associated content of program memory Then press the select mouse button and click on Display Memory At in the trace list pop up menu You will see a display of memory at the location of the program that emitted the selected trace list line This is the same as placing the program address of the selected trace list line in the entry buffer and choosing Display Memory AtC in the pull down menus To open an edit window into the source file associated with a trace list line Using the mouse place the cursor on the line in the trace list whose source file you wish to edit Then press the select mouse button and click on Edit Source in the trace list pop up menu A new window will open It will show the source file that emitted the line you selected in the trace list An edit session will be in progress on the source file in the new window When you complete the desired edit save the file and close the window 255 Saving and Restoring Trace Data and Specifications The emulator analyzer can save trace data and trace specifications in a file for later use This can help you record measurement results to use for comparison with other tests and to au
190. e char gt lt Clear line gt lt CTRL gt u Entering Commands To recall commands To recall commands Press lt CTRL gt r or lt CTRL gt b The most recent 20 commands you enter are stored in a buffer and may be recalled by pressing lt CTRL gt r Pressing lt CTRL gt b cycles forward through the recall buffer For example to recall and execute the command prior to the last command lt CTRL gt r lt CTRL gt r To edit commands Use the following keys Move the cursor single spaces to the left or right Move the cursor to the next or previous word on the command line Enters the insert editing mode and allows characters or command options to be inserted at the cursor location Deletes the character to the left of the cursor Deletes the character to the right of the cursor Deletes the characters from the cursor to the end of the line Erases the command line 83 Examples Entering Commands To access online help information To access online help information Use the help or commands To access the command line s online help information type either help or on the command line You will notice a new set of softkeys By pressing one of these softkeys and lt RETURN3 gt you can display information on that topic To display information on the system commands help system_commands Or system_commands The help information is scrolled on to the screen If there is more than a scree
191. e display pod_command Refer to the 6830x Installation Service Terminal Interface User s Guide for information on using the Terminal Interface to control the emulator 409 keyboard lt POD_CM D gt suspend Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands pod_command The parameters are as follows Enters an interactive mode where you can simply type Terminal Interface commands unquoted on the command line Use display pod_command to see the results returned from the emulator Prompts you for a Terminal Interface command as a quoted string Enter the command in quotes and press lt RETURN gt This command is displayed once you have entered keyboard mode Select it to stop interactive access to the Terminal Interface and return to the Graphical User Interface or Softkey Interface This example shows a simple interactive session with the Terminal Interface display pod_command pod_command keyboard cf tsq ECG Click suspend to return to the Graphical User Interface or Softkey Interface The display pod_command command Also see the 6830x Installation Service Terminal Interface User s Guide and the Terminal Interface online help information 410 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands QUALIFIER QUALIFIER From TRACE RANGE oe output of QUALIFIER agra STATE on TRACE diagram or The QUALIFIER parameter is used with trac
192. e is added to the data values display and its value is displayed as a 32 bit integer 38 Getting Started Step 8 Display registers Step 8 Display registers You can display the contents of the processor registers e Choose Display Registers BASIC Or using the command line enter display registers Figure 8 Hewlett Packard Emulator Analyzer hpleds2 m6830x File Display Modify Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings Help Aetion Ney Dap ORES F nmn checka Recall Registera a Next PC GOS250G p FC Bee8s250 STATUS 2700 lt gt gt LSP 000000 SSP 0oaFes 00 07 0000000 cocoocooo coococHEC GOORETEE O000o0oO co0ooo0o cooooooo 00000000 AO A 7 0000S 4OC FFFFFFFF 00000759A 000075SC2 O00O7CAC O00oF5SSA BORDCFS4 GonerrSs G 4 STATES HESIW2 Stegpiag complete displays registers BASIC Cee ee Ive Jeers ae ee Ee Command corer Tre 39 Getting Started Step 9 Step assembly level instructions Step 9 Step assembly level instructions You can step through the program one instruction at a time e To step one instruction from the current program counter click on the Step Asm action key Or using the command line enter step Figure 9 Hewlett Packard Emulator Anatyzer hpleds2 m6830 File Display Modity Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings Action keys Dap ont F nun checks Recall Regi atera J a Next PC 00327300P e PC 88003290 STATUS 2700 lt a
193. e is labeled before The state you define after trace after trace about or trace before is the state that will trigger the analyzer and cause states to be stored 215 Using the Emulation Analyzer To specify a trigger and set the trigger position Examples Suppose you want to look at the execution of the demo program after the call of the update_system function main c line 102 occurs To trigger on this address enter trace after address main main c line 102 set source on inverse_video on symbols on display trace In the preceding trace list line 0 labeled after shows the beginning of the program loop 216 Example Using the Emulation Analyzer To use address data and status values in trace expressions To use address data and status values in trace expressions Enter the value s desired in the entry buffer such as address 1000h Then Choose Trace After Trace Before or Trace About as desired Or using the command line enter commands as follows e To specify an address expression enter lt expression gt or address lt expression gt e To specify a data expression enter data lt expression gt e To specify a status expression enter status lt expression gt Many trace commands require that you enter address data and status expressions to specify the bus state You can combine multiple expressions on the same command line to build a complete bu
194. e only trace prestore and TRIGGER to specify states captured during the trace measurement You may specify a range of states RANGE or specific states STATE to be captured You can continue to or states until the analyzer resources are depleted You can use only one RANGE statement in the entire trace command You can include don t care numbers These contain an x preceded and or followed by a number Some examples include 1fxxh 17x7o and 011xxx10b Don t care numbers may be entered in binary octal or hexadecimal base The default is to qualify on all states The parameters are as follows or This option allows you to specify multiple states STATE to be captured during a trace measurement See the STATE syntax diagram RANGE This allows you to specify a range of states to be captured during a trace measurement See the RANGE syntax diagram STATE This represents a unique state that can be a combination of address data status and executed address values See the STATE syntax diagram 411 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands QUALIFIER Examples trace only address mod_name read_input trace only address range mod_name read_input thru output trace only address range mod_name clear thru read_input See Also The trace command 412 address data EXPR lt external_label gt not Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands RANGE RANGE From RANGE on QUALIFIER
195. e that the set_outputs function has the most activity Also you can see that no activity is recorded for several of the functions The histogram portion of the report compares the activity in the functions that account for at least 1 of the activity for all labels defined in the measurement 280 Duration Performance Measurements Duration measurements provide a best case worst case characterization of code execution time These measurements record execution times that fall within a set of specified time ranges The analyzer trace command is set up to store only the entry and exit states of the module to be measured for example a C function or Pascal procedure The SPMT provides two types of duration measurements module duration and module usage Module duration measurements record how much time it takes to execute a particular code segment for example a function in the source file Module usage shows how much of the execution time is spent outside of the module from exit to entry This measurement gives an indication of how often the module is being used When using the SPMT to perform duration measurements there should be only two addresses stored in the trace memory the entry address and the exit address Recursion can place several entry addresses before the first exit address and or several exit addresses before the first entry address Duration measurements are made between the last entry address in a series of en
196. e the tape s write protect screw points to SAFE 511 R Installation Step 2 Set the necessary environment variables Put the product media into the tape drive that will be the source device for the update process Confirm that the tape drive BUSY and PROTECT lights are on Ifthe PROTECT light is not on remove the tape and confirm the position of the write protect screw If the BUSY light is not on check that the tape is installed correctly in the drive and that the drive is operating correctly When the BUSY light goes off and stays off start the update program by entering etc update at the HP UX prompt When the HP UX update utility main screen appears confirm that the source and destination devices are correct for your system Refer to the information on updating HP UX in your HP UX documentation if you need to modify these values Select Load Everything from Source Media when your source and destination directories are correct To begin the update press the softkey lt Select Item gt At the next menu press the softkey lt Select Item gt again Answer the last prompt with y It takes about 20 minutes to read the tape When the installation is complete read tmp update log to see the results of the update Step 2 Set the necessary environment variables The DISPLAY environment variable must be set before the Graphical User Interface will start Also you should modify the PATH environment variable
197. e user program e Stop break from user program execution Step through user programs e Reset the emulation processor 155 Examples Using the Emulator To run programs from the current PC To run programs from the current PC Choose Execution Run from PC Or using the command line enter run When the emulator is executing the user program the message Running user program is displayed on the status line To run programs from an address Position the mouse pointer in the entry buffer and enter the address you want to run from then choose Execution Run gt from Or using the command line enter run from lt address gt To run from address 920H run from 920h 156 Using the Emulator To run programs from the transfer address To run programs from the transfer address Choose Execution Run from Transfer Address Or using the command line enter run from transfer_address Most software development tools allow you to specify a starting or entry address for program execution That address is included with the absolute file s symbolic information and is known by the interface as the transfer address To run programs from reset Choose Execution Run from Reset Or using the command line enter run from reset The run from reset command specifies a run from target system reset It is equivalent to entering areset command followed by arun command
198. eakpoints and display trace commands 424 disable Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands specify specify run lt RETURN gt disable gt from FCODE transfer_address until 1 EXPR FCODE U NJ TRAE This command prepares a command for execution and is used with the cmb_execute command When you precede arun or trace command with specify the system does not execute your command immediately Instead it waits until until an EXECUTE signal is received from the Coordinated Measurement Bus or until you enter acmb_execute command If the processor is reset and no address is specified acmb_execute command will run the processor from the reset condition Note that the run specification is active until you enter specify run disable The trace specification is active until you enter another trace command without the specify prefix The emulator will run from the current program counter address if no address is specified in the command The parameters are as follows This option turns off the specify condition of the run process 425 from EXPR FCODE transfer address run TRACE until Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands specify This is used with the specify run from command An expression is a combination of numeric values symbols operators and parentheses specifying a m
199. ecimal number that begins with an A B C D E or F with a zero 208 Using the Emulation Analyzer To position the trace display on screen Don t care digits may be included in binary octal or hexadecimal numbers and they are represented by the letters X or x A zero must precede any numerical value that begins with an X Symbols A symbol database is built when the absolute file is loaded into the emulator Both global and local symbols can be used when entering expressions Global symbols are entered as they appear in the global symbols display When specifying a local symbol you must include the name of the module anly c as shown below anly c cmp_function Operators Analysis specification expressions may contain operators All operations are carried out on 32 bit two s complement integers Values which are not 32 bits will be sign extended when expression evaluation occurs The available operators are listed below in the order of evaluation precedence Parentheses are also allowed in expressions to change the order of evaluation Unary two s complement unary one s complement The unary two s complement operator is not allowed on constants containing don t care bits Integer multiply divide and modulo These operators are not allowed on constants containing don t care bits Addition subtraction These operators are not allowed on constants containing don t care bits Bitwise AND Bitwise inclusi
200. ected for the previous execution of the display command The parameters are as follows This allows you to display a list of memory contents formatted in various data types see the display data pages for details This option displays the recorded list of error messages that occurred during the emulation session This option displays the recorded list of events This option lets you display a list of all global symbols in memory 364 local_symbols_in memory pod command registers simulated_io software _ breakpoints status trace Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display This option lets you display all the children of a given symbol See the SYMB syntax page and the Symbolic Retrieval Utilities User s Guide for details on symbol hierarchy This option allows you to display the contents of memory This option lets you display the output of previously executed emulator pod commands This allows you to display the contents of emulation processor registers This lets you display data written to the simulated I O display buffer after you have enabled polling for simulated I O in the emulation configuration This option lets you display the current list of software breakpoints This displays the emulator and trace status This displays the current trace list display event_log display local_symbols_in mod_name The copy command description and the following pages which descri
201. ection are the first to be asked To access the questions in the Reconfigure Internal Registers section answer yes to the Reconfigure internal registers question To access the questions in the Memory Map section answer yes to the Modify memory configuration question To access the questions in the Simulated IO section answer yes to the Modify Simulated IO question To access the questions in the Debug Trace Options section answer yes to the Modify debug trace options question 4 Apply the configuration changes to the emulator To apply configuration changes to the emulator e Click the Apply to Emulator button in the top level dialog box Loads the configuration changes into the emulator Status text to the right shows whether the load was successful You can apply configuration changes to the emulator at any time even while section dialog boxes are open This lets you verify changes without closing section dialog boxes The Apply to Emulator button does not store configuration changes to a file When you exit the configuration interface and there are configuration changes that have not been stored you are asked whether you want to store the changes exit without storing or cancel the exit 100 Configuring the Emulator If apply to emulator fails If apply to emulator fails Choose Display Failed Apply Info from the pull down menu in the top level configuration interface window
202. ed during program execution Both temporary and permanent breakpoints can be inactivated and restored using the breakpoints display pop up menu This means the temporary breakpoint has been set but not encountered during program execution When encountered these breakpoints are inactivated but retained in the breakpoints list Pending breakpoints can only be set using the softkey command line with commands like modify software_breakpoints set 1000 and not selecting the additional options lt temporary gt or lt permanent gt The pending breakpoints status is retained for compatibility with older product software versions In the breakpoints display a pop up menu is available obtained by pressing the select mouse button You can inactivate or restore the status of any breakpoint in the breakpoints list as well as enable or disable the breakpoints feature using the pop up menu 172 Displaying and Modifying Registers This section describes tasks related to displaying and modifying emulation processor registers Within the interface related registers are grouped into a class For example the lt BASIC gt register class includes general registers such as the PC ST USP SSP and data and address registers You can display the contents of an individual register a register class or all registers This section shows you how to e Display register contents e Modify register contents To display register contents
203. ed the hung bus cycle and terminated it Action Retry the command that caused the hung bus cycle You may need to determine the source of termination such as the processor emulation memory or target memory and make required corrections Enable breakpoint failed lt breakpoint gt 665 Cause System failure or target condition Action Check memory mapping and configuration questions Ending released Cause This is a status message The emulation session is being exited with the end release_system The emulator will be released for others to access and use it Error display size is lt LINES gt lines by lt COLUMNS gt columns It must be at least 24 by 80 Cause You tried to specify an incorrect window size Action Set the window size accordingly then start the emulation session The size of the window must be a minimum of 24 lines rows by 80 columns to operate an emulation session Error in configuration process Error starting configuration process Cause Unexpected configuration error Action Verify proper software installation and call your HP 64000 representative Exceeded maximum 64700 command line length 10351 Cause Your command is longer than 240 characters Action Shorten the command 464 Error Messages Exceeded number of emulation memory terms available 142 Cause Too many emulation memory map terms have been used Action reduc size or number of memory mapped terms External label i
204. een loaded for the target file Perfinit error in input file line lt LINE NUMBER gt invalid symbol You included a label file name with your performance_measurement_initialize command and that file contains an invalid symbol Action Edit the file and correct the invalid symbol Perfinit error in input file line lt NUMBER gt Cause You included an input file name with your performance_measurement_initialize command and that file contains a syntax error Action Edit the file and correct the syntax error Perfinit File could not be opened Cause You specified a file as an option to performance_measurement_initialize and the file you specified could not be found or opened by SPMT software Action Make sure you entered the correct file name 476 Error Messages Perfinit No events in file Cause You specified a file along with your performance_measurement initialize command that contained no events Any measurement displayed from this file will have NULL results Action Either edit the file to add events or use the default setup to start a new measurement Perfinit lt EXPR ERROR gt line lt LINE NUMBER gt Performance tool must be initialized Cause You tried to make a performance measurement when the Software Performance Measurement Tool SPMT was not initialized Action The Software Performance Measurement Tool SPMT must be initialized before making performance measurements
205. eive Trig2 configuration option Choose receive for the Should Analyzer drive or receive Trig2 configuration option Use the arm_trig2 option to the trace command 324 Making Coordinated Measurements To arm the emulation analyzer on external analyzer trigger To arm the emulation analyzer on external analyzer trigger Choose receive for the Should Analyzer drive or receive Trig2 configuration option Choose drive for the Should External Analyzer drive or receive Trig2 configuration option Use the arm_trig2 option to the trace command To arm the external analyzer on signal from CMB Choose drive for the Should CMBT drive or receive Trig2 configuration option Choose receive for the Should External Analyzer drive or receive Trig2 configuration option To arm the external analyzer on signal from BNC Choose drive for the Should BNC drive or receive Trig2 configuration option Choose receive for the Should External Analyzer drive or receive Trig2 configuration option To arm the external analyzer on emulation analyzer trigger Choose drive for the Should Analyzer drive or receive Trig2 configuration option Choose receive for the Should External Analyzer drive or receive Trig2 configuration option 325 326 11 Setting X Resources 327 1 2 Setting X Resources The Graphical User Interface is an X Window System application whic
206. em failure Action Run performance verification Terminal Interface pv command Unable to reset 640 Cause Target condition or system failure Action Check target system and run performance verification Terminal Interface pv command Unable to run 610 Cause System failure or target condition Action Run performance verification Terminal Interface pv command and check target system Unable to run after CMB break 606 Cause System failure or target condition Action Run performance verification Terminal Interface pv command and check target system Unable to run performance verification tests 191 Cause You entered the pv command but the emulator was unable to start performance verification because the firmware did not identifythe probe as being the MC6830x Action Make sure the correct emulator probe is connected and that all cables are secured make sure the demo board is connected to the emulator probe and that the power cable is connected between the card cage and the demo board Undefined software breakpoint lt address gt 605 Cause The emulator has encountered a software breakpoint in your program that was not inserted with the modify software_breakpoints set command Action Remove the breakpoint instructions in your code before assembly and link 488 Error Messages Unexpected message from emul700dmn Cause The host system could not start the emulation session because of an u
207. eme file which specifies mouse and keyboard operation Values can be Input or a custom scheme file name The actual scheme file names take the form Softkey lt value gt Scheme File Names There are six scheme files provided with the Graphical User Interface Their names and brief descriptions of the resources they contain follow Defines the labels for the fixed text in the interface Such things as menu item labels and similar text are in this file If the LANG environment variable is set the scheme file Softkey SLANG is loaded if it exists otherwise the file Softkey Label is loaded Defines the color scheme for black and white displays This file is chosen if the display cannot produce at least 16 colors Defines the color scheme for color displays This file is chosen if the display can produce 16 or more colors Defines the size scheme that is the window dimensions and fonts for high resolution displays 1000 pixels or more vertically Defines the size scheme that is the window dimensions and fonts for low resolution displays less than 1000 pixels vertically Defines the input scheme that is the button and key bindings for the mouse and keyboard 500 Concepts Load Order for Scheme Files Scheme files are searched for in the following directories and in the following order System scheme files in directory usr hp64000 ib X1 1 HP64_schemes System wide custom scheme files located in directory XAPP
208. emory Source Only lt Source in Trace Source Mixed lt 1 Tab Expansion 2 to 15 Spaces Clicking toggles whether symbolic Symbolic Addresses information is displayed Field Widths hanemonic Field 55 M ove the mouse pointer to the text entry area and type in the value Symbols in Mnemonic Field 16 Descriptions of the modes follow 146 Source 60 to 255 All Others 1 to 80 re Auto Updat Clicking toggles auto update a inate settings Memory Displays Except Mnemonic Memory Mnemonic Auto PC Trace Display Clicking this checkbox changes all display mode settings to their defaults Default All Settings Clicking this button saves your Clicking this button saves your Clicking this button cancels your changes and changes and closes the dialog box changes and leaves the dialog closes the dialog box box open 186 Using the Emulator To set the display modes Source Symbols View Source in Memory specifies whether source lines are included mixed with assembly code or excluded from mnemonic memory displays Source in Trace specifies whether source lines are included mixed with stored states or excluded from trace displays Symbolic Addresses specifies whether symbols are included in displays Tab Expansion sets the number of spaces displayed for tabs in source lines Source Symbols View Label Field sets the width Gin characters of the address field in the trace list or label symb
209. emory address See the EXPR syntax diagram The function code used to define the address space being referenced See the syntax diagram for FCODE to see a list of the function codes available and for an explanation of those codes This is used with the specify run from command and represents the address from which the program will begin running This option specifies that the emulator will run from either an expression or from the transfer address when a CMB EXECUTE signal is received This option specifies that a trace measurement will be taken when a CMB EXECUTE signal is received Specifies an address where program execution is to stop The emulator will set a software breakpoint at this address and stop execution of your program when it reaches this address and enter the monitor specify run from START specify trace after address 1234H The cmb_execute command 426 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands STATE STATE on To output of STATE QUALIFIER diagram i on QUALIFIER diagram EXPR A lt external_label gt status CeO lt STATUS gt EXPR lt STATUS gt a EXPR This parameter lets you specify a trigger condition as a unique combination of address data status and executed address values The STATE option is part of the QUALIFIER parameter to the trace command and allows you to specify a condition for the trace measurement Refer to the Qualifying Trigger and Store
210. emos or tutorials to the Graphical User Interface by modifying the resources described in the following tables Demo Related Component Resources Resource Value Description enableDemo False Specifies whether Help gt Demo True appears in the pull down menu qdemoPopupsSub indexFile Xdemo Index topics Specifies the file containing the list of topic and file pairs demoPopup textColumns 30 Specifies the width in characters of the of the demo topic list pop up demoPopup listVisibleltemCount 10 Specifies the length in lines of the demo topic list pop up demoTopic About demos Specifies the default topic in the demo pop up selection buffer 338 Setting X Resources To set up demos or tutorials Tutorial Related Component Resources Resource Value Description enableTutorial False Specifies whether Help Tutorial True appears in the pull down menu tutorialPopupSub indexFile Xtutorial Index topics Specifies the file containing the list of topic and file pairs tutorialPopup textColumns 30 Specifies the width in characters of the of the tutorial topic list pop up tutorialPopup listVisibleltemCount 10 Specifies the length in lines of the tutorial topic list pop up tutorialTopic About tutorials Specifies the default topic in the tutorial pop up selection buffer The mechanism for providing demos and tutorial
211. emul_mem ka lt FCODE gt user_mem oC trace Jo lt FILE gt offset_by lt OFFSET gt lt EXPR gt configuration ead symbols lt FILE gt E TT D irace_spec lt FILE gt _ _________ 64782503 This command transfers absolute files from the host computer into emulation or target system RAM With other parameters the load command can load emulator configuration files trace records trace specifications or symbol files The absolute file contains information about where the file is stored The memory map specifies that the locations of the file are in user target system memory or emulation memory This command also allows you to access and display previously stored trace data load a previously created configuration file and load absolute files with symbols Note that any file specified by lt FILE gt cannot be named configuration emul_mem user_mem symbols trace or trace_spec because these are reserved words and are not recognized by the emulator analyzer interface as ordinary file names The absolute file is loaded into emulation memory by default The parameters are as follows This option specifies that a previously created emulation configuration file will be loaded into the emulator You can follow this option with a file name Otherwise the previously loaded configuration will be re
212. ents of the entry buffer and command recall buffer These recall buffer values will be present when you restart the interface In contrast if you end released you must have saved the current configuration to a configuration file if the configuration has changed or the changes will be lost 62 Entering Commands Entering Commands When an X Window System that supports OSF Motif interfaces is running on the host computer the emulator analyzer interface is the Graphical User Interface which provides pull down and pop up menus point and click setting of breakpoints cut and paste online help customizable action keys and pop up recall buffers etc The emulator analyzer interface also provides the Softkey Interface for several types of terminals terminal emulators and bitmapped displays When using the Softkey Interface commands are entered from the keyboard When using the Graphical User Interface the command line portion of the interface gives you the option of entering commands in the same manner as they are entered in the Softkey Interface If you are using the Softkey Interface you can only enter commands from the keyboard using the command line The menu commands in the Graphical User Interface are a subset of the commands available when using the command line While you have a great deal of capability in the menu commands you have even more in the command line This chapter shows you how to enter comma
213. enu in the top level configuration interface window Notice that the mouse pointer changes from an arrow to a question mark Move the question mark mouse pointer over the item you re interested in and click any mouse button The configuration interface provides context sensitive help in the top level dialog box and throughout the configuration section dialog boxes To exit the configuration interface Choose File gt Exit from the pull down menu in the top level configuration interface window or type lt CTRL gt x If configuration changes have not been stored to a file a confirmation dialog box appears giving you the options of storing exiting without storing or canceling the exit To load an existing configuration file In the emulator analyzer interface choose File Load Emulator Config from the pull down menu and use the file selection dialog box to specify the configuration file to be loaded Or using the command line enter load configuration lt FILE gt This command loads previously created and stored configuration files You cannot load a configuration while the configuration interface is running 105 Modifying the General Items and Monitor Setup To modify the general configuration items first start the configuration interface and access the General Items Monitor Setup configuration section refer to the previous Using the Configuration Interface section Figure 17 Emu
214. er Read Write Line Yes Mo Buler Chip Select Lines Yes No To access information about the configuration items use the online help button or press f1 to show context sensitive help on an individual item 121 Setting the Debug Trace Options To set the debug trace options you must start the configuration interface and access the Debug Trace Options configuration section refer to the Using the Configuration Interface section Figure 22 Emulator Comiguration Debug Ooions Debug race Options Freak on Write to D gt Yes Mo Trace Mode Type af Cyebes Trace DA Cyoles amp View O Ma To To access information about the configuration items use the online help button or press f1 to show context sensitive help on an individual item To configure breaks on writes to ROM When breaks on writes to ROM are enabled the emulator will break into the emulation monitor whenever the user program attempts to write to a memory region mapped as ROM The emulator will prevent the processor from actually writing to memory mapped as emulation ROM however it cannot prevent writes to target system RAM locations which are mapped as ROM even though the write to ROM break is enabled When breaks on writes to ROM are disabled the emulator will not break to the monitor upon a write to ROM The emulator will not modify the memory location if it is in emulation ROM 122 Configuring the Emulator To configure
215. erface Note that after you have changed the trace depth execute the command wait measurement_complete before displaying the trace Otherwise the new trace states will not be available Displays the trace list with or without dequeuing A dequeued trace list is available through the disassembly options In a dequeued trace list unused instruction prefetch cycles are discarded and operand cycles are placed immediately following the corresponding instruction fetch If you choose a non dequeued trace list instruction and operand fetches are shown exactly as captured by the analyzer Displays the trace at a certain line number and disassembles instruction opcodes 382 EXPR external binary lt external _label gt hex off then lt LINE gt mnemonic offset_by Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display trace An expression is a combination of numeric values symbols operators and parentheses specifying an offset value to be subtracted from the addresses traced by the emulation analyzer See the EXPR syntax diagram Displays the external analyzer trace list in binary format This option displays a defined external analyzer label Displays the external analyzer trace list in hexadecimal format Use this option to turn off the external trace list display This allows you to display multiple external analysis labels This option appears when more than one external analyzer label is in use This prompts you fo
216. erface By default the Graphical User Interface selects high_word and all_cycles Use the command line if you need to specify trace disassembly using other options Or using the command line enter commands as follows e To show only instruction cycles in the trace list enter display trace disassemble_from_line_number lt LINE gt instructions_only e To show all bus cycles in the trace list enter display trace disassemble_from_line_number lt LINE gt all_cycles Normally the MC6830x presents the trace list data as it was stored by the analyzer That is all bus cycles are shown and disassembly starts with the most significant word of the data If you don t want to see operand cycles in the trace list specify the instructions_only option The disassembly options remain in effect until you specify a new disassembly option Note that although the high_word low_word and align options are displayed these are for 32 bit processors only and will not perform any action 243 Examples Using the Emulation Analyzer To specify trace dequeueing options Show only instruction cycles in the trace list starting at line 40 display trace disassemble_from_line_number 40 instructions_only Show all bus cycles in the trace list display trace disassemble_from_line_number 40 all_cycles To specify trace dequeueing options Choose Trace Display Options and in the dialog box selec
217. erlined character in the menu label on the menu bar For example f for File Type the character in lowercase only To move right to another pull down menu after having initially displayed a menu press the right arrow key To move left to another pull down menu after having initially displayed a menu press the left arrow key 66 Entering Commands To choose a pull down menu item using the keyboard To move down one menu item within a menu press the down arrow key To move up one menu item within a menu press the wp arrow key To choose a menu item type the character in the menu item label that is underlined Or move to the menu item using the arrow keys and then press the lt RETURN gt key on the keyboard To cancel a displayed menu press the Escape key The interface supports keyboard mnemonics and the use of the arrow keys to move within or between menus For each menu or menu item the underlined character in the menu or menu item label is the keyboard mnemonic character Notice the keyboard mnemonic is not always the first character of the label If a menu item has a cascade menu attached to it then typing the keyboard mnemonic displays the cascade menu Some menu items have an ellipsis as part of the menu label An ellipsis indicates that the menu item will display a dialog or other box when the menu item is chosen Dialog boxes support the use of the keyboard as well To direct keyboard input to a dial
218. erminal or terminal emulation window you don t get a dialog box from which to choose configuration sections however you have access to the same configuration options through a series of configuration questions To access the questions in the Interactive Measurement Specification section answer yes to the Modify interactive measurement specification question This section shows you how to e Drive the emulation analyzer trigger signal to the CMB e Drive the emulation analyzer trigger signal to the BNC connector e Drive the external analyzer trigger signal to the CMB 321 M aking Coordinated Measurements To drive the emulation analyzer trigger signal to the CMB e Drive the external analyzer trigger signal to the BNC connector e Break emulator execution on signal from CMB e Break emulator execution on signal from BNC e Break emulator execution on external analyzer trigger e Arm the emulation analyzer on signal from CMB e Arm the emulation analyzer on signal from BNC e Arm the emulation analyzer on external analyzer trigger e Arm the external analyzer on signal from CMB e Arm the external analyzer on signal from BNC e Arm the external analyzer on emulation analyzer trigger To drive the emulation analyzer trigger signal to the CMB Choose receive for the Should CMBT drive or receive Trig1 configuration option You could also drive the emulation analyzer trigger to the CMB over the trig2 internal
219. erminal window where you started the interface so that the window may still be used 5 Optionally start additional Graphical User Interface windows into the same emulation session by repeating the previous step You can also choose to use the conventional Softkey Interface under X Windows but you must include a command line argument to emul700 to override the default Graphical User Interface Start the conventional interface by entering emul700 u skemul lt logical name gt 522 Example Installation Step 3 Exit the Graphical User Interface Suppose you have discovered that the logical name for a 6830x emulator connected to the LAN is em6830x To start the Graphical User Interface and begin communicating with that emulator enter assuming your PATH includes HP64000 bin emul700 em6830x After a few seconds the Graphical User Interface Emulator Analyzer window should appear on your screen The window will be similar to the following Step 3 Exit the Graphical User Interface Position the mouse pointer over the pull down menu named File on the menu bar at the top of the interface screen Press and hold the command select mouse button until the File menu appears While continuing to hold the mouse button down move the mouse pointer down the menu to the Exit menu item Display the Exit cascade menu by moving the mouse pointer to the right edge of the Exit menu choice There is an arrow on the right edge of t
220. es 337 recalling entries 71 recall command 83 dialog box 80 recall trace specifications dialog box 206 recursion in SPMT measurements 281 registers copy command 362 display command 378 display modify 173 displaying 39 173 174 modify 175 modify command 402 SIM 403 to file 193 release_system end command option 47 102 repeat the previous trace command 207 repetitive display of memory 182 reset emulator commands which cause exit from 162 reset command 415 reset trace display defaults 254 reset run from target 157 resolution memory mapper 110 resource See X resource RESOURCE_MANAGER property 498 restart term 230 233 restrict to real time runs emulator configuration 107 108 permissible commands 107 target system dependency 107 ROM mapping emulation or target 112 writes to 112 RS 422 host computer interface card 5 run command 156 416 417 run from reset 157 S scheme files for X resources 329 499 color scheme 330 334 500 custom 334 335 501 input scheme 330 500 label scheme 330 334 500 platform scheme 330 499 size scheme 330 500 scroll bar 25 secondary branch expression 536 select mouse button 27 sequencer analyzer 536 branch 536 terms 230 536 using the 229 sequencing and windowing specification 236 238 239 SEQUENCING in trace command 418 419 server X 328 498 set command 420 424 set default command 254 set source off command 249 set sour
221. ese commands let you display chip select information from the sim processor register set or the emsim emulator register set for your port of interest The resulting display shows the pin assignments for the port you have chosen Examples To display information about bus interface port A from the sim processor register set choose Display gt Configuration Info Bus Interface Port A SIM from either the configuration interface the emulator analyzer interface pull down menu Hewett Packard Emulator Analyzer hptsdzb m6830 File Display Modity Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings Help Teton tes tase e Proce Info Bus Loterface Port A in SIM Registers a 3 4 6 6 Go 5 PRS Irgurt 16 Go 11 IROLKS 12 PRIZ rout v STATES NGSIOZ Runaing ia mentter Software brosk O002bcePap 128 Configuring the Emulator To display information about the memory map To display information about bus interface port A from the emsim emulator register set choose Display Configuration Info Bus Interface Port A Emulator SIM from either the configuration interface the emulator analyzer interface pull down menu Hewlett Packard Emulator Analyzer hptsdzb m6830x File Display Mody Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings peton ever onse ree an J Sier SoarenJ Your y ae o rare aI STATUS N6SIOZ Runatag ia meaitor Sof tmere brosk O0O2bcelsp Biapley configuration info ambus_porth
222. esents a combination of address data and status expressions that must be matched to satisfy the prestore qualifier e Disable prestore qualification by entering trace prestore anything You use the prestore qualifier to save states that are related to other routines that you re tracing For example you might be tracing a subprogram and want to see which program called it You can specify calls be prestored and that entries to the subprogram be stored The easiest way to do this is to 223 Examples Using the Emulation Analyzer To define a prestore qualifier prestore program reads that are outside the address range of the subprogram being called You may have several program modules that write to a variable and sometime during execution of your program that variable gets bad data written to it Using a prestore measurement you can find out which module is writing the bad data Store qualify writes to the variable and uses prestore to capture the instructions that caused those writes to occur perhaps by prestoring program reads Specify a prestore qualifier trace prestore address not range gen_ascii_data thru gen_ascii_data end status program and read only gen_ascii_data Disable prestore qualification trace prestore anything 224 Using the Emulation Analyzer To trace activity leading up to a program halt To trace activity leading up to a program halt e Choose Trace Until Stop Or using the co
223. et the LD_LIBRARY_PATH variable to the directory containing run time libraries used by the HP 64000 products Again if you installed relative to users team you would enter setenv HP64000 users team usr hp64000 setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH LD_LIBRARY_PATH HP64000 lib Set the PATH environment variable to include the usr hp64000 bin directory by entering setenv PATH PATH HP64000 bin Including usr hp64000 bin in your PATH relieves you from prefixing HP 64700 executables with the directory path Set the MANPATH environment variable to include the usr hp64000 man and usr hp64000 contrib man directories by entering setenv MANPATH MANPATH HP64000 man setenv MANPATH MANPATH HP64000 contrib man Including these directories in your MANPATH variable lets you access the online man page information included with the software If the Graphical User Interface is to run on aSPARCsystem computer that is not running OpenWindows include the usr openwin lib directory in LD_LIBRARY_PATH setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH LD_LIBRARY_PATH isr openwin lib 518 Installation Step 4 Verify the software installation Step 4 Verify the software installation A number of product filesets were installed on your system during the software installation process Due to the complexity of installing on NFS mounted file systems a script that verifies and customizes these products was also installed This stand alone script may be run
224. et up action keys to use the contents of the entry buffer Entry Buffer Recall Button Allows you to recall entry buffer values that have been predefined or used in previous commands When you click on the entry buffer Recall button a dialog box appears that allows you to select values Display Area Can show memory data values analyzer traces registers breakpoints status simulated I O global symbols local symbols pod commands the emulator s underlying Terminal Interface error log or display log Whenever the mouse pointer changes from an arrow to a hand you can press and hold the select mouse button to access pop up menus Scroll Bar A sticky slider that allows navigation in the display area Click on the upper and lower arrows to scroll to the top home and bottom end of the window Click on the inner arrows to scroll one line Drag the slider handle up or down to cause continuous scrolling Click between the inner arrows and the slider handle to page up or page down Status Line Displays the emulator and analyzer status Also when error and status messages occur they are displayed on the status line in addition to being saved in the error log You can press and hold the select mouse button to access the Status Line pop up menu Command Line The command line area is similar to the command line in the Softkey Interface however the graphical interface lets you use the mouse to enter and edit commands e Command
225. etters digits or underscores beginning with a letter or underscore The identifier may be enclosed by braces or entered directly following the symbol Braces are required when the identifier is followed by a letter a digit or an underscore that is not interpreted as part of its name For example assume a directory named users softkeys and the shell variable S The value of S is soft By specifying the directory as users S keys the correct result is obtained However if you attempt to specify the directory as users Skeys the Softkey Interface looks for the value of the variable Skeys This is not the operators intended result You may not get the intended result unless Skeys is already defined to be softkeys You can examine the current values of all shell variables defined in your environment with the command env Positional shell variables such as 1 2 and so on are not supported Neither are special shell variables such as and so on supported 87 Entering Commands To startlogging commands to a command file You can continue command file lines This is done by avoiding the line feed with a backslash A line terminated by is concatenated with any following lines until a line that does not contain a backslash is found A line constructed in this manner is recognized and executed as one single command line If the last line in a command file is terminated by it appears on the c
226. ettings Action keys Disp Sre tase op See Prev fton er tot Break Step Aam_ Regao Differences for SIM and EMSIM Registers Scr Ore oe EPER iS 555 5 aS 5 STATES NESW2 Reeeing ie moniter Sofware break 0002bcePs eae Commend eare Cover aie re eb To synchronize to the 6830x SIM registers e Choose Modify SIM Registers Copy Processor SIM to Emulator SIM from the emulator analyzer pull down menu Or using the command line enter sync_sim_registers from_6830x_to_config The contents of the 6830x SIM registers are copied to the emulation copy of the SIM registers 139 Using the Emulator To synchronize to the EMSIM registers To synchronize to the EMSIM registers e Choose Modify SIM Registers Copy Emulator SIM to Processor SIM from the emulator analyzer pull down menu Or using the command line enter sync_sim_registers to_6830x_from_config The contents of the emulation copy of the SIM registers are copied to the 6830x SIM registers To restore default values in the EMSIM registers e Choose Modify SIM Registers Default Emulator SIM from the emulator analyzer interface pull down menu Or using the command line enter sync_sim_registers default_config The contents of the EMSIM register set are restored to their power up values 140 Loading and Storing Absolute Files This section describes the tasks related to loading absol
227. etween the arm condition and the trigger The time displayed will be from 0 04 microseconds to 41 948 milliseconds less than 0 04 microseconds or greater than 41 943 milliseconds If the arm signal is ignored or the trigger is not in memory a question mark is displayed The States line shows the number of states that have been stored out of the number that is possible to store and the line numbers that the stored states occupy The trigger state is always stored on line 0 The Sequence term line of the trace status display shows the number of the term the sequencer was in when the trace completed Because a branch out of the last sequence term constitutes the trigger the number displayed is what would be the next term 2 in the preceding example even though that term is not defined If the trace is halted the sequence term number just before the halt is displayed otherwise the current sequence term number is displayed If the current sequence term is changing too quickly to be read a question mark is displayed The Occurrence left line of the trace status display shows the number of occurrences remaining before the primary branch can be taken out of the current sequence term If the occurrence left is changing too quickly to be read a question mark is displayed 204 Using the Emulation Analyzer To change the trace depth To change the trace depth e Choose Trace Display Options and in the dialog bo
228. f addresses or a single address point and it will show the other symbols under either Symbols within range or Additional symbols for address as applicable In the interrupt_sim example it may show either interrupt_sim or _interrupt_sim to represent the range depending on which symbol it finds first The other symbol will be shown below Symbols within range in the report These conditions appear particularly in default measurements that include all global and local symbols Relative and Absolute Counts Relative count is the total number of states associated with the address ranges in the performance measurement Relative time is the total amount of time associated with the address ranges in the performance measurement The absolute counts are the number of states or amount of time associated with all the states in all the traces 272 Om t N Pm Examples Making Software Performance Measurements To interpret activity measurement reports Error Tolerance and Confidence Level An approximate error may exist in displayed information Error tolerance for a level of confidence is calculated using the mean of the standard deviations and the mean of the means Error tolerance gives an indication of the stability of the information For example if the error is 5 for a confidence level of 95 then you can be 95 confident that the information has an error of 5 or less The Student s T distribution is used in these cal
229. f memory you intend to install in your target system when its design is complete A program that is executed by the emulation processor which allows the emulation controller to access target system resources For example when you display target system memory locations the monitor program executes microprocessor instructions that read the target memory locations and send their contents to the emulation controller The cable that connects the emulator to the target system microprocessor socket The emulation processor is the processor that replaces the target system processor during an emulation session The emulation processor is pat of the emulation probe 534 emulator entry point external analyzer external analyzer probe external clock foreground glitch global restart host computer instrumentation card cage monitor pod commands Glossary An instrument that performs just like the microprocessor it replaces but at the same time it gives you information about the operation of the processor An emulator gives you control over target system execution and allows you to view or modify the contents of processor registers target system memory and I O resources An executable segment offset that identifies the starting point for execution as when the segment is invoked via a gate An analyzer that captures activity on signal nodes external to the emulation processor bus A set of signal lines that
230. fault configuration run from reset to execute the initialization code and then configure the emulator to match the processor SIM Display SIM Register Differences This shows current differences between the SIM registers and the EMSIM registers This presents a list of all registers whose values are different between the SIM and the EMSIM Use this to compare the programming between the SIM and EMSIM Display Configuration Info This displays information about the emulator configuration and processor SIM programming 503 Concepts Display Configuration Info Diagnostics This checks the emulator configuration Any inconsistencies and potential problems found during the check are listed Resolve any items in the list to ensure correct operation of the emulator Display Configuration Info gt Chip Selects SIM This displays chip selects in the SIM processor register set in a table Use this to see how the SIM registers have configured the chip select pins of the processor Display Configuration Info Chip Selects Emulator SIM This displays chip selects in the EMSIM emulator register set in a table Use this to see how the EMSIM registers have configured the chip select pins of the emulation copy Display Configuration Info Bus Interface Ports SIM This displays bus interface ports in the SIM processor register set in a table Use this to see how the SIM registers have configured the external bus
231. ffer If symbols have not aa been loaded this menu item is grayed out and unresponsive Pod Commands Copies the last 100 lines from the pod commands display Error Log Copies the last 100 lines from the error log display Event Log Copies the last 100 lines from event log display To open a terminal emulation window Choose File gt Term This command opens a terminal window into the current working directory context 193 Using Simulated I O Simulated I O is a feature of the emulator analyzer interface that lets you use the same keyboard and display that you use with the interface to provide input to programs and display program output To use simulated I O your programs must communicate with the simulated I O control address and the buffer locations that follow it The Hewlett Packard AxLS compilers if your program uses I O automatically link with environment dependent routines that communicate with the simulated I O control address and buffer Also before simulated I O can work the emulator must be configured to enable polling of the simulated I O control address and to define the control address location This section shows you how to e Display the simulated I O screen e Use simulated I O keyboard input Refer to the Simulated I O User s Guide for complete details on how simulated I O works To display the simulated I O screen Choose Display Simulated IO Before you can disp
232. found the trigger condition while tracing a program run The emulator is broken to the monitor trig2 break 619 Cause This status message will be displayed if you have used the internal trig2 line to connect the analyzer or external analyzer trigger output to the emulator break input and the analyzer has found the trigger condition The emulator is broken to the monitor 484 Error Messages Trigger delay out of bounds lt bounds gt 2042 Cause This error occurs when you attempt to specify an external timing trigger delay outside the valid range The external timing trigger delay must be between 0 and 10 ms in 10 ns increments Action Re enter the command with the trigger delay within the bounds shown Trigger duration out of bounds lt bounds gt 2032 Cause This error occurs when you attempt to specify an external timing trigger duration outside the valid range A greater than duration must fall within the range of 30 ns to 10 ms and must be a multiple of 10 ns A less than duration must fall within the range 40 ns to 10ms and must be a multiple of 10 ns Action Re enter the command with the trigger duration within the bounds shown Unable to break 608 Cause This message is displayed if the emulator is unable to break to the monitor because the emulation processor is reset halted or is otherwise disabled Action First look at the emulation prompt and other status messages displayed to deter
233. fy memory modify register modify software_breakpoints modify tags name_of_module performance_measurement_end performance_measurement_init performance_measurement_run pod_command pwd print working directory pws print working symbol reset run set specify step stop_trace store memory store trace store trace_spec sync_sim_registers trace wait 352 See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands bbaunld bbaunld This command is available when the HP Branch Validator product is installed This basis branch analyzer BBA product is used to analyze the testing of your programs create more complete test suites and quantify your level of testing The HP Branch Validator records branches executed in a program and generates reports that provide information about program execution during testing It uses a special C preprocessor to add statements that write to a data array when program branches are taken After running the program in the emulator using test input you can use the bbaunload command to store the BBA information to a file Then you can generate reports based on the stored information Refer to the HP Branch Validator BBA User s Guide for complete details on the bbaunload command syntax 303 running reset running in monitor See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands break break Y break This command causes the emulator to lea
234. g the HP 64700 to a computer or LAN e Installing HP 9000 software e Installing Sun SPARCsystem software e Verifying the installation For information about installing hardware refer to the MC6830x Emulator Analyzer Installation Service Terminal Interface User s Guide Minimum HP 9000 Hardware and System Requirements The following is a set of minimum hardware and system recommendations for operation of the Graphical User Interface on HP 9000 Series 300 400 and Series 700 workstations HP UX For Series 9000 300 and Series 9000 400 workstations the minimum supported version of the operating system is 7 03 or later For Series 9000 700 workstations the minimum supported version of the operating system is version 8 01 Motif OSF For Series 9000 700 workstations you must also have the Motif 1 1 dynamic link libraries installed They are installed by default so you do not have to install them specifically for this product but you should consult your HP UX documentation for confirmation and more information 508 Installation Hardware and Memory Any workstation used with the Graphical User Interface should have a minimum of 16 megabytes of memory Series 300 workstations should have a minimum performance equivalent to that of a HP 9000 350 A color display is also highly recommended From here you should proceed to the section titled Installation for HP 9000 Hosted Systems for instructions on how to install verify
235. ge return as part of the command 78 Entering Commands To edit the command line using the command line pushbuttons To edit the command line using the command line pushbuttons To clear the command line click the Clear pushbutton To clear the command line from the cursor position to the end of the line click the Clear to end pushbutton To move to the right one command word or token click the Forward pushbutton To move to the left one command word or token click the Backup pushbutton To insert characters at the cursor position press the insert key to change to insertion mode and then type the characters to be inserted To delete characters to the left of the cursor position press the lt BACKSPACE gt key When the cursor arrives at the beginning of a command word or token the softkey labels change to display the possible choices at that level of the command When moving by words left or right the Forward pushbutton becomes half bright and unresponsive when the cursor reaches the end of the command string Similarly the Backup pushbutton becomes half bright and unresponsive when the cursor reaches the beginning of the command See To edit the command line using the mouse and the command line pop up menu and To edit the command line using the keyboard for information about additional editing operations you can perform To edit the command line using the command line pop up menu To clear the comma
236. ging of commands log_commands to logfile log_commands off The wait command 395 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands modify modify REGIST ER lt RETURN gt CONFIGURATION ers KEYBOARD_TO_SIMIO i V Es A EGIST ERS 64749503 This command allows you to observe or change information specific to the emulator The modify command is used to e Modify contents of memory as integers strings or real numbers e Modify the contents of the processor registers e View or edit the current emulation configuration e Modify the simulated I O keyboard settings e Modify the SIM registers The following pages contain detailed information about the various modify syntax diagrams 396 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands modify configuration modify configuration on ODIFY diagram This command allows you to view and edit the current emulation configuration items The configuration questions are presented in sequence with either the default response or the previously entered response You can select the currently displayed response by pressing lt RETURN gt Otherwise you can modify the response as you desire then press lt RETURN gt The default responses defined on powerup are displayed Examples modify configuration See Also The load configurat
237. gisters determine the DTACK source for a bus cycle within the range of a chip select This information is needed for the emulator to properly complete bus cycles The EMSIM registers which are an emulator version of the SIM registers are used to configure the emulator hardware The EMSIM registers are usually set to the after initialization code values desired for the SIM registers By default the EMSIM registers contain the processor reset SIM values refer to the appropriate Motorola MC6830x User s Manual for specific values Therefore the default programming of the emulator hardware will match the SIM reset values If desired the programming of the emulator hardware EMSIM registers can be transferred into the processor SIM registers with the Modify SIM Registers Copy Emulator SIM to Processor SIM pull down menu or sync_sim_registers to_6830x_from_config from the command line This happens automatically each time a break to the monitor from emulation reset occurs This ensures that the processor is prepared to properly access memory when a program is downloaded to the emulator Alternatively the emulator hardware can be programmed from the processor s SIM registers with the Modify SIM Registers gt Copy Processor SIM to Emulator SIM pull down menu or sync_sim_registers from_6830x_to_config from the command line This 137 Using the Emulator To view the SIM register differences is useful if initialization code that
238. gram counter 190 file at symbol from symbols screen 190 file from memory display screen 190 embedded microprocessor system 534 emul700 command to start the emulator analyzer interface 55 emulation bus analyzer 534 emulation memory block size 110 dual port 107 loading absolute files 141 emulation monitor 534 emulation session exiting 62 emulation external analyzer mode 303 emulator 535 configuring the 96 device table file 32 55 56 general description 4 limitations DMA support 110 multiple start stop 5 317 plugging into a target system 51 running from target reset 157 status lines predefined values for 211 using the 136 emulator configuration break processor on write to ROM 122 exiting configuration interface 105 load command 393 loading from file 105 modify command 397 modifying a configuration section 100 restrict to real time runs 107 108 starting configuration interface 98 99 storing 102 trace background foreground operation 123 emulator status displaying 193 emulator analyzer interface exiting 47 61 running in multiple windows 55 starting 55 56 end command 47 385 entry pod commands 91 simulated io 195 entry buffer 25 address copy and paste to 69 clearing 68 copy and paste from 72 copy and paste to 68 70 Entry Buffer Recall dialog box 25 Entry Buffer Recall dialog box operation 71 multi window copy and paste from 72 operation
239. h means it is a client in the X Window System client server model The X server is a program that controls all access to input devices typically a mouse and a keyboard and all output devices typically a display screen It is an interface between application programs you run on your system and the system input and output devices An X resource controls an element of appearance or behavior in an X application For example in the graphical interface one resource controls the text in action key pushbuttons as well as the action performed when the pushbutton is clicked By modifying resource settings you can change the appearance or behavior of certain elements in the graphical interface When the graphical interface starts up it reads resource specifications from a set of configuration files Resources specifications in later files override those in earlier files Files are read in the following order The application defaults file For example usr lib X11 app defaults HP64_Softkey in HP UX or usr openwin lib X1 1 app defaults HP64_Softkey in SunOS The XAPPLRESDIR HP64_Softkey file The XAPPLRESDIR environment variable defines a directory containing system wide custom application defaults The server s RESOURCE_MANAGER property The xrdb command loads user defined resource specifications into the RESOURCE_MANAGER property If no RESOURCE_MANAGER property exists user defined resource settings are read from the HOME Xdefaul
240. hapter To display the configuration context e Choose Display Context from the pull down menu in the top level configuration interface window The current directory context and the current configuration files are displayed in a window Click the Done pushbutton when you wish to close the window Figure 15 Emulator Configuration Current Context e Directory fusrihp64000 demo debug_envihp64798 I Configuration File usrfhp64000 demo debug_env hp64798 Config 103 Figure 16 Displays help on main items Displays help about the specific topic Configuring the Emulator To access help topics To access help topics e Choose Help General Topic from the pull down menu in the top level configuration interface window click on a topic in the selection dialog box and click the OK button Emulator Analyzer Help Help Index Topics About Emulation Interface he Interface Ata Glance Common Questions amp Answers Action Keys Entry Buffer Command Line Operation Registers Concept of EMSIM and SIM File Selection Dialog Box x Resources Display Screen Memory Display Screen Breakpoints Display Screen Symbols Display Screen Selection 104 Configuring the Emulator To access context sensitive f1 help To access context sensitive f1 help Place the mouse pointer over the item you re interested in and press the f1 key Choose Help On Item from the pull down m
241. he emulation session again Initialization load failed Cause The emulator could not be initialized Action Make sure your data communication switch settings are correct and that all Softkey Interface software has been loaded properly Cycle power on the emulator then try starting up the emulation session again Initializing emulator with default configuration Cause This is a status message The host system started the emulation session and initialized the emulator using the default configuration The emulator is probably operating correctly 468 Error Messages Initializing user interface with default config file Cause This is a status message The host system started the emulation session and Softkey Interface using the default configuration file The emulator is probably operating correctly Insufficient emulation memory memory map may be incomplete Cause You can map only the amount of emulation memory available in your emulator Trying to map additional unavailable memory may cause information to be missing from your memory map Action Modify your configuration and update the memory map to correctly reflect the amount of emulation memory available Insufficient emulation memory 21 Cause You have attempted to map more emulation memory than is available or you have attempted to include tag memory with a target system memory range when there is not enough emulation memory available Action Reduce the amount
242. he menu item Choose Released from the cascade menu The interface will terminate and release the emulator for use by others 523 524 16 Installing Updating Emulator Firmware 525 Installing Updating Emulator Firmware The 6830x emulator firmware is included with the emulator analyzer interface software and the program that downloads emulator firmware is included with the HP B1471 64700 Operating Environment product The firmware and the program that downloads it into the control card are also included with the 6830x emulator probe on an MS DOS format floppies The floppies are for users that do not have hosted interface software Before you can update emulator firmware you must have already installed the emulator into the HP 64700 connected the HP 64700 to a host computer or LAN and installed the emulator analyzer interface and HP B1471 software as described in the Installation chapter This chapter describes how to e Update firmware with the progflash command e Display current firmware version information 526 Installing Updating Emulator Firmware To update emulator firmware with progflash To update emulator firmware with progflash Enter the progflash v lt emul_name gt lt products gt command The progflash command downloads code from files on the host computer into Flash EPROM memory in the HP 64700 The v option means verbose It causes progress st
243. he trace enter trace counting lt bus_state gt 220 Using the Emulation Analyzer To count states or time lt bus_state gt represents a combination of address data and status expressions that must be matched to satisfy the trigger qualifier e To count all states in the trace enter trace counting anystate e To count time in the trace enter trace counting time e To disable counting in the trace enter trace counting off You can use the analyzer s state time counter to count time or bus states If using the emulation bus analyzer with deep memory counting imposes no restrictions on memory depth If using the 1K analyzer use of the counter restricts the trace memory to a maximum depth of 512 states If you disable the counter in the 1K analyzer using the trace counting off command maximum trace depth is 1024 states When using the 1K analyzer the MC6830x emulator defaults to counting off To count states or time you must configure the analyzer clocks correctly See To configure the analyzer clock in the Configuring the Emulator chapter for more information Use the display trace count command to determine how the count is displayed in the trace list See To display count information in the trace for more information 221 Examples Using the Emulation Analyzer To define a storage qualifier To count occurrences of a particular bus state in the trace this requires the 1K analyze
244. hical User Interface on HP 9000 workstations These instruction also tell you how not to install the Graphical User Interface if you want to use just the conventional Softkey Interface This section shows you how to e Install the software from the media e Verify the software installation e Start the X server and the Motif Window Manager mwm or start HP VUE e Set the necessary environment variables Step 1 Install the software from the media The tape that contains the Graphical User Interface software may contain several products Usually you will want to install all of the products on the tape However to save disk space or for other reasons you can choose to install selected filesets If you plan on using the Softkey Interface instead of the Graphical User Interface you can save about 3 5 megabytes of disk space by not installing the XUI suffixed filesets in the 64700 Operating Environment and lt processor type gt Emulation Tools partitions Also if you choose not to install the Graphical User Interface you will not have to use a special command line option to start the Softkey Interface Refer to the information on updating HP UX in your HP UX documentation for instructions on viewing partitions and filesets and marking filesets that should not be loaded The following sub steps assume that you want to install all products on the tape 1 Become the root user on the system you want to update 2 Make sur
245. hin a single command line command to obtain a desired trace display See the display trace and set command descriptions in the Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands chapter for more information This section describes how to e Use the Trace Options dialog box e Use the trace list pop up menu e Display the trace about a line number e Move through the trace list e Disassemble the trace list e Specify trace disassembly options e Specify trace dequeueing options e Display the trace without disassembly e Display symbols in the trace list e Display source lines in the trace list e Change the column width e Select the type of count information in the trace list e Offset addresses in the trace list e Reset the trace display defaults e Change the number of states available for display e Display program memory associated with a trace list line 237 Using the Emulation Analyzer To specify both sequencing and windowing e Open an edit window into the source file associated with a trace list line Examples To use the Trace Options dialog box Click to select the desired format of trace E Emulator Analyzer Trace Options 1 disassembly A Trace Display Options Click to select the way that absolute status information is shown in the trace Data Format list n Click to select count reference Relative Status Format Hex t i i a ng state or Absolute to Count Format Relati
246. hold the select mouse button and choose Edit Source from the pop up menu When editing files at addresses the interface determines which source file contains the code generated for the address and opens an edit session on the file The interface will issue an error if it cannot find a source file for the address If upon starting the emulator session you chose to copy files to anew directory the file you try to edit will have write permissions This same file will be read only if you did not choose to copy files to a new directory upon starting up the emulator The interface will choose the vi editor as its default editor unless you specify another editor by setting an X resource Refer to the Setting X Resources chapter for more information about setting this resource You must load symbols before most commands will work because symbol information is needed to be able to locate the files 190 Using the Emulator To edit files Examples To edit a file that defines a symbol Hewlett Packard Emulator Analyzer hpledee mGs50x File Display Madity Execution Exeaipoints Trace Settings Help pation eye Dip Sret T Dep Sre Prev Wer tot3 _Greak _ Step Asm _ Regan Choosing the Edit File Global anhaja soa Defining Symbol menu Procedure abols k item brings up a terminal Procedure ras i kene Segern o H jA f _ Ff luh BPG libo window with an edit at ae BEC BREET libo e session open on
247. hould BNC drive or receive Trig1 configuration option You could also break emulator execution on a trigger signal from the BNC over the trig2 internal line by specifying that the BNC should drive trig2 and that the emulator break should receive trig2 323 i Making Coordinated Measurements To break emulator execution on external analyzer trigger To break emulator execution on external analyzer trigger Choose yes for the Should Emulator break receive Trig2 configuration option Choose drive for the Should External Analyzer drive or receive Trig2 configuration option When an emulator break occurs due to the analyzer trigger the analyzer will stop driving the internal signal that caused the break Therefore if trig2 is used both to break and to drive the CMB TRIGGER for example TRIGGER will go true when the trigger is found and then will go false after the emulator breaks However if trig1 is used to cause the break and trig2 is used to drive the CMB TRIGGER TRIGGER will stay true until the trace is halted or until the next trace starts To arm the emulation analyzer on signal from CMB Choose drive for the Should CMBT drive or receive Trig2 configuration option Choose receive for the Should Analyzer drive or receive Trig2 configuration option Use the arm_trig2 option to the trace command To arm the emulation analyzer on signal from BNC Choose drive for the Should BNC drive or rec
248. hru the end of symbol2 dirl dir2 source_file s local_symbol The above defines a range based on the address of local_symbol Initialization with Global Symbols When the performance_measurement_initialize command is entered with no options or with the global_symbols option the global symbols in the symbols database become the address ranges for which activity is measured If the symbols database is not loaded a default set of ranges that cover the entire processor address range will be used The global symbols database contains procedure symbols which are associated with the address range from the beginning of the procedure to the end and static symbols which are associated with the address of the static variable 268 Making Software Performance Measurements To initialize activity performance measurements Initialization with Local Symbols When the performance_measurement_initialize command is entered with the local_symbols_in option and a source file name the symbols associated with that source file become the address ranges for which activity is measured If the symbols database is not loaded an error message will occur telling you that the source filename symbol was not found You can also use the local_symbols_in option with procedure symbols this allows you to measure activity related to the symbols defined in a single function or procedure Restoring the Current Measurement The performance_meas
249. i e mean of the average times in each time range 287 Examples From Address File main module users guest demo debug_env hp64782 main c Symbolic Reference at interrupt_sim 8A To Address File main module users guest demo debug_env hp64782 main c Symbolic Reference at main interrupt_sim Number of intervals 2550 Maximum Minimum Avg Time 100 1 us 500 1 us 1 001 ms 5 001 ms Making Software Performance M easurements To interpret duration measurement reports Consider the following duration measurement report generated with the commands shown display trace depth 512 trace after interrupt_sim start or interrupt_sim end only interrupt_sim start or interrupt_sim end counting time performance_measurement_initialize duration performance_measurement_run 10 performance_measurement_end perf32 more Time Interval Profile 10A8 101E Time 73297 920 us Time 48230 400 us 55672 752 us Statistical summary for 10 traces Stdv 11442 64 95 Confidence 0 80 Error tolerance Graph of relative percents 1 us 10 us 10 1 us 100 us 500 us 1 ms 5 ms 10 ms 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 OOOO oO 288 Making Software Performance M easurements To interpret duration measurement reports 10 1 ms 20 ms 0 00 20 1 ms 40 ms 0 00 40 1 ms 80 ms 100 00 Dede Re Rete i oe ee Se eo Sek ee aed teak de de se ede ae ee Ke dete eke Sek dee ik eae de ake 80 1 ms 160 m
250. ide Chapter 1 presents an overview of emulation and analysis and quickly shows you how to use the emulator and analyzer Part 2 User s Guide Chapter 2 tells where to find information about plugging the emulator into a target system Chapter 3 shows you how to start and exit the HP 64700 interfaces Chapter 4 shows you how to enter commands Chapter 5 shows you how to configure the emulator Chapter 6 shows you how to use the emulator Chapter 7 shows you how to use the analyzer Chapter 8 shows you how to use the Software Performance Measurement Tool SPMT with the analyzer Chapter 9 shows you how to use the external state analyzer Chapter 10 shows you how to make coordinated measurements Chapter 11 shows you how to change X resource settings Part 3 Reference Chapter 12 describes emulator analyzer interface commands Chapter 18 lists the error messages that can occur Part 4 Concept Guide Chapter 14 contains conceptual information on various topics Part 5 Installation Guide Chapter 15 outlines the installation of the Graphical User Interface Chapter 16 shows you how to install or update emulator firmware Follow these instructions if you have ordered the HP 64782 emulator and the HP 64700 Card Cage separately Part 1 Part 2 Contents Notice 2 Printing History 3 Quick Start Guide Getting Started The Emulator Analyzer Interface Ata Glance 24 The Getting Started Tutorial 31 Step 1 Start
251. if modifications are made e Use the analyzer in one HP 64700 to arm activate the analyzers in other HP 64700 card cages or to cause emulator execution in other HP 64700 card cages to break e Use the HP 64700 s BNC connector to trigger an external instrument for example a logic analyzer or oscilloscope when the analyzer finds its trigger condition or you can allow an external instrument to arm the analyzer or break emulator execution With the Graphical User Interface You Can e Use the emulator and analyzer under an X Window System that supports OSF Motif interfaces e Enter commands using pull down or pop up menus e Enter recall and edit commands using the command line pushbuttons e Enter file names recalled commands recalled values etc using dialog boxes e Set breakpoints by pointing the mouse cursor on a line in the mnemonic memory display and clicking e Create action keys for commonly used commands or command files With the Softkey Interface You Can e Use the emulator and analyzer with a terminal or terminal emulator to execute terminal interface commands e Quickly enter commands using softkeys command recall and command editing In This Book This book documents the Graphical User Interface and the Softkey Interface when used with the HP 64798 6830x emulators and the HP 64703 4 analyzer It is organized into five parts whose chapters are described below Part 1 Quick Start Gu
252. ify individual registers Refer to the display registers command description for a list of register names Register not writable lt register gt 636 Cause This error occurs when you attempt to modify a read only register Action If this error occurs you cannot modify the contents of the register with the modify register command Request access to guarded memory lt address gt 707 Cause The address or address range specified in the command included addresses within a range mapped as guarded memory When the emulator attempts to access these during command processing the above message is printed along with the specific address or addresses accessed Action Re enter the command and specify only addresses or address ranges within emulation or target RAM or ROM Or you can remap memory so that the desired addresses are no longer mapped as guarded Restricted to real time runs 40 Cause While the emulator is restricted to real time execution you have attempted to use a command that requires a temporary break in execution to the monitor The emulator does not permit the command and issues this error message Action You must break the emulator s execution into the monitor before you can enter the command 479 Error Messages Retry limit exceeded transfer failed 412 Cause The limit for repeated attempts to send a record during a transfer operation was exceeded therefore the transfer was aborted Action
253. in mnemonic form The processor status values captured by the analyzer can be listed mnemonically or in hexadecimal or binary form 381 absolute count absolute relative depth lt DEPTH dequeue disassemble _from_line _number Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display trace Addresses captured by the analyzer are physical addresses The offset_by option subtracts the specified offset from the addresses of the executed instructions before listing the trace With an appropriate entry for offset each instruction in the listed trace will appear as it does in the assembled or compiled program listing The count parameter lists the time associated with a trace event either relative to the previous event in the trace list or as an absolute count measured from the trigger event The source parameter allows display of source program lines in the trace listing enabling you to quickly correlate the trace list with your source program Initial values are the same as specified by the command display trace mnemonic count relative offset_by 0 The parameters are as follows Lists trace information in hexadecimal format rather than mnemonic opcodes This lists the time count for each event of the trace as the total time measured from the trigger event This lists the time count for each event of the trace as the time measured relative to the previous event This defines the number of states to be uploaded by the int
254. in the usr hp64000 etc 64700tab net or 64700tab file Emul700dmn message too large Emul700dmn message too small Emul700dmn queue and or semaphores missing Emul700dmn queue failure Emul1700dmn error in file operation Emul700dmn queue full Cause The HP 64700 emulator daemon process command was too large for the host system to process Action You must press end_release_system to exit this emulation session completely then start a new session Make sure the host system is operating properly that all Softkey Interface software has been loaded correctly and the data communication switch settings on the emulator rear panel match the settings in the usr hp64000 etc 64700tab net or 64700tab file You may have to cycle power and use emul700 u logical name gt to unlock the system Emul700dmn sem op failed perhaps kernel limits too low Cause The host system could not start the emulation session there may be too many processes running on the host system Action Make sure the host system is operating properly and is not overloaded with currently executing processes Stop or remove some processes on the system Also verify that the semaphore capabilities have been installed in the UNIX kernel Then try starting the emulation session again 462 Error Messages Emul700dmn version incompatible with this product Cause The emulation session could not begin because the version of the HP 64700 emulator daemon executable on h
255. in the firmware of the emulator Pod commands bypass the graphical interface and go directly to the emulator 535 prestore primary sequencer branch real time secondary sequencer branch sequence terms sequencer sequencer branch target system target system memory trace trigger Glossary The analyzer feature that allows up to two states to be stored before normally stored states This feature is useful when you want to find the cause of a particular state For example if a variable is accessed from many different places in the program you can qualify the trace so that only accesses of that variable are stored and turn on prestore to find out where accesses of that variable originate from Occurs when the analyzer finds the primary branch state specified at a certain level and begins searching for the states specified at the primary branch s destination level Refers to continuous execution of the user program without interference from the emulator Such interference occurs when the emulator temporarily breaks into the monitor so that it can access register contents or target system memory or I O Occurs when the analyzer finds the secondary branch state specified at a certain level before it found the primary branch state and begins searching for the states specified at the secondary branch s destination level Individual levels of the sequencer The HP 64705A analyzer provides eight sequence
256. information about using dialog boxes To get help about the command line To display the help topic explaining the operation of the command line press the Help pushbutton located near the bottom right corner of the Command Line area 81 Examples Using the Command Line with the Keyboard When using the command line with the keyboard you enter commands by pressing softkeys whose labels appear at the bottom of the screen Softkeys provide for quick command entry and minimize the possibility of errors The command line also provides command completion You can type the first few characters of a command enough to uniquely identify the command and then press lt Tab gt The interface completes the command word for you Entering commands with the keyboard is easy However the interface provides other features that make entering commands even easier For example you can e Enter multiple commands on one line e Recall commands e Edit commands e Access online help information To enter multiple commands on one command line Separate the commands with semicolons More than one command may be entered in a single command line if the commands are separated by semicolons To reset the emulator and break into the monitor reset break 82 Examples lt Left arrow gt Right arrow gt lt Tab gt lt Shift gt lt Tab gt lt Insert char gt lt Back space gt lt Delet
257. ing Software Performance Measurements Address Range Memory Activity Program Activity ADEH thru State Percent Rel 57 Mean 295 Tim Percent Rel 60 State Percent Rel 99 Mean 511 Tim Percent Rel 99 Address Range Memory Activity 6007AH thru Program Activity State Percent Rel 30 Mean 156 Tim Percent Rel 28 State Percent Rel 0 Mean 0 Tim Percent Rel 0 Address Range Memory Activity 40000H thru Program Activity State Percent Rel 11 Mean 60 Tim Percent Rel 10 State Percent Rel 0 Mean 0 Tim Percent Rel 0 77 80 97 82 10 84 51 20 09 18 s90 16 72 00 94 00 00 00 1261H Abs Sdv Abs Abs Sdv Abs 603A5H Abs Sdv Abs Abs Sdv Abs 43FFFH Abs Sdv Abs Abs Sdv Abs 57 99 88 99 30 Sil 28 as 29 10s elt 26 60 77 97 82 84 51 87 09 18 88 16 72 24 94 00 00 00 264 prog data stack prog data stack prog prog Making Software Performance M easurements Graph of Memory Activity relative state percents gt 1 571 T73 kkkkxkkxkkxkxkxkxkxkkxkkkkkkxkxkxkxkxkxkkkxk 30 51 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK 11 72 R RRR Graph of Memory Activity relative time percents gt 1 60 97 KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKK KK KK KK 28 09 KKKKKKK KK KK KKK 10 94
258. ing aborted number steps completed lt STEPS TAKEN gt Cause Stepping aborted because lt CTRL gt c or software breakpoint was hit guarded memory was accessed or some other kind of error occurred Action See the error log display for any abnormal errors Correct those errors and then step again 482 Error Messages Stepping complete Cause Stepping was completed successfully Stepping failed 680 Cause Stepping has failed for some reason Action Usually this error message will occur with other error messages Refer to the descriptions of the accompanying error messages to find out more about why stepping failed Supervisor stack is set for ROM or guarded memory Cause The supervisor stack is set for inappropriate access to memory Action Reset the stack Symbols not accessible symbol database not loaded Cause You specified a trace list with values expressed using symbols defined in the source code modules such as source on and the database file has not been loaded into emulation Example display trace symbols on Target memory access failed 700 Cause This message is displayed if the emulator was unable to perform the requested operation on memory mapped to the target system Action In most cases the problem results from the emulator s inability to break to the monitor to perform the operation See message 608 Target memory access bus error 155 Cause Target memory received a bus error when atte
259. ing analyzer dump information in binary format you will need to use Timing Analyzer Interface or other interface program to capture the timing analyzer data 303 Figure 25 j i Using the External State Analyzer To specify the slave clock mode To specify the slave clock mode Choose yes for the Should emulation control the external bits configuration option Choose State for the External analyzer mode configuration option Choose Off Mixed or Demux for the Slave clock mode for external bits configuration item There are two modes of demultiplexing that can be set for the 16 channels of the external analyzer mixed clocks and true demultiplexing Choose off to turn slave clocks OFF If the slave clock is off all 16 external bits are clocked with the emulation clock Choose mixed to specify the mixed clock demultiplexing mode In this mode the lower eight external bits 0 7 are latched when the slave clock as specified by your answers to the next four questions is received The upper eight bits and the latched lower eight are then clocked into the analyzer when the emulation clock is received see the figure below 16 TRACE SIGNALS SLAVE CLOCK SLAVE LATCH MASTER CLOCK MASTER POD LATCH If no slave clock has appeared since the last master clock the data on the lower 8 bits of the pod will be latched at the same time as the upper 8 bits If 304 Using the External State Ana
260. ing assembly code This will result in optimum analyzer performance 383 status binary hex mnemonic Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display trace Lists absolute status information in binary form Lists absolute status information in hexadecimal form Lists absolute status information in mnemonic form display trace count absolute display trace absolute status binary display trace mnemonic The copy trace store trace and set commands 384 locked release system Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands end end end lt RETURN gt This command terminates the current emulation session You can end the emulation session and keep the emulator in a locked state The current emulation configuration is stored so that you can continue the emulation session on reentry to the emulator You also can release the emulation system when ending the session so that others may use the emulator Note that pressing lt CTRL gt d performs the same operation as pressing end lt RETURN gt Pressing lt CTRL gt or lt CTRL gt performs the same asend release_system lt RETURN gt When the emulation session ends control returns to the UNIX shell without releasing the emulator The parameters are as follows This option allows you to stop all active instances of an emulator analyzer interface session in one or more windows and or terminal
261. ing the keyboard 66 To choose pop up menu items 68 To place values into the entry buffer using the keyboard 68 To copy and paste to the entry buffer 68 To recall entry buffer values 71 To use the entry buffer 71 To copy and paste from the entry buffer to the command line entry area 72 To use the action keys 72 To use dialog boxes 73 To access help information 76 Using the Command Line with the Mouse 77 To turn the command line on or off 77 To enteracommand 78 Contents To edit the command line using the command line pushbuttons 79 To edit the command line using the command line pop up menu 79 To recall commands 80 To get help about the command line 81 Using the Command Line with the Keyboard 82 To enter multiple commands on one command line 82 To recall commands 83 To edit commands 83 To access online help information 84 Using Command Files 85 To start logging commands to a command file 88 To stop logging commands to a command file 88 To playback execute a command file 89 Using Pod Commands 90 To display the pod commands screen 91 To use pod commands 91 Forwarding Commands to Other HP 64700 Interfaces 92 To forward commands to the software performance analyzer 93 Configuring the Emulator Configuring the Emulator 96 Using the Configuration Interface 97 To start the configuration interface 98 To modify a configuration section 100 To apply configuration changes to the emulator 100 If apply to emul
262. interfaces xdebug xemul xperf skemul sktiming device channel dev emcom23 Or the information may be similar to em6830x m6830x running user guest myhost description M6830x emulation 512K bytes emul mem user interfaces xdebug xemul xperf skemul sktiming internet address 21 17 9 143 Examples To unlock an interface that was left locked by another user Use the emul700 U lt emul_name gt command The U option of the emul700 command may be used to unlock the emulators whose logical names are specified This command will fail if there currently is a session in progress To unlock the emulator whose logical name is em6830x emul700 U em6830x 58 Opening Other HP 64700 Interface Windows The File gt Emul700 menu lets you open additional emulator analyzer interface windows or other HP 64700 interface windows if those products have been installed for example the software performance analyzer SPA interface This section shows you how to e Open additional emulator analyzer interface windows e Open the software performance analyzer SPA interface window To open additional emulator analyzer windows To open additional Graphical User Interface windows choose File gt Emul700 Graphic Windows Emulator Analyzer Or using the command line enter emul700 lt emul_name gt To open additional conventional Softkey Interface windows choose File gt Emul700 Termin
263. ion command 397 See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands modify keyboard_to_simio modify keyboard_to_simio gt 5 modify keyboard to_simio To output of KEYBOARD TO SIMIO on MODIFY diag This command allows the keyboard to interact with your program through the simulated I O software ram When the keyboard is activated for simulated I O its normal interaction with emulation is disabled The emulation softkeys are blank and the suspend softkey is displayed on your screen Pressing suspend lt RETURN gt will deactivate keyboard simulated I O and return the keyboard to normal emulation mode For details about setting up simulated I O refer to the Simulated I O User s Guide The display simulated_io command 398 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands modify memory modify memory C modify HE memory gt EXPR FCODE J 7i iad wo EXPR NC thru 4 EXPR to lt REAL gt a Gens Ney string D e to D lt STRING gt ENT on lt RETURN gt MODIFY This command lets you modify the contents of selected memory locations You can modify the contents of individual memory locations to individual values Or you can modify a range of memory to a single value or a sequence of values
264. ion of the command file at certain points If you press lt CTRL gt c to stop execution of a command file while the wait command is being executed from the command file the lt CTRL gt c will terminate the wait command but will not terminate command file execution To do this press lt CTRL gt c again 85 Entering Commands To access online help information Use the wait measurement_complete command after changing the trace depth By doing this when you copy or display the trace after changing the trace depth the new trace states will be available Otherwise the new states won t be available Passing Parameters Command files provide a convenient method for passing parameters by using a parameter declaration line preceding the commands in the command file When the command file is called the system will prompt you for current values of the formal parameters listed Parameters are defined as Passed Parameters These are ASCII strings passed to a command file Any continuous set of ASCII characters can be passed Spaces separate the parameters Formal Parameters These are symbols preceded by an ampersand amp which are the variables of the command file The ASCII string passed passed parameter will be substituted for the formal parameter when the command file is executed The only way to pass a parameter containing a space is to enclose the parameter in double quotes or single quotes C Thus to pass the p
265. ious command has been issued memory is displayed as hexadecimal bytes 181 Using the Emulator To display memory repetitively To display memory repetitively e Choose Display Memory Repetitively Or using the command line enter display memory repetitively The memory display is constantly updated The format is specified by the last memory display command This command is ignored if the last memory display command was a mnemonic display To modify memory e Choose Modify Memory and complete the command using the command line e To modify memory at a particular address place an absolute or symbolic address in the entry buffer then choose Modify Memory at and complete the command using the command line Or using the command line enter modify memory You can modify the contents of one memory location or a range of memory locations Options allow you to modify memory in byte short word and real number formats 182 Displaying Data Values The data values display lets you view the contents of memory as data types You can display data values in the following formats e bytes e 8 bit integers e unsigned 8 bit integers e chars e words e 16 bit integers e unsigned 16 bit integers e long words e 32 bit integers e unsigned 32 bit integers This section shows you how to e Display data values e Clear the data values display and add a new item e Add item to the data
266. is forward lt interface_name gt lt command_string gt This section shows you how to e Forward commands to the software performance analyzer 92 Entering Commands To forw ard commands to the software performance analyzer To forward commands to the software performance analyzer e Enter the forward perf lt command string gt command using the Examples To send the profile command to the software performance analyzer forward perf profile 93 94 Configuring the Emulator Configuring the Emulator This chapter describes how to configure the emulator You must map memory whenever you use the emulator When you plug the emulator into a target system you must configure the emulator so that it operates correctly in the target system The configuration tasks are grouped into the following sections e Using the configuration interface e Modifying the general items and monitor setup e Reconfiguring the emulator copy of the SIM registers e Mapping memory e Setting the debug trace options e Setting Simulated I O e Verifying the emulator configuration The simulated I O feature and configuration questions are described in the Stemulated I O User s Guide The external analyzer configuration options are described in the Using the External State Analyzer chapter The interactive measurement configuration options are described in the Making Coordinated Measurements chapte
267. is a combination of numeric values symbols operators and parentheses specifying a register value For the floating point registers the value is interpreted as a decimal real number See the EXPR description This represents the name of a register Allows you to specify the values to which the selected registers will be changed modify register D2 to 41H The copy registers display registers and modify registers commands 402 Examples Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands modify SIM registers modify SIM registers The 6830x SIM is configured through the registers in the SIM register class these registers control how the 6830x uses external signal lines The emulator s hardware is configured through the registers in the EMSIM register class Normally the SIM and EMSIM registers should be programmed with the same values so they will be working together The default programming of the emulator hardware EMSIM matches the reset values of the 6830x SIM refer to the appropriate Motorola MC6830x User s Manual for specific values If desired the programming of the emulator hardware EMSIM can be transferred into the 6830x SIM with the sync_sim_registers to_6830x_from_config command This happens automatically each time a break to the monitor from emulation reset occurs This ensures that the 6830x is prepared to properly access memory when a program is downloaded to the emulator Alternatively the emulat
268. is stored If you don t enter a name configuration information is saved to a temporary file which is deleted when you exit the interface and release the emulation system When modifying a configuration using the graphical interface you can store your answers at any time Configuration information is saved in a file with the extension EA This file is the source ASCII format copy of the file The interface will create a temporary file with the extension EB which is the binary or loadable copy of the file Do not modify configurations by editing the EA files Use the configuration interface to modify and save configurations For more information on how to use dialog boxes refer to the To use dialog boxes description in the Using Menus the Entry Buffer and Action Keys section of the Entering Commands chapter 102 Configuring the Emulator To change the configuration directory context To change the configuration directory context e Choose File Directory from the pull down menu in the top level configuration interface window and use the directory selection dialog box to specify the new directory The directory context specifies the directory to which configuration files are stored and from which they are loaded For more information on how to use dialog boxes refer to the To use dialog boxes description in the Using Menus the Entry Buffer and Action Keys section of the Entering Commands c
269. isable execution breakpoints e Set a permanent breakpoint e Set a ROM breakpoint in RAM e Clear execution breakpoints e Display status of all execution breakpoints Software breakpoints should not be set cleared enabled or disabled while the emulator is running user code If any of these commands are entered while the emulator is running user code and the emulator is eecuting code in the area where the breakpoint is being modified program execution may be unreliable 164 Using the Emulator To enable execution breakpoints To enable execution breakpoints Choose Breakpoints Enable Inside the breakpoints list display press and hold the select mouse button and then choose Enable Disable Software Breakpoints from the pop up menu Or using the command line enter modify software_breakpoints enable You must enable breakpoints before you can set inactivate or clear any aa breakpoints Once you have enabled breakpoints you can enter new ones into the breakpoint table Note that if you enable breakpoints add several and then disable them they all become inactive If you reenable the breakpoints feature you must choose Breakpoints Set All or on the command line enter modify software_breakpoints set if you want to set all the existing breakpoint entries 165 Using the Emulator To disable an execution breakpoint To disable an execution breakpoint e Choose Breakpoints Enable again The Bre
270. isables analyzer operation based upon independent enable and disable terms This can be used as a simple storage qualifier Or you may use it to further qualify complex trigger specifications See the WINDOW syntax pages for details trace after 1000H trace only address range 1000H thru 1004H trace after address 1000H occurs 2 only address range 1000H thru 1004H break_on_trigger The copy trace display trace load trace load trace_spec specify trace store trace and store trace_spec commands 444 about after before occurs QUALIFIER lt TIM ES gt Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands TRIGGER TRIGGER From TRACE diagram efore a QUALIFIER occurs pam lt TIMES gt S on To output of TRIGGER TRACE diagram This parameter lets you define where the analyzer will begin tracing program information during a trace measurement A trigger is a QUALIFIER When you include the occurs option you can specify the trigger to be a specific number of occurrences of a QUALIFIER see the QUALIFIER syntax diagram The default is to trace after any state occurs once The parameters are as follows This option captures trace data leading to and following the trigger qualifier The trigger is centered in the trace listing Trace data is acquired after the trigger qualifier is found Trace data is acquired prior
271. ising falling or Both for the Edges of J K L M clock used for slave clock configuration options Four configuration options are present when you select either the mixed or demux slave clock mode They allow you to define the slave clock You can specify rising falling both or neither none edges of the J K L and M clocks When several clock edges are specified any one of the edges clocks the trace Clocks J and K are the external clock inputs of the external analyzer probe The L and M clocks are generated by the emulator Typically the L clock is the emulation clock derived by the emulator and the M clock is not used To define labels for the external analyzer signals 1 Choose yes for the Should emulation control the external bits configuration option 2 For each defined external label there can be up to 8 choose the name start bit width and polarity You can define up to eight labels for the 16 external data channels in the configuration These external analyzer labels can be used in trace commands and the data associated with these labels can be displayed in the trace list One external analyzer label xbits is defined by the default configuration and is included in the default trace list External labels can be defined with bits in the range of 0 through 15 The start bit may be in the range 0 through 15 but the width of the label must not cause the label to extend past bit 15 Thus the sum
272. ithin the interface window If you press lt CTRL gt c to stop execution of a command file while the wait command is being executed from the command file the lt CTRL gt c will terminate the wait command but will not terminate command file execution To do this press lt CTRL gt c again 89 Using Pod Commands Pod commands are Terminal Interface commands The Terminal Interface is the low level interface that resides in the firmware of the emulator A pod command used in the Graphical User Interface bypasses the interface and goes directly to the emulator Because some pod commands can cause the interface to become out of sync with the emulator or even cause the interface to terminate abnormally they must be used with care For example if you change configuration items the actual state of the emulator will no longer match the internal record the interface keeps about the state of the emulator Issuing certain communications related commands can prevent the interface from communicating with the emulator and cause abnormal termination of the interface However it is sometimes necessary to use pod commands For example you must use a pod command to execute the emulator s performance verification pv routine Performance verification is an internal self test procedure for the emulator Remember that pod commands can cause trouble for the high level interface if they are used indiscriminately This section sho
273. itness for a particular purpose Hewlett Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Hewlett Packard assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its software on equipment that is not furnished by Hewlett Packard Copyright 1996 Hewlett Packard Company This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright All rights are reserved No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett Packard Company The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice HP is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company OSF Motif and Motif are trademarks of the Open Software Foundation in the U S and other countries SunOS SPARCsystem OpenWindows and SunView are trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Limited Hewlett Packard P O Box 2197 1900 Garden of the Gods Road Colorado Springs CO 80901 2197 U S A RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND Use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 i of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 Hewlett Packard Company 3000
274. ize with local symbols e Restore a previous performance measurement if the emulation system has been exited and re entered Default Initialization Entering the performance_measurement_initialize command with no options specifies an activity measurement If a valid symbolic database has been loaded the addresses of all global procedures and static symbols will be used otherwise a default set of ranges that cover the entire processor address range will be used Initialization with User Defined Ranges You can specifically give the SPMT address ranges to use by placing the information in a file and entering the file name in the performance_measurement_initialize command 267 Making Software Performance Measurements To initialize activity performance measurements Address range files may contain program symbols procedure name or static user defined address ranges and comments An example address range file is shown below Any line which starts with a is a comment All user s labels must be preceded by a users _label 10H 1000H program_symbol A program symbol can be a procedure name or a static In the case of a pro cedure name the range of that procedure will be used users_label2 program_symboll gt program_symbol2 gt means thru The above will define a range which starts with symboll and goes thru symbol2 If both symbols are procedures then the range will be defined as the start of symboll t
275. l It requires a driver that can supply at least 4 mA at 2 volts when used as a receiver The BNC connector is configured as an open emitter structure which allows for multiple drivers to be connected It can be used for cross triggering between multiple HP 64700Bs when no other cross measurements are needed The output of the BNC connector is short circuit protected and is protected from TTL level signals when the emulator is powered down 316 Starting Stopping Multiple Emulators When HP 64700 Card Cages are connected together via the Coordinated Measurement Bus CMB you can start and stop up to 32 emulators at the same time These are called synchronous measurements This section describes how to e Enable synchronous measurements e Start synchronous measurements e Disable synchronous measurements To enable synchronous measurements Enter the specify run command You can enable the emulator s interaction with the CMB by using the specify run command When the EXECUTE signal is received the emulator will run at the current program counter address or the address specified in the specify run command Note that when the CMB is being actively controlled by another emulator the step command does not work correctly The emulator may end up running in user code NOT stepping Disable CMB interaction see To disable synchronous measurements below while stepping the processor Note that enabling CMB intera
276. label defined Cause The address trace label was somehow removed in the terminal interface using the tlb command Action End session and start again No more processes may be attached to this session Cause You can operate an emulator in four windows Each time you start the emulator in another window a new process is attached to the current session Action Do not try to use more than four windows Once you have started the emulator in four windows you have reached the maximum number of processes allowed for that emulator No symbols loaded Cause You tried to step through lines in the source file before symbols are loaded Action Load symbols and try again or use step with the source option i e step assembly language program 474 Error Messages No valid trace data Cause You tried to store trace data before a trace was completed Action Wait until valid trace data is available before attempting to store a trace Not a valid trace file load aborted Cause You tried to load a file TR that was not created by the emulation session Action Only load trace data files that were created by the emulator Not an absolute file No absolute file lt file gt No absolute file No database lt file gt Cause You tried to load a file into the emulator that is not an executable or absolute file so the host system stopped the load process Action Try your command again and make sure you specify a valid absol
277. lator Configuration Emulator Settings Restrict to Real Time Yes No Clock Source Internal External Target Memory Access Size Software Breakpoint Trap Vector E zy Reset Vectors Automatic Reset Vectors gt Yes gt No To access information about the configuration items use the online help button or press f1 to show context sensitive help on an individual item 106 CAUTION Configuring the Emulator When Restricting the Emulator to Real time Runs When Restricting the Emulator to Real time Runs If your target system circuitry is dependent on constant execution of program code you should restrict the emulator to real time runs This will help ensure that target system damage does not occur However remember you can still execute the reset break and step commands you should use caution in executing these commands The default configuration does not restrict the emulator to real time runs Therefore the emulator might make temporary breaks into the monitor to complete certain commands However you may wish to restrict runs to real time to prevent temporary breaks that might cause target system problems When runs are restricted to real time and the emulator is running the user program all commands that cause a break except reset break run and step are refused The following commands are not allowed when runs are restricted to real time and the emulator is running the user program e Dis
278. lay assembly language instructions for setting up the SIM e Choose Display Configuration Info Initialization Source Code from either the configuration interface the emulator analyzer interface pull down menu Or using the command line enter display configuration_info init_source_code This command displays the assembly language program that will initialize the processor as defined by the current EMSIM register contents Examples Hewlett Packard Emulator Analyzer hptsdzb m6830x File Display Modity Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings Help Acton ners onp eC ate SIM regierers isot FB for bar sor ber r FHG for register base pacer padi pionit et pbddr a HOVE H 830801 EH 8 dffd HOVE HOVE H STATUS NGSJOZ Runaing ia meaiter Softmere bresk 0007bcerp Biapley configuration info init_source_code conse m 132 Configuring the Emulator To check for configuration inconsistencies To check for configuration inconsistencies Choose Display Configuration Info Diagnostics from the configuration interface or the emulator interface pull down menu Or using the command line enter display configuration_info diagnostics This command e Checks for inconsistencies between the mapper and the EMSIM registers e Checks for inconsistencies between the reset mode configuration value and the EMSIM registers Compares corresponding values in the SIM and EMSIM
279. lay simulated I O polling for simulated I O must be enabled in the emulator configuration 194 Using the Emulator To use simulated I O keyboard input Examples Simulated I 0 display Status messages disabled A message tells you whether the display is open or closed You can modify the configuration to enable status messages To use simulated I O keyboard input e To begin using simulated I O input choose Settings Simulated IO Keyboard e To end simulated I O and return to using the interface use the suspend softkey For Simulated I O to work you must configure the emulator to enable polling of simulated I O The command line entry area is used for simulated input with the keyboard Therefore if the command line is turned off choosing this menu item with turn command line display back on If you are planning to use even a modest amount of simulated I O input during an emulation session it might be a good idea to open another Emulator Analyzer window to be used exclusively for simulated I O input and output 195 Using Basis Branch Analysis Basis branch analysis BBA is provided by the HP Branch Validator product This product is used to analyze the testing of your programs create more complete test suites and quantify your level of testing The HP Branch Validator records branches executed in a program and generates reports that provide information about program execution during testing
280. le will affect the appearance and behavior of the application for all users User Defined Resource Specifications User defined resources for any X application are located in the X server s RESOURCE_MANAGER property or in the user s HOME Xdefaults file Load Order Resource specifications are loaded from the following places in the following order The application defaults file For example usr lib X11 app defaults HP64_Softkey when the operating system is HP UX or usr openwin lib X11 app defaults HP64_Softkey when the operating system is SunOS The XAPPLRESDIR HP64_Softkey file The XAPPLRESDIR environment variable defines a directory containing system wide custom application defaults The server s RESOURCE_MANAGER property The xrdb command loads user defined resource specifications into the RESOURCE_MANAGER property If no RESOURCE_MANAGER property exists user defined resource settings are read from the HOME Xdefaults file 498 Concepts The file named by the XENVIRONMENT environment variable If the XENVIRONMENT variable is not set the HOME Xdefaults host file is read typically contains resource specifications for a specific remote host Resource specifications included in the command line with the xrm option When specifications with identical resource names appear in different places the latter specification overrides the former Scheme Files Several of the Graphical User Interface s X
281. lear lt address gt e To remove all existing breakpoints enter modify software_breakpoints clear When you re finished using a particular breakpoint you should clear the breakpoint table entry The original instruction is restored to memory and the breakpoint table entry is removed 169 Using the Emulator To clear an execution breakpoint Examples To clear a breakpoint using the breakpoints display pop up menu Hewlatt Packard Emulator Analyzer hpleds mGS30 File iplay Modi Execution Gneaipoints Trace Settings Help kation teya Diap SeeU Wace Ron Sip Souren Bring up the menu Sane ce lhi Make Disp Sra Prev Run Mier to Break _ _ Step Asm _ Reg amei itemtoclearthe fte osn ooo y y y o highlighted breakpoint Prusre breakpoirms enabled mainlrgdijet maim o lire J5 t pra Choose Action for Highlighted Liit Zetia Breakpolm eie zip ot Thopte Atin Tor All Ensign oie EnablestDi sable Software Brean oints Set AS Ereakpotnts Clear delete 48 Breskp onts a I STATES Wiman n meai ier To clear an existing breakpoint at get_targets modify software _ breakpoints clear update_sys get_targets To clear all existing breakpoints modify software _ breakpoints clear 170 Using the Emulator To clear all execution breakpoints To clear all execution breakpoints When displaying breakpoints position the mouse pointer within the breakpoints display
282. led setting unknown lt item gt lt setting gt 626 Cause Target condition or system failure Action Check target system and run performance verification Terminal Interface pv command Configuration not valid restoring previous configuration Configuration not valid restoring default configuration Cause The modifications you tried to make to the emulator configuration are not valid so the host system restored the previous configuration Action See the Configuring the Emulator chapter for more information about the emulator configuration items and their settings 458 Error Messages Configuration process QUIT Cause The configuration process ended because lt CTRL gt SIGQUIT signal was encountered This is an easy way to exit configuration without saving any changes Action Try starting the emulation session again If the problem persists you may need to cycle power on the emulator Connecting to lt LOGICAL NAME gt Cause This is a status message The host system is making a communication connection to the emulator whose logical name is defined in usr hp64000 etc 64700tab net or usr hp64000 etc 64700tab Continue load failed Cause The host system could not continue the previous emulation session because it could not load the continue file Action Try again If the failure continues call your HP Service Representative Continuing previous session continue file loaded Cause This is a st
283. line by specifying that the CMBT should receive trig2 and that the emulation analyzer should drive trig2 To drive the emulation analyzer trigger signal to the BNC connector Choose receive for the Should BNC drive or receive Trig1 configuration option You could also drive the emulation analyzer trigger to the BNC over the trig2 internal line by specifying that the BNC should receive trig2 and that the emulation analyzer should drive trig2 322 Making Coordinated M easurements To drive the external analyzer trigger signal to the CMB To drive the external analyzer trigger signal to the CMB Choose receive for the Should CMBT drive or receive Trig2 configuration option Choose drive for the Should External Analyzer drive or receive Trig2 configuration option To drive the external analyzer trigger signal to the BNC connector Choose receive for the Should BNC drive or receive Trig2 configuration option Choose drive for the Should External Analyzer drive or receive Trig2 configuration option To break emulator execution on signal from CMB Choose drive for the Should CMBT drive or receive Trig1 configuration option You could also break emulator execution on a trigger signal from the CMB over the trig2 internal line by specifying that the CMB should drive trig2 and that the emulator break should receive trig2 To break emulator execution on signal from BNC Choose drive for the S
284. loaded 393 emul_mem FCODE fg_mon lt FILE gt offset_by lt OFFSET gt noabort nosymbols noupdate symbols trace trace_spec user_mem Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands load Loads only those portions of the absolute file that reside in memory ranges mapped as emulation memory Specifies the address space where the file will be loaded Loads a foreground monitor This represents the absolute file to be loaded into either target system memory emulation memory X files are assumed or the trace memory TR files are assumed Specifies an offset value that is subtracted from the address before the foreground monitor file is loaded This option allows you to load a file even if part of the file is located at memory mapped as guarded or target ROM trom This option causes the file specified to be loaded without symbols This option suppresses rebuilding of the symbol data base when you load an absolute file If you load an absolute file end emulation then modify the file and relink it the symbol database will not be updated upon reentering emulation and reloading the file The default is to rebuild the database This option causes the file specified to be loaded with symbols This option allows you to load a previously generated trace file This option allows you to load a previously generated trace specification Note that the current trace specification will be mo
285. ls c delay int iJ int waste_time for i 0 i lt 256000 i for j 0 j lt 256000 j waste_time 0 end delay 437 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands SYMB The symbol tree as built by SRU might appear as follows depending on the object module format and compiler used users dove control c filename port_one static C ron procedure o ENTRY TEXTRANGE procspecial procspecial EXIT precspecial system project1 utils c filename TEX TRANGE precspecial EXIT ENTRY TEXTRANGE proespecial procspecial procspecial ENTRY procspecial EXIT procspecial system project 1 porthand c filename process_ port procedure BLOCK_1 procedure Note that SRU does not build tree nodes for variables that are dynamically allocated on the stack at run time such as i and j within the delay QO procedure SRU has no way of knowing where these variables will be at run 438 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands SYMB time and therefore cannot build a corresponding symbol tree entry with run time address Here are some examples of referencing different symbols in the above programs control c main control c port_one porthand c utils c delay The last example above only works with IEEE 695 object module format the HP object module format does not support referencing of include files that generate p
286. lude don t care numbers in expressions These are indicated by a number containing an x These numbers may be defined as binary octal decimal or hexadecimal For example 1fxxh 17x70 and 011xxx10b are valid Note that Don t care numbers are not valid for all commands This appears as a softkey label to enable you to return to the EXPR key The NORMAL label can be accessed whenever defining an expression but 386 lt NUM BER gt lt OP gt SYM B end start lt UNARY gt Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands EXPR is only valid when C appears on the status line which indicates a valid expression has been defined This can be an integer in any base binary octal decimal or hexadecimal or can be a string of characters enclosed with quotation marks This represents an algebraic or logical operand and may be any of the following in order of precedence mod modulo multiplication division logical AND addition s subtraction logical OR gt This allows you to define symbolic information for an address range of addresses or a file See the SYMB syntax pages and the Symbolic Retrieval Utilities User s Guide for more information on symbols This displays the last location where the symbol information may be located For example if a particular symbol is associated with a range of addresses end will represent the last address in that range This displays first
287. ly repeat the last trace choose Trace Repetitively Or using the command line enter trace again The trace again command is most useful when you want to repeat a measurement with the same trace specification It saves you the trouble of reentering the complete trace command specification The repetitively choice continually repeats the last trace command Successive traces begin as soon as the results from the just completed trace are displayed Also this command is useful when you load a trace specification from a file See To load a trace specification in this chapter To position the trace display on screen Use the scroll bar or the lt Up arrow gt lt Down arrow gt lt PREV gt lt NEXT gt lt CTRL gt f and lt CTRL gt keys The trace display command can display more states than can appear on the screen at one time However you can reposition the display on the screen with the keys described below The lt Up arrow gt and lt Down arrow gt or roll up and roll down keys move the display up or down on the screen one line at a time The lt PREV gt and lt NEXT gt or page up and page down keys allow you to move the display up or down a page at a time The lt CTRL gt f and lt CTRL g keys allow you to move the display left or right respectively These keys are used when the width of the address or mnemonic absolute columns is increased so that not all the trace display data can be displayed across the
288. lyzer To specify the slave clock mode more than one slave clock has appeared since the last master clock only the first slave data will be available to the analyzer see the figure below CLOCK Figure 26 cock 4 Lf L_J LSJ CLOCK DATA LATCHED ON FOLLOWING SLAVE FIRST SLAVE CLOCK CLOCKS IGNORED AFTER LAST MASTER CLOCK Choose demux to specify the true demultiplexing mode In this mode only the lower eight external channels 0 7 are used The slave clock as specified by your answers to the next four questions latches these bits and the emulation clock samples the same channels again The latched bits show up as bits 0 7 in the trace data and the second sample shows up as bits 8 15 see the figure below 305 Figure 27 Using the External State Analyzer To specify the slave clock mode 8 TRACE SIGNALS SLAVE CLOCK SLAVE LATCH MASTER POD LATCH MASTER CLOCK EXAMPLE TIMING AD AD ADDRESS DATA SLAVE CLOCK MASTER CLOCK aso If no slave clock has appeared since the last master clock the data on the lower 8 bits of the pod will be the same as the upper 8 bits If more than one slave clock has appeared since the last master clock only the first slave data will be available to the analyzer 306 Using the External State Analyzer To define labels for the external analyzer signals 4 If the mixed or true demultiplexing slave clock modes are selected choose None r
289. mand before you can add traces to a performance measurement When you restore a performance measurement make sure your current trace command is identical to the command used with the restored measurement The restore option checks the emulator software version and will only work if the perf out files you are restoring were made with the same software version as is presently running in the emulator If you ran tests using a former software version and saved perf out files then updated your software to a new version number you will not be able to restore old perf out measurement files 285 Examples Making Software Performance M easurements To interpret duration measurement reports To initialize the duration measurement performance_measurement_initialize duration To interpret duration measurement reports View the performance measurement report Duration measurements provide a best case worst case characterization of code execution time These measurements record execution times that fall within a set of specified time ranges The information you will see in duration measurement reports is described below Number of Intervals Number of from address and to address pairs after prefetch correction Maximum Time The greatest amount of time between the from address to the to address Minimum Time The shortest amount of time between the from address to the to address Average Time Average time between
290. maphore missing 10328 Cause Lock semaphore missing Action Verify existence and permissions of usr hp64000 directory Cycle emulator power and use emul700 u lt logical name gt Clock CLKO drive must be normal 159 Cause Bits 15 or 14 have been set to nonzero Action Reset the bits CMB execute emulation trace started 1305 Cause This status message informs you that an emulation trace measurement has started as a result of a CMB execute signal as specified by the specify trace command 457 Error Messages CMB execute run started 693 Cause This status message is displayed when you are making coordinated measurements The CMB EXECUTE pulse has been received the emulation processor started running at the address specified by the specify run command Action None information only CMB execute break 623 Cause This message occurs when coordinated measurements are enabled and an EXECUTE pulse causes the emulator to run the emulator must break before running Action This is a status message no action is required CMB trigger break 617 Cause This status message will be displayed if you have configured the emulator to break on a CMB trigger signal and the CMB trigger line is activated during a program run The emulator is broken to the monitor Configuration aborted 624 Cause Occurs when a lt CTRL gt c is entered while emulator configuration items are being set Configuration fai
291. mb_execute command executes which causes an EXECUTE signal on the Coordinated Measurement Bus The analyzer will trace any state by default The parameters are as follows This option repeats the previous trace measurement It also begins a trace measurement with a newly loaded trace specification Using trace without the again parameter will start a trace with the default specification rather than the loaded specification This causes the analyzer to capture any type of information This option allows you to specify the external trigger as a trace qualifier for coordinating measurements between multiple HP 64700s or an HP 64700 and another instrument Before arm_trig2 can appear as an option you must modify the emulation configuration interactive measurement specification When doing this you must specify that either BNC or CMBT drive trig2 and that the analyzer receive trig2 See the chapter on Making Coordinated Measurements for more information This stops target system program execution when the trigger is found The emulator begins execution in the emulation monitor When using this option the on_halt option cannot be included in the command This recalls the last trace command that was executed When using this option the analyzer will continue to capture states until the emulation processor halts or until a stop_trace command is executed When this option is used the break_on_trigger repetitively and TRIGGER options
292. ments To interpret activity measurement reports Memory Activity State Percent Rel 3 84 Abs Mean 16 25 Sdv Tim Percent Rel 3 86 Abs Program Activity State Percent Rel 3 70 Abs Mean 16 35 Sdv Tim Percent Rel 3 73 Abs combsort Address Range 124EH thru 1444H Memory Activity State Percent Rel 1 06 Abs Mean 4 50 Sdv Tim Percent Rel 1 06 Abs Program Activity State Percent Rel 1 90 Abs Mean 8 40 Sdv Tim Percent Rel 1 80 Abs do_sort Address Range 144CH thru 14EAH Memory Activity State Percent Rel 0 47 Abs Mean 2 00 Sdv Tim Percent Rel 0 49 Abs Program Activity State Percent Rel 0 70 Abs Mean 3 10 Sdv Tim Percent Rel 0 69 Abs gen_ascii_data Address Range 1112H thru 1246H Memory Activity State Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 276 Making Software Performance Measurements To interpret activity measurement reports Mean 0 00 Sdv 0 00 Tim Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Program Activity State Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Mean 0 00 Sdv 0 00 Tim Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 get_targets Address Range 165EH thru 16E6H Memory Activity State Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Mean 0 00 Sdv 0 00 Tim Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Program Activity State Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Mean 0 00 Sdv 0 00 Tim Percent Rel 0 00 Ab
293. message 608 Unable to read registers in class lt class gt 631 Cause The emulator was unable to read the registers you requested Action To resolve this you must look at the other status messages displayed Most likely the emulator was unable to break to the monitor to perform the register read See message 608 Unable to redefine label used by emulation analyzer lt label gt 1108 Cause This error occurs when you attempt to redefine an emulation trace label which is currently used as a qualifier in the emulation trace specification Action You stop the trace or must change the trace command before you can redefine the label Unable to redefine label used by external state analyzer lt label gt 1109 Cause This error occurs when you attempt to redefine an external trace label which is currently used as a qualifier in the external state trace specification Action You stop the trace or must change the trace command before you can redefine the label Unable to redefine label used by external timing analyzer lt label gt 1110 Cause This error occurs when you attempt to redefine an emulation or external trace label which is currently being used as a qualifier in the external timing trace specification Action Remove the label from the external timing analyzer specifications and then redefine the label 487 Error Messages Unable to reload old memory map hardware state unknown 726 Cause Syst
294. mine why the processor is stopped If reset by the emulation controller use the break command to break to the monitor If reset by the emulation system release that reset If halted try reset and break to get to the monitor If there is a bus grant wait for the requesting device to release the bus before retrying the command If there is no clock input perhaps your target system is faulty It s also possible that you have configured the emulator to restrict to real time runs which will prohibit temporary breaks to the monitor Unable to configure break on software breakpoints 651 Cause The emulator controller cannot enable breakpoints possibly because the emulator is in an unknown state or because of a hardware failure Action Initialize the emulator or cycle power then re enter the command If the same failure occurs call your HP sales and service office 485 Error Messages Unable to configure break on write to ROM 650 Cause The emulator controller is unable to configure for breaks on writes to ROM possibly because the emulator was left in an unknown state or because of a hardware failure Action Initialize the emulator or cycle power Then re enter the command If the same failure occurs call your HP sales and service office Unable to delete label used by emulation analyzer lt label gt 1105 Cause This error occurs when you attempt to delete an emulation trace label which is currently being used as a
295. mmand line enter trace on_halt The above commands cause the analyzer to continuously fill the trace buffer until you issue a Trace Stop or stop_trace command Sometimes you may have a program failure that can t be attributed to a specific trigger condition For example the emulator may access guarded memory and break to the monitor You want to trace the events leading up to the guarded memory access but you don t know what to specify for a trigger Use the above command The analyzer will capture and record states until the break occurs The trace list will display the last processor states leading up to the break condition Note that the trace until stop command may not capture the desired information when you are using a foreground monitor unless the code that causes the break also causes the processor to halt because the analyzer will continue to capture foreground monitor states after the break When using a foreground monitor you can use the command line to enter a trace command that stores only states outside the range of the foreground monitor program for example trace on_halt only not range lt mon_start_addr gt thru lt mon_end_addr gt on_halt To capture a continuous stream of program execution no matter how large your program The following example can be performed in emulation systems using the emulation bus analyzer with deep memory Cit cannot be done with the 1K analyzer It shows you how to capture all
296. mpting to access the target memory Action Change the processor chip select configuration the emulation DTACK configuration or target system to supply DTACK Timeout receiver failed to respond 415 Cause Communication link or transfer protocol incorrect Action Check link and transfer options 483 Error Messages Timeout in emul700dmn communication Cause The host system could not start the emulation session because the HP 64700 emulator process ran out of time before the emulator could start Action You must press end_release_system to exit this emulation session completely then start a new session Make sure the host system is operating properly that all Softkey Interface software has been loaded correctly and the data communication switch settings on the emulator rear panel match the settings in the usr hp64000 etc 64700tab net or 64700tab file Trace error during CMB execute 692 Cause System failure Action Run performance verification Terminal Interface pv command Trace file not found Cause You tried to load trace data file that does not exist Action Find the correct name and path of the trace data file and try again Transfer failed to start 413 Cause Communication link or transfer protocol incorrect Action Check link and transfer options trig break 618 Cause This status message will be displayed if you use the break_on_trigger syntax of the trace command and the analyzer has
297. multiple Graphical User Interface windows open a copy and paste action in any window causes the text to appear in all entry buffers in all windows That is because although there are a number of entry buffers being displayed there is actually only one entry buffer and itis common to all windows That means you can copy a symbol or an address from one window and then use it in another window On a memory display or trace display a symbol may not be completely displayed because there are too many characters to fit into the width limit for a particular column of the display To make a symbol usable for copy and paste you can scroll the screen left or right to display all or at least more of the characters from the symbol The interface displays absolute addresses as hex values Text pasted into the entry buffer replaces that which is currently there You cannot use paste to append text to existing text already in the entry buffer See To copy and paste from the entry buffer to the command line entry area for information about pasting the contents of the entry buffer into the command line entry area 69 Entering Commands To copy and paste to the entry buffer Example To paste the symbol num_checks into the entry buffer from the interface display area position the mouse pointer over the symbol and then click the paste mouse button Hewlett Packard Emutator Analyzer hptsdzb m6830x File Display Modity Execution Breakp
298. n r form feed f backslash single quote V bit pattern ooo where ooo is an octal number This option lets you specify a range of memory locations to be modified This lets you specify values to which the selected memory locations will be changed Modify memory locations as 32 bit values A comma is used as a delimiter between values when modifying multiple memory addresses modify memory datal bytes to OE3H O1H O8H modify memory datal thru DATA100 to OFFFFH modify memory 0675H real to 1 303 modify memory temp real long to 0 5532E 8 modify memory buffer string to Test n 0 The copy memory display memory and store memory commands 401 EXPR lt REGISTER gt to Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands modify register modify register C modify Di register ae Ba lt CLASS gt 4 to Nn EXPR To lt RETURN gt on MODIFY diagram This command allows you to modify the contents of the emulation processor internal registers The entry you specify for lt REGISTER gt determines which register is modified Individual fields of control registers may be modified Register modification cannot be performed during real time operation of the emulation processor A break command or condition must occur before you can modify the registers The parameters are as follows An expression
299. n full of information you will have to press the space bar to see the next screen full or the lt RETURN3 gt key to see the next line just as you do with the UNIX more command After all the information on the particular topic has been displayed or after you press q to quit scrolling through information you are prompted to press lt RETURN gt to return to the command line 84 Using Command Files You can execute a series of commands that have been stored in a command file You can create command files by logging commands while using the interface or by using an editor on your host computer Once you create a command file you can execute the file in the emulation environment by typing the name of the file on the command line and pressing lt RETURN gt Command files execute until an end of file is found or until a syntax error occurs You can stop a command file by pressing lt CTRL gt c or the lt Break gt key This section shows you how to e Start logging commands to a command file e Stop logging commands to a command file e Playback execute a command file Nesting Command Files You can nest a maximum of eight levels of command files Nesting command files means one command file calls another Comments in Command Files Text that follows a pound sign up to the end of the line is interpreted as a comment Using the wait Command When editing command files you can insert wait commands to pause execut
300. n in the address range Program activity includes opcode fetches and the cycles that result from the execution of those instructions reads and writes to memory stack pushes etc Relative With respect to activity in all ranges defined in the performance measurement Absolute With respect to all activity not just activity in those ranges defined in the performance measurement Mean Average number of states in the range per trace The following equation is used to calculate the mean states in ra mean ange total states 271 mean Ssumq std dev Making Software Performance M easurements To interpret activity measurement reports Standard Deviation Deviation from the mean of state count The following equation is used to calculate standard deviation 1 N 2 N I Ssumq N mean i 1 Where Number of traces in the measurement Average number of states in the range per trace Sum of squares of states in the range per trace Symbols Within Range Names of other symbols that identify addresses or ranges of addresses within the range of this symbol Additional Symbols for Address Names of other symbols that also identify this address Note that some compilers emit more than one symbol for certain addresses For example a compiler may emit interrupt_sim and _interrupt_sim for the first address in a routine named interrupt_sim The analyzer will show the first symbol it finds to represent a range o
301. n use lt label gt 1301 Cause This error occurs when you attempt to select the external analyzer s independent state mode while an external trace label is currently used as a qualifier in the emulation analyzer trace specification Action Remove any external trace label qualifiers from emulation trace specifications before selecting the external analyzer s independent state mode Failed to disable step mode 684 Cause System failure Action Run performance verification Terminal Interface pv command Fatal error from function lt ADDRESS OF FUNCTION gt Cause This is an unexpected fatal system error Action Cycle power on the emulator and start again If this is a persistent problem call your HP 64000 representative FATAL SYSTEM SOFTWARE ERROR 204 205 208 Cause The system has encountered an error from which it cannot recover Action Write down the sequence of commands which caused the error Cycle power on the emulator and re enter the commands If the error repeats call your local HP Sales and Service office for assistance File could not be opened Cause You tried to store or load trace data to a file with incorrect permission Or the analyzer could not find the file you specified or else there were already too many files open when you entered your command Action Check the directory and file for correct read and write permission Specify a file that is accessible to the analyzer Close the other files
302. named perf out in the current working directory The file named perf out is overwritten each time this command is executed Current measurement data existing in the emulation system is not altered by this command Examples performance_measurement_end See Also The performance_measurement_initialize and performance_measurement_run commands Refer to the Making Software Performance Measurements chapter for examples of performance measurement specification and use 405 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands performance_measurement initialize performance_measurement_initialize performance_measurement_initiclize lt RETURN gt a lt FILE gt a na activity duration restore A local_symbols_in J E _global_symbols This command sets up performance measurements The emulation system will verify whether a symbolic database has been loaded If a symbolic database has been loaded the performance measurement is set up with the addresses of all global procedures and static symbols If a valid database has not been loaded the system will default to a predetermined set of addresses which covers the entire emulation processor address range The measurement will default to activity mode Default values will vary depending on the type of operation selected and whether symbols have been loaded 406 activit
303. nconsistencies found in the emulator configuration This section shows you how to e Display information about chip selects e Display information about bus interface ports e Display information about the memory map e Display information about the reset mode configuration e Display assembly language instructions for setting up the SIM e Check for configuration inconsistencies To display information about chip selects Choose Display Configuration Info gt Chip Selects SIM or Display Configuration Info Chip Selects Emulator SIM from either the configuration interface the emulator analyzer interface pull down menu Or using the command line enter display configuration_info sim_chip_selects or display configuration_info emsim_chip_selects These commands let you display chip select information from the sim processor register set or the emsim emulator register set The resulting display shows how the chip select is assigned the base address the block size and other information from the option register 125 Examples Configuring the Emulator To display information about chip selects To display information about chip selects from the sim processor register set choose Display gt Configuration Info Chip Selects SIM from either the configuration interface the emulator analyzer interface pull down menu Hewlett Packard Emutator Analyzer hpisdzb m6830x File Display Modify Executi
304. nd definition Finally an empty action means to repeat the previous operation whether it came from a pull down a dialog a pop up or another action key Examples To set up custom action keys when the graphical interface is used with 6830x emulators modify the m6830x actionKeysSub keyDefs resource m6830x actionKeysSub keyDefs Make cd users project2 6830x make in_browser Load Pgm load configuration config EA load program2 Run Pgm run from reset Trace after trace after display trace Step Source set source on display memory mnemonic step source Again wee Refer to the previous To modify Graphical User Interface resources section for more detailed information on modifying resources 336 Setting X Resources To setinitial recall buffer values To set initial recall buffer values e Modify the entries resource for the particular recall buffer There are six pop up recall buffers present in the Graphical User Interface The resources for these pop up recall buffers are listed in the following table The window manager resource transientDecoration controls the borders around dialog box windows The most natural setting for this resource is title Popup Recall Buffer Resources Recall Popup Resources Description File gt Context Directory dirSelect textColumns dirSelect listVisibleltemCount dirSelectSub entries Fil
305. nd line position the mouse pointer within the Command Line entry area press and hold the select mouse button until the Command Line pop up menu appears choose Clear Entire Line from the menu To clear the command line from the cursor position to the end of the line position the mouse pointer at the place where you want the clear to end to start press and hold the select mouse button until the 79 Entering Commands To recall commands Command Line pop up menu appears choose Clear to End of Line from the menu To position the cursor and insert characters at the cursor location position the mouse pointer in a non text area of the command line entry area press and hold the select mouse button to display the Command Line pop up menu choose Position Cursor Insert Mode from the menu type the characters to be inserted To replace characters at the current cursor location position the mouse pointer in a non text area of the command line entry area press and hold the select mouse button to display the Command Line pop up menu choose Position Cursor Replace Mode from the menu type the characters to be inserted To position the cursor and replace characters at the cursor location position the mouse pointer in a non text area of the command line entry area press and hold the select mouse button to display the Command Line pop up menu choose Position Cursor Replace Mode from the menu type the characters to be inserted When
306. nd of the specified address range If an error occurs in writing to memory to guarded memory or target memory with no monitor the modification is aborted at the address where the error occurred For integer memory modifications the default is to the current display memory mode if one is in effect Otherwise the default is to byte For real memory modifications the default is to the current display memory mode if one is in effect Otherwise the default is word The parameters are as follows Modify memory in byte values An expression is a combination of numeric values symbols operators and parentheses specifying a memory address See the EXPR syntax diagram The function code used to define the address space being referenced See the syntax diagram for FCODE to see a list of the function codes available and for an explanation of those codes Modify memory values as 32 bit long word values or 64 bit real values when preceded by real Modify memory as real number values This prompts you to enter a real number as the value Modify memory values as 32 bit real numbers Modify memory values as 16 bit values Modify memory values to the ASCII character string given by lt STRING gt Quoted ASCII string including special characters as follows null 0 newline n horizontal tab t 400 thru to words Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands modify memory backspace b carriage retur
307. nds RANGE This indicates a range of addresses to be specified EXPR thru EXPR The value following this softkey is searched for on the lines that monitor other emulation processor signals This indicates that the following address expression is the upper address in a range See the trace command examples The trace command and the QUALIFIER syntax description 414 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands reset reset This command suspends target system operation and re establishes initial emulator operating parameters such as reloading control registers The reset signal is latched when the reset command is executed and released by either the run or break command See Also The break and run commands 415 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands run from run lt RETURN gt M FCODE L transter_address until EXPR Kel FCODE U This command causes the emulator to execute a program If the processor is in a reset state run will cause the reset to be released If the emulator is configured to run directly into user code out of reset the monitor will not be entered and part of your debug environment may be temporarily disabled A subsequent break into the monitor will restore it See the Enter monitor from reset question in the configuration menu for more information If the from parameter and an
308. nds in each type of emulator analyzer interface The tasks associated with entering commands are grouped into the following sections e Using menus the entry buffer and action keys e Using the command line with the mouse sing command files U U e Using the command line with the keyboard U U sing pod commands e Forwarding commands to other HP 64700 interfaces 64 Using Menus the Entry Buffer and Action Keys This section describes the tasks you perform when using the Graphical User Interface to enter commands This section describes how to e Choose a pull down menu item using the mouse e Choose a pull down menu item using the keyboard e Use the pop up menus e Use the entry buffer e Copy and paste to the entry buffer e Use action keys e Use dialog boxes Access help information To choose a pull down menu item using the mouse method 1 Position the mouse pointer over the name of the menu on the menu bar Press and hold the command select mouse button to display the menu While continuing to hold down the mouse button move the mouse pointer to the desired menu item If the menu item has a cascade menu identified by an arrow on the right edge of the menu button then continue to hold the mouse button down and move the mouse pointer toward the arrow on the right edge of the menu The cascade menu will display Repeat this step for the cascade menu until you find the desi
309. ned in the Installation chapter e The emulator is operating out of circuit that is not plugged into a target system The Demonstration Program The demonstration program used in this chapter is a simple environmental control system The program controls the temperature and humidity of a room requiring accurate environmental control 31 Getting Started Step 1 Start the demo Step 1 Start the demo A demo program and its associated files are provided with the Graphical User Interface in the directory hp64798 Change to the demo directory S ed usr hp64000 demo debug_env hp 64798 Refer to the README file for more information on the demo program Check that usr hp64000 bin and are in your PATH environment variable To see the value of PATH S echo SPATH If the Graphical User Interface software is installed on a different type of computer than the computer you are using edit the platformScheme resource setting in the Xdefaults emul file For example if the Graphical User Interface will be run on a HP 9000 computer and displayed on a Sun SPARCsystem computer change the platform scheme to SunOS Start the emulator analyzer demo Startemul em6830x This script starts the emulator analyzer interface with a customized set of action keys loads a configuration file for the demo program and then loads the demo program The lt logical_emul_name gt in the command above is the logical emulator n
310. nes in dynamically relocated programs Returns to display associated with the previous mnemonic memory display command Formats memory values in the listing as real numbers NaN in the display list means Not a Number Updates the memory listing display continuously You should only use this to monitor memory while running user code since it is very CPU intensive To allow updates to the current memory display whenever memory is modified a file is loaded software breakpoint is set etc use the set update command Formats the memory list as 32 bit real numbers This option lets you specify a range of memory locations to be displayed Use the lt Up arrow gt lt Down arrow gt lt NEXT gt and lt PREV gt keys to view additional memory locations Displays the absolute or blocked memory listing as 16 bit word values A comma after memory in the command line appends the current display memory command to the preceding display memory command The data specified in both commands is displayed The data will be formatted as specified in the current command The comma is also a delimiter between values when specifying multiple addresses 376 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display memory Examples You can display memory in real number and mnemonic formats display memory 2000h thru 202fh 2100h real long display memory 400h mnemonic set symbols on set source on display memory main mnemonic See Also The copy memor
311. nexpected message from the HP 64700 emulator process command Action You must press end_release_system to exit this emulation session completely then start a new session Make sure the host system is operating properly that all Softkey Interface software has been loaded correctly and the data communication switch settings on the emulator rear panel match the settings in the usr hp64000 etc 64700tab net or 64700tab file Unexpected software breakpoint 620 Cause If you have enabled software breakpoints this message is displayed if a software breakpoint instruction is encountered in your program that was not inserted by a modify software_breakpoints set command and is therefore not in the breakpoint table Action Remove the breakpoint instructions in your code before assembly and link and use the modify software_breakpoints set command to reinsert them after the program is loaded into memory Unexpected step break 621 Cause System failure Action Run performance verification Terminal Interface pv command Unknown expression type Cause While entering your command you included an unknown expression type Action See the EXPR command syntax for more information about expressions Then try entering your command again with a known expression type Unload trace data failed Cause Unexpected error occurred while waiting for a trace to be completed Action End and release the session and then try again 489 Er
312. nic 241 Examples Using the Emulation Analyzer To disassemble the trace list e To control where trace list disassembly starts enter display trace disassemble_from_line_number lt LINE gt lt LINE gt is a line number corresponding to a state in the trace list Disassembly of instruction data means that you will see instructions as they would appear in an assembly language program listing That is instruction mnemonics and operands are shown instead of hexadecimal instruction data The analyzer interface normally disassembles instruction data in the trace list However if you specify absolute data display that mode remains in effect until you select the mnemonic option When you identify a particular trace list line where disassembly is to begin be sure to specify a line number that corresponds to an analyzer state with an opcode fetch The analyzer interface disassembles and displays the trace starting with the state you specify To disassemble instruction data in the trace list starting at line 40 Place the cursor on line 40 press the select mouse button and click on Disassemble From in the pop up menu Or using the command line enter display trace disassemble_from_line_number 40 242 Using the Emulation Analyzer To specify trace disassembly options To specify trace disassembly options Selection of disassembly options is not supported in pull downs of the Graphical User Int
313. nly TTL voltage 315 CMB 9 pin port NOT for RS 232C 313 protect emulator against static discharge 52 real time dependent target system circuitry 107 changing column width 250 directory context in config window 103 directory context in emulator analyzer window 153 symbol context 154 characterization of memory 112 class name X applications 496 client X 328 clocks See also slave clocks CMB coordinated measurement bus 310 EXECUTE line 312 355 HP 64700 connection 313 314 READY line 31 signals 311 TRIGGER line 311 cmb_execute command 318 355 color scheme 330 334 500 columns in main display area 331 command buttons 26 command files 395 other things to know about 87 passing parameters 86 command line 25 Command Recall dialog box 26 Command Recall dialog box operation 80 copy and paste to from entry buffer 72 editing entry area with popup menu 79 editing entry area with pushbuttons 79 entering commands 78 entry area 25 executing commands 78 help 81 keyboard use of 82 on line help 84 86 87 recalling commands with dialog box 80 turning on or off 77 331 command paste mouse button 27 Command Recall dialog box operation 73 command select mouse button 27 commands 82 combining on a single command line 82 completion 82 editing in command line entry area 79 entering in command line 78 executing in command line 78 537 Index keyboard entry 82 line erase 83 ma
314. nnels With the Emulator You Can e Plug into 6830x target systems e Download programs into emulation memory or target system RAM e Display or modify the contents of processor registers and memory resources e Run programs set up software breakpoints step through programs and reset the emulation processor For information about your emulator clock speed refer to the 6830x Installation Service Terminal Interface User s Guide With the Analyzer You Can e Trigger the analyzer when a particular bus cycle state is captured States are stored relative to the trigger state e Qualify which states get stored in the trace e Prestore certain states that occur before each normal store state e Trigger the analyzer after a sequence of up to 8 events have occurred e Capture data on signals of interest in the target system with the external analyzer e Cause emulator execution to break when the analyzer finds its trigger condition With the HP 64700 Card Cage You Can Use the RS 422 capability of the serial port and an RS 422 interface card on the host computer HP 98659 for the HP 9000 Series 300 to provide upload download rates of up to 230 4K baud e Easily access and use the emulator over a Local Area Network by connecting it to the LAN e Easily upgrade HP 64700 firmware by downloading to flash memory With Multiple HP 64700s You Can e Start and stop up to 16 emulators at the same time up to 32
315. not taken TAKEN means the dequeuer was not able to determine whether or not the branch was taken If you read down the trace list and see that the branch was taken use the disassemble_from_line_number command to restart disassembly at the trace list line number of the branch destination Dequeue the trace list Choose Trace Display Options and in the dialog box select Dequeue Enable Then click the OK or Apply pushbutton Or using the command line enter display trace dequeue on Display the trace list without dequeueing display trace dequeue off 245 Using the Emulation Analyzer To display the trace without disassembly To display the trace without disassembly Choose Trace Display Options and in the dialog box select Data Format Absolute You can select Hex Binary or Mnemonic format for display of status information Then click the OK or Apply pushbutton Or using the command line enter commands as follows e To display the trace list without instruction disassembly and with status information in binary format enter display trace absolute status binary e To display the trace list without instruction disassembly and with status information in hexadecimal format enter display trace absolute status hex e To display the trace list without instruction disassembly and with status information in mnemonic format enter display trace absolute status mnemonic For some measurements it m
316. o selectively toggle analyzer operation When enabled the analyzer will recognize sequence terms trigger terms and will store states When disabled the analyzer is effectively off and only looks for a particular enable term You specify windowing by selecting an enable qualifier term the analyzer will trigger or store all states after this term is satisfied If the disable term occurs after the analyzer is enabled the analyzer will then stop storing states and will not recognize trigger or sequence terms You may specify only one enable term and one disable term The analyzer defaults to recognizing all states If you specify enable you must supply a qualifier term If you then specify disable you must specify a qualifier term The parameters are as follows disable Allows you to specify the term which will stop the analyzer from recognizing states once the enable term has been found enable Allows you to specify the term which will enable the analyzer to begin monitoring states QUALIFIER Specifies the actual address data status value or range of values that cause the analyzer to enable or disable recognition of states Note that the enable qualifier can be different from the disable qualifier Refer to the QUALIFIER syntax pages for further details on analyzer qualifier specification Examples trace enable _rand disable Oecch See Also The trace command and the SEQUENCING and QUALIFIER syntax descriptions 449
317. o sequencing terms If you select the sequencer using the find_sequence parameter you must specify at least one qualifying sequence term The parameters are as follows Specifies that you want to use the analysis sequencer You must enter at least one qualifier Specifies the address data status or executed address value or value range that will satisfy this sequence term if looking for a sequence find_sequence or will restart at the beginning of the sequence restart See the QUALIFIER syntax pages for further information 418 occurs lt TIM ES gt then restart Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands SEQUENCING Selects the number of times a particular qualifier must be found before the analyzer proceeds to the next sequence term or the trigger term This option is not available when trace windowing is in use See the WINDOW syntax pages Prompts you for the number of times a qualifier must be found Allows you to add multiple sequence terms each with its own qualifier and occurrence count Selects global restart If the analyzer finds the restart qualifier while searching for a sequence term the sequencer is reset and searching begins for the first sequence term trace find_sequence Caller_3 then Write_Num restart anly anly c line 57 trigger after Results 0c4h The trace command and the QUALIFIER and WINDOW syntax descriptions 419 Emulator Analyzer Interface Comman
318. o that others may use it This section describes how to e Close an interface window e Exit a debug emulation session To close an interface window In the interface window you wish to close choose File Exit Window Or using the command line enter end All other interface windows remain open and the emulation session continues unless the window closed is the only one open for the emulation session In that case closing the window ends the emulation session but locks the emulator so that other users cannot access it 61 Starting and Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces To exit a debug emulation session To exit a debug emulation session To exit the interface save your configuration to a temporary file and lock the emulator so that it cannot be accessed by other users choose File gt Exit Locked Or using the command line enter end locked To exit the interface and release the emulator for access by other users choose File gt Exit Released Or using the command line enter end release_system If you exit the interface locked the interface saves the current configuration to a temporary file and locks the emulator to prevent other users from accessing it When you again start the interface with the emul700 command the temporary file is reloaded and therefore you return to the configuration you were using when you quit the interface locked Also saved when you exit the interface locked are the cont
319. of emulation memory or tag memory that you are trying to map Internal memory must not be mapped to 0 or 1000H Cause Register EMSIM EBAR set the internal memory to 0H or 1000H Action Set the internal memory to another number Target may be asserting INTR 7 156 Cause Target may be asserting interrupt 7 signals while the emulator is trying to break to the background monitor Action Have the target negate interrupt level 7 or configure the emulator to disable target interrupts Invalid analysis subsystem product address lt address gt 902 Cause This error occurs when the HP 64700 system controller determines that the analysis firmware ROM is invalid Action This message is not likely to occur unless you have upgraded the ROMs in your emulator Be sure that the correct ROMs are installed in the analyzer board 469 Error Messages Invalid answer in lt CONFIGURATION FILENAME gt ignored Cause You must provide acceptable responses to questions in the configuration file file EA The emulator ignored the incorrect response Incorrect responses may appear in configuration files when you have saved the configuration to a file edited it later and tried reloading it into the emulator This may also occur if you have loaded a configuration file that you created while using another emulator and the response differs from the response required for this emulator Action Examine your configuration file to check for inapp
320. of the execution of your target program You may wish to capture target program execution for storage for future reference and or for comparison with execution after making program modifications The execution of a typical target program will require more memory space than is available in the trace memory of an analyzer This example shows you how to capture all of your target program execution while excluding unwanted execution of the emulation monitor 225 Using the Emulation Analyzer To capture a continuous stream of program execution no matter how large your program Choose Trace Display Options and in the dialog box enter 0 or the total depth of your deep analyzer trace memory in the entry field beside Unload Depth Then click OK or Apply This sets unload depth to maximum For this measurement the analyzer will drive trig1 and the emulator will receive trig1 from the trigger bus inside the card cage The trigl signal is used to cause the emulator to break to its monitor program shortly before the trace memory is filled This use of trig is not supported in workstation interface commands Therefore terminal interface commands accessible through the pod command feature must be used Enter the following commands a Choose Settings gt Pod Command Keyboard b Enter tgout trig c lt states before end of memory gt trigger output trig before trace complete c Enter bc e trig break conditions enabled on trig1
321. of the start bit number plus the width must not exceed 16 The polarity configuration option allows you to specify positive or negative logic for the external bits In other words positive means high 1 low 0 Negative means low 1 high 0 Once external labels are defined they may be used in trace commands to qualify events if the emulation controls the external analyzer Also you can modify the trace display to include data for the various trace labels Note that the Timing Analyzer Interface does not use the external labels defined in the emulator analyzer interface You maintain labels for the timing analyzer within the Timing Analyzer Interface itself 307 308 10 Making Coordinated Measurements 309 Making Coordinated Measurements When HP 64700 Card Cages are connected together via the Coordinated Measurement Bus CMB you can start and stop up to 32 emulators at the same time You can use the analyzer in one HP 64700 to arm activate the analyzers in other HP 64700 Card Cages or to cause emulator execution in other HP 64700 Card Cages to break into the monitor You can use the HP 64700 s BNC connector labeled TRIGGER IN OUT on the lower left corner of the HP 64700 rear panel to trigger an external instrument for example a logic analyzer or oscilloscope when the analyzer finds its trigger condition Also you can allow an external instrument to arm the analyzer or break emulator executi
322. og box you must position the mouse pointer somewhere inside the boundaries of the dialog box That is because the interface keyboard Jocus policy is set to pointer That just means that the window containing the mouse pointer receives the keyboard input In addition to keyboard mnemonics you can also specify keyboard accelerators which are keyboard shortcuts for selected menu items Refer to the Setting X Resources chapter and the Softkey Input scheme file for more information about setting the X resources that control defining keyboard accelerators 67 Entering Commands To choose pop up menu items To choose pop up menu items Move the mouse pointer to the area whose pop up menu you wish to access If a pop up menu is available the mouse pointer changes from an arrow to a hand Press and hold the select mouse button After the pop up menu appears while continuing to hold down the mouse button move the mouse pointer to the desired menu item Release the mouse button to select the menu choice If you decide not to select a menu item simply continue to hold the mouse button down move the mouse pointer off of the menu and release the mouse button To place values into the entry buffer using the keyboard Position the mouse pointer within the text entry area An I beam cursor will appear Enter the text using the keyboard To clear the entry buffer text area from beginning until end press the lt Ctrl gt
323. oints Trace Settings natn wee Mate Oise Sre Prev Run Mer vo OJ Break JC Step Asm_ Regaon To i Orn iBap iearonlo ifile meintmodule nalim o A mouse click causes aaee Aia Lo ifile nain nodule nat a the interface to expand 31 extern vold updste_systeml gt je update system variables i H g ATOT nterrupt_sintiinn simulate an interrupt the highlight to include 33 extern void dasomcteldiel dral char rt lh dsest lial aie size the symbol 2 1h L ezi num_checks and paste the symbol into pes r the entry buffer 3 16a while trus 181 ig update_systeml gt 163 rem_chech 104 Lnterrupt_sinl irum_chechs 165 Lf Lgrnaph 105 graph_d atal gt 107 proo_speolflol STATUS HESJIOZ Runaiag ia weniter Softmare brosk O007bcelap Biapley menory nain nmanonie Tee ee ete tee metre Commana Cursor wen 70 Entering Commands To recall entry buffer values To recall entry buffer values Position the mouse pointer over the Recall button just to the right of the entry buffer text area click the mouse button to bring up the Entry Buffer Recall dialog box and then choose a string from that dialog box The Entry Buffer Recall dialog box contains a list of entries gained during the emulation session as well as any predefined entries present at interface startup If you exit the emulation analysis session with the interface locked recall buffer value
324. ols field in any of the other displays Mnemonic Field sets the width Gn characters of the mnemonic field in C memory mnemonic trace list and register step mnemonic displays It also changes the width of the status field in the trace list Symbols in Mnemonic Field sets the maximum width of symbols in the mnemonic field of the trace list memory mnemonic and register step mnemonic displays Source Lines sets the width in characters of the source lines in the memory mnemonic display Auto Update Memory Displays Except Mnemonic toggles whether memory displays are automatically updated after commands that change memory contents or whether you must enter memory display commands to update the display You may wish to turn off memory display updates for example when displaying memory mapped I O Memory Mnemonic Auto PC toggles whether memory mnemonic displays automatically jump to the new PC location when the PC changes such as during stepping or break You may wish to turn off the automatic update of memory mnemonic displays when you want to examine a specific area of memory regardless of the location of the current PC such as during stepping Trace Display toggles whether trace displays are automatically updated when trace measurements complete or whether you must enter trace display commands to update the display You may wish to turn off trace display updates in one emulator analyzer window in order to compare the display with
325. ommand line but is not executed Normally the line feed is recognized as the command terminator The UNIX environment recognizes three quoting characters for shell commands which are double quotes single quotes and the backslash symbol For example the following three lines are treated as a single shell command The two hidden line feeds are ignored because they are inside the two single quotes lawk blanks END print blanks gt an_unix_file To start logging commands to a command file Choose File gt Log Record and use the dialog box to select a command file name Using the command line enter the log_commands to lt file gt command To stop logging commands to a command file Choose File gt Log Stop Or using the command line enter log_commands off 88 Entering Commands To playback execute a command file To playback execute a command file Choose File Log Playback and use the dialog box to select the name of the command file you wish to execute Or using the command line enter the name of the command file and press lt RETURN gt If you enter the name of the command file in the command line and the interface cannot find the command file in the current directory it searches the directories specified in the HP64KPATH environment variable To interrupt playback of a command file press the lt CTRL gt c key combination The mouse pointer must be w
326. ommand above To start a trace with the trace specification that you loaded use the Trace Again or trace again command Load a trace specification from a file and start the trace load trace_spec tspec trace again 258 Example Using the Emulation Analyzer To load trace data To load trace data Choose File gt Load Trace Data In the dialog box click on the name of the trace data file file of trace memory content you want to load placing it in the Load Trace Data box Then click OK Or using the command line enter load trace lt filename gt lt filename gt is any UNIX file name including paths The extension TR is assumed Loads a previously saved trace from a binary trace data file with a TR suffix Once you save trace data in a file using the File Store Trace Data or store trace command you can reload it To view the data you loaded use the Display Trace Trace Display or display trace command Remember that a new trace measurement will overwrite this trace data but not the file from which it was loaded The interface will try to display the trace listing in the display format active when the trace data was stored If the interface needs symbols to replace absolute addresses or to find high level source lines and symbols are not loaded an error occurs For example suppose source mixed was the display mode when the trace was captured and the executable file test1 was
327. ommand line Settings Command Line Oh thru Offfh target ram 1000h thru 1fffh supervisor program emulation rom 2000h thru 2fffh supervisor data emulation ram 3000h thru 3fffh user program emulation ram 3000h thru 3fffh user data emulation ram After the configuration is saved display memory at 1000H by entering the following command using the command line display memory 1000h blocked bytes 119 Configuring the Emulator To map memory ranges that use function codes Notice that an ambiguous address error occurs because the sp function code was not included with the address The following command should have been entered instead display memory fcode sp 1000h blocked bytes 120 Modifying the Emulator Pod Settings To modify the emulator pod settings you must start the configuration interface and access the Debug Trace Options configuration section refer to the Using the Configuration Interface section Figure 21 Emulator Configuration Pod Settings Pod Settings Target System Interrupts Enable Disable Target Bus Error BEAR Enable Disable Background Freeze Enable Disable DTACK Source Map Imerlockh CO Orive DIACK High Ves No Processor Settings erg 7 Moa IACK7 P BD Processor Pin Target Control Signals Drive Background Cycles to Target Yes No Buffer Function Code Lines gt Ves Mo Baller AS UDS LDS ACK7 Yes No Buff
328. on the CMB TRIGGER should not be used to trigger external instruments because a false trigger will be generated when EXECUTE is activated 312 Setting Up for Coordinated Measurements This section describes how to e Connect the Coordinated Measurement Bus e Connect the rear panel BNC To connect the Coordinated Measurement Bus CMB CAUTION Be careful not to confuse the 9 pin connector used for CMB with those used by some computer systems for RS 232 C communications Applying RS 232 C signals to the CMB connector is likely to result in damage to the HP 64700 Card Cage To use the CMB you will need one CMB cable for the first two emulators and one additional cable for every emulator after the first two The CMB cable is orderable from HP under product number HP 64023A The cable is four meters long You can build your own compatible CMB cables using standard 9 pin D type subminiature connectors and 26 AWG wire Note that Hewlett Packard does not ensure proper CMB operation if you are using a self built cable 313 Making Coordinated Measurements To connect the Coordinated Measurement Bus CMB 1 Connect the cables to the HP 64700 CMB ports RY FEMALE TWO EMULATORS THREE EMULATORS ETC FEMALE NC 64700E14 314 Making Coordinated Measurements To connect to the rear panel BNC Number of HP 647
329. on Breakpoints Trace Settings Help Aton be vase i Sre Pre aer e freak J _ Step Asm J Reg amc a Pre or Info Chip Seleote in SIM Registers a Not enable Not enabled v STATUS NGSJOZ Runaiag ia moniter Softmere brosk C O2bceltsp Biapley configuration info sin_chip_selscta Command conve 126 Configuring the Emulator To display information about bus interface ports To display information about chip selects from the emsim emulator register set choose Display Configuration Info Chip Selects Emulator SIM from either the configuration interface the emulator analyzer interface pull down menu Hewlett Packard Ernulator Analyzer hotsdzb m6830x File Display Modity Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings Help E C ip eeir e Jf Step Asm JE Reg ao STATUS 68302 Renetng ia meaitor Seftsere brosk O007bceltsp To display information about bus interface ports e Choose Display Configuration Info Bus Interface Port SIM or Display Configuration Info Bus Interface Port Emulator SIM where Port is your port of interest from either the configuration interface the emulator analyzer interface pull down menu Or using the command line enter display configuration_info bus_interface_port or display configuration_info embus_interface_port 127 Configuring the Emulator To display information about bus interface ports where port is your port of interest Th
330. on in the Configuring the Emulator chapter 368 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display data display data display gt data X to lt RETURN gt on display diagram lan 1 EXPR byte SI sie word ae thru EXPR long ints int16 int32 u_int8 u_inti6 u_int32 char O This command can display the values of simple data types in your program Using this command can save you time otherwise you would need to search through memory displays for the location and value of a particular variable The address identifier and data value of each symbol may be displayed You must issue the command set symbols on to see the symbol names displayed In the first display data command after you begin an emulation session you must supply at least one expression specifying the data item s to display Thereafter the display data command defaults to the expressions specified in the last display data command unless new expressions are supplied or appended with a leading comma ov 69 EXPR thru EXPR lt TYPE gt byte word long int8 int16 int32 u_int8 u_intl6 u_int32 char Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display data Symbols are normally set off until you give the command set symbols on Otherwise only the address data type and value of the data item will be displayed The paramete
331. on into the monitor The coordinated measurement tasks you can perform are grouped into the following sections e Setting up for coordinated measurements e Starting and stopping multiple emulators e Driving trigger signals to the CMB or BNC e Stopping program execution on trigger signals e Arming analyzers on trigger signals 310 Making Coordinated Measurements The location of the CMB and BNC connectors on the HP 64700 rear panel is shown in the following figure Figure 28 CMB Connector _ EIE na an 75s Ine peegge sh AT Ps TE R5232 422 TN i BNC Connector i AU ees al G 2 i U Re 64700E20 Signal Lines on the CMB There are three bi directional signal lines on the CMB connector on the rear panel of the emulator These CMB signals are TRIGGER The CMB TRIGGER line is low true This signal can be driven or received by any HP 64700 connected to the CMB This signal can be used to trigger an analyzer It can be used as a break source for the emulator READY The CMB READY line is high true It is an open collector and performs an ANDing of the ready state of enabled emulators on the CMB Each emulator on the CMB releases this line when it is ready to run This line goes true when all enabled emulators are ready to run providing for a synchronized start
332. on your software Use the performance_measurement_initialize command to initialize the SPMT Performance tool not initialized Cause The Software Performance Measurement Tool SPMT has not been initialized Action To make accurate activity or duration measurements on current data use the performance_measurement_initialize command to initialize the SPMT before running a performance measurement Period not in 1 2 5 sequence lt period gt 2021 Cause This error message occurs when the external timing sample period is not in a 1 2 5 sequence for example 10ns 20ns 50ns 100ns 200ns 500ns lus 2us 5us etc Some examples of invalid sample period specifications are 12ns 18ns 25ns 60ns 80ns etc Action Use a number in the 1 2 5 sequence when specifying the external timing sample period Program counter is odd 84 Cause You attempted to modify the program counter to an odd value using the modify registers command on a processor which expects even alignment of opcodes Action Modify the program counter only to even numbered values A477 Error Messages Question file missing or invalid Cause Some of the Softkey User Interface files are missing or are corrupted Action Reinstall the host software and try starting the emulation session again Range crosses segment boundary Cause On a segment offset processor an address range is specified that would cross different segments Action Break the memory
333. onditions or a lt CTRL gt c break Break failed 602 Cause The break command was unable to break the emulator to the monitor Action Determine why the break failed then correct the condition and retry the command See message 608 454 Error Messages Breakpoint code already exists lt breakpoint_address gt 667 Cause You attempted to insert a breakpoint however there was already a software breakpoint instruction at that location which was not already in the breakpoint table Action Your program code is apparently using the same instructions as used by the software breakpoints feature Remove the breakpoint instructions from your program code and use the modify software_breakpoints set command to insert them Breakpoint disable aborted 671 Cause Occurs when lt CTRL gt c is entered when disabling software breakpoints Breakpoint enable aborted 670 Cause Occurs when lt CTRL gt c is entered when setting software breakpoints Breakpoint list full not added lt address gt 664 Cause The software breakpoint table is already reached the maximum of 32 breakpoints The breakpoint you just requested with address lt address gt was not inserted Action Clear breakpoints that are no longer in use Then set the new breakpoint Breakpoint not added lt address gt 668 Cause You tried to insert a breakpoint in a memory location which was not mapped or was mapped as guarded memory Action Insert
334. onize to the 6830x SIM registers 139 To synchronize to the EMSIM registers 140 To restore default values in the EMSIM registers 140 Loading and Storing Absolute Files 141 To load absolute files 141 To load absolute files without symbols 142 To store memory contents into absolute files 143 Using Symbols 144 To load symbols 144 To display global symbols 145 To display local symbols 146 To display a symbol s parent symbol 150 To copy and paste a full symbol name to the entry buffer 151 Using Context Commands 152 To display the current directory and symbol context 153 To change the directory context 153 To change the current working symbol context 154 Executing User Programs 155 To run programs from the current PC 156 To run programs from an address 156 To run programs from the transfer address 157 To run programs from reset 157 To run programs until anaddress 158 To stop break from user program execution 159 To step high level source lines 160 11 Contents To step assembly level instructions 161 To reset the emulation processor 162 Using Execution Breakpoints 163 To enable execution breakpoints 165 To disable an execution breakpoint 166 To set a permanent breakpoint 167 To set a temporary breakpoint 168 To clear an execution breakpoint 169 To clear all execution breakpoints 171 To display the status of all execution breakpoints 171 Displaying and Modifying Registers 173 To display register
335. or example pushbuttons and menu bars are Motif widgets Applications are built using a hierarchy of widgets and the application s X resource names follow this hierarchy For example Application form row done background red In the resource name above the top level widget is named after the application One of the top level widget s children is a form widget one of the form widget s children is a row column manager widget and one of the row column manager widget s children is a pushbutton widget Resource names show a path in the widget hierarchy 495 Concepts Each widget in the hierarchy is a member of a widget class and the particular instance of the widget is named by the application programmer Class Names or Instance Names Can Be Used When specifying resource names you can use either instance names or class names For example a Done pushbutton may have an instance name of done and a class name of XmPushButton To set the background color for a hypothetical Done pushbutton you can use Application form row done background red Or you can use Application form row XmPushButton background red Applications also have class and instance names For example an application may have an instance name of applic1 and a class name of Application To set the background color for a hypothetical Done pushbutton only in the applicl application you can use applicl form row done background
336. or hardware EMSIM can be programmed from the 6830x SIM with the sync_sim_registers from_6830x_to_config command This is useful if initialization code that configures the 6830x SIM exists but you don t know what its values are In this case you can use the default configuration run from reset to execute the initialization code and use the sync_sim_registers from_6830x_to_config command to configure the emulator to match the 6830x SIM At any time you can verify if the SIM and EMSIM are programmed the same with the sync_sim_registers difference command Any differences between the two register sets will be listed It should be noted that the emulator hardware is programmed solely from the EMSIM register set and is therefore static with respect to the application program No attempt is made to update the programming of the emulator hardware by tracking instructions that will program the 6830x SIM Sync_sim_registers from_6830x_to_config Sync_sim_registers to_6830x_from_config 403 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands modify SIM registers sync_sim_registers default_emsim See Also The sync_sim_registers command and the Concepts chapter 404 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands performance_measurement_end performance_measurement_end Y lt RETURN gt performance _measurement_end This command stores data previously generated by the performance_measurement_run command in a file
337. or into a target system refer to the 6830x Installation Service Terminal Interface User s Guide That manual describes connecting these emulators to a target system using a 144 pin TQFP a PQFP plastic quad flat pack cable e M68302 Model HP 64798C e M68LC302 Model HP 64798F e M68306 Model HP 64798H Possible Damage to the Emulator Probe The emulator contains devices that are susceptible to damage by static discharge Therefore precautionary measures should be taken before handling the emulator probe to avoid damaging the internal components of the emulator by static electricity 52 Starting and Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces Starting and Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces You can use several types of interfaces to the same emulator at the same time to give yourself different views into the target system The strength of the emulator analyzer interface is that it lets you perform the real time analysis measurements that are helpful when integrating hardware and software The Software Performance Analyzer interface which is also a separate product lets you make measurements that can help you improve the performance of your software These interfaces can operate at the same time with the same emulator When you perform an action in one of the interfaces it is reflected in the other interfaces Up to 10 interface windows may be started for the same emulator Only one SPA window is allowed but you can start mul
338. ost system is not compatible with the version of the Softkey Interface you are using Action Make sure the software has been properly installed Then try starting the emulator again Emulation analyzer defaulted to delete label Cause Analyzer trace labels were changed or modified while labels were in use in the trace specification Action Enter the previous trace specification and try again Emulation memory access failed 702 Cause System failure Action Run performance verification Terminal Interface pv command Emulator locked by another user 10326 Cause This message occurs when you try to start an emulation interface but your attempt failed because the emulator is being used by someone else Action The current user must release the emulator Emulator locked by another user interface 10330 Cause You tried to start an emulator interface but your attempt failed because the emulator is already in use by someone else Action Current user must release the emulator Emulator locked by user lt USER NAME gt 10329 Cause You tried to start an emulator interface but your attempt failed because the emulator is already in use by someone else Action Current user must release the emulator 463 Error Messages Emulator terminated hung bus cycle lt cycle gt at lt address gt 164 Cause A hung bus cycle occurred during a memory access operation This message indicates that the emulator detect
339. ou just edited is assembled and the patch main menu appears 7 Type a and press lt RETURN gt to apply the patch Hewlett Packard Emulator Anatyzec hpleds2 m6830 File Display Modify Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings Feron ber Foner Figure 13 Diap AEG a Henory ap immamenic ifile usr hp64O00 demo debug erw hpb4738 nain c a ackirenn labs data 32 extern void interrupt_sinlint gt J gt simulate an interrupt es 33 extern void do_sortlold_e detall cher asctt_detel S int size SS maint N nn 4656123 LINK H oaeen zF HOVE L ooze 2F0A HOVE L F oaeeo z247c000075 HOVEA L 7 geceoc 267c000075 MOVER L 4000075C2 A3 37 intt_ayaten gt QRCEE 14600081 HOVE B 401 A2 QO2EES 4EB3000032 JSR init intt_ayaten ss proc_spec_imitt BOZEEC 4EBSOOO03A ISR P Proc_apac_init i 3 109 shile true STATES HESI2 Reeeing ia meitor Softmare bresk O0O2bcePsp Prd ify memory GREEEZbd words to BIZH4h Ce ee TG e m 44 10 11 12 Getting Started Step 11 Patch assembly language code Notice in the emulator analyzer interface that the instruction at address main has changed Click on the Patch action key again A window running the vi editor again appears allowing you to modify the patch code that was just created Modify the line you added previously to LINK A6 0 Exit out of the editor saving your changes The file you just edited is assem
340. ous mnemonic memory display For example suppose you are stepping source lines and you step into a function that you would like to step over You can return to the previous mnemonic memory display set a breakpoint at the line following the function call and run the program from the current program counter 178 Examples Using the Emulator To display memory in hexadecimal format To display memory in hexadecimal format Place an absolute or symbolic address in the entry buffer then choose Display gt Memory gt Hex and select the size from the cascade menu Or using the command line enter display memory lt address gt blocked lt size gt This command displays memory as hexadecimal values beginning at the address in the entry buffer To display memory in absolute word format display memory ascii_old_data absolute words Memory sp words absolute update _ascii_old_d 179 Using the Emulator To display memory in real number format To display memory in blocked byte format display memory ascii_old_data blocked bytes Memory sp tblocked update address hex a 720A E1 007 2E2 E9 72EA F 1 aa72F2 F9 aa72FA G1 a47382 89 73GA 11 a a7312 19 4731A 21 87322 29 732A 31 447332 39 44733A 41 487342 49 4734A 51 007352 59 00735A 61 43 45 77 5a 44 45 78 51 44 45 79 52 45 44 53 69 46 To display memory in real number form
341. ow manager HP64_Softkey lines 36 HP64_Softkey columns 85 Save your changes and exit the editor 3 If the RESOURCE_MANAGER property exists as is the case with HP VUE if you re not sure you can check by entering the xrdb query command use the xrdb command to add the resources to the RESOURCE_MANAGER property For example xrdb merge nocpp HP64_Softkey tmp Otherwise if the RESOURCE_MANAGER property does not exist append the temporary file to your HOME Xdefaults file For example cat HP64_Softkey tmp gt gt HOME Xdefaults 4 Remove the temporary file 5 Start or restart the Graphical User Interface After you have completed the above steps you must either start or restart by exiting and starting again the Graphical User Interface Starting and exiting the Graphical User Interface is described in the Starting and Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces chapter 333 Setting X Resources To use customized scheme files To use customized scheme files Scheme files are used to set platform specific resources that deal with color fonts and sizes mouse and keyboard operation and labels and titles You can create and use customized scheme files by following these steps Create the HOME HP64_schemes lt platform gt directory For example mkdir HOME HP64_ schemes mkdir HOME HP64_schemes HP UX Copy the scheme file to be modified to the HOME HP64_schemes lt platform gt directory Label scheme files are
342. own the information in the active window Status line Displays the emulator and analyzer status Also when error and status messages occur they are displayed on the status line in addition to being saved in the error log Command line Commands are entered on the command line by pressing softkeys or by typing them in and executed by pressing the Return key The Tab and Shift Tab keys allow you to move the cursor on the command line forward or backward The Clear line key or CTRL e clears from the cursor position to the end of the line The CTRL u key clears the whole command line Softkey Interface Conventions Example Softkey Interface commands throughout the manual use the following conventions Commands options and parts of command syntax Commands options and parts of command syntax which may be entered by pressing softkeys User specified parts of a command Represents the UNIX prompt Commands which follow the are entered at the UNIX prompt The carriage return key 30 The Getting Started Tutorial This tutorial gives you step by step instructions on how to perform a few basic tasks using the emulator analyzer interface The tutorial examples presented in this chapter make the following assumptions e The HP 64798 emulator and HP 64703 4 analyzer are installed into the HP 64700 Card Cage the HP 64700 is connected to the host computer and the Graphical User Interface software has been installed as outli
343. ox and the maximum number of entries are set via X resources refer to the Setting X Resources chapter 73 Examples The file filter selects specific files A list of fi files from directory ter matching the current A list of fi accessed emulation during the session A single click ona file name from either list highlights the file name and copies it to the text area A double click chooses the file and closes the dialog box Label informs you what kind of file selection you are performing Text entry area Text either copied here from the recall list or entered directly es Entering Commands To use dialog boxes To use the File Selection dialog box Filter lt I Emulator Analyzer File Selection Load Executable Program and Symbols Clicking this button chooses the Entering a new file filter and file name displayed in the text entry area and closes the dialog box Cancel Clicking this button cancels the clicking this button causes a list file selection operation and of files matching the new filter closes the dialog box to be read from the directory 74 Entering Commands To use dialog boxes To use the Directory Selection dialog box Label informs you of the type of list displayed Emulator Analyzer Directory Selection Previous Working Directories A list of predefined or Associated X Resource emul m6830x dirSelectSub entri
344. p 119 recall 83 recalling with dialog box 80 summary 352 word selection 83 configuration context displaying from config window 103 configuration info copy command 357 copying to a file 192 display command 366 368 configuration emulator background states tracing 123 breaks on writes to ROM 122 exiting the interface 105 loading from file 105 modifying a section 100 starting the interface 98 99 storing 102 context changing directory in configuration window 103 changing directory in emulator analyzer window 153 changing symbol 154 displaying directory from configuration window 103 displaying directory from emulator analyzer window 153 displaying symbol 153 coordinated measurements 319 break_on_trigger syntax of the trace command 319 definition 310 copy command 356 358 configuration info 357 data 357 display 357 error_log 357 event_log 357 global symbols 357 help 357 local_symbols_in 359 memory 360 361 pod_command 357 registers 362 software breakpoints 358 status 358 trace 363 copy and paste addresses 69 from entry buffer 72 multi window 69 72 symbol width 69 to entry buffer 68 70 copying breakpoints to a file 198 configuration info to a file 192 data values to a file 192 display area to file 192 emulator status to a file 193 error log to file 193 event log to file 193 global symbols to file 193 local symbols to file 193 memory to file 192 pod commands to a
345. p to double check the install process Verify the existence of the HP64_SoftKey file in the hp64 000 X11 app defaults subdirectory by entering ls hp64000 X11 app defaults HP64_Softkey at the HP UX prompt Finding this file verifies that you loaded the correct fileset and also verifies that the customize scripts executed because this file is created from other files during the customize process Examine hp64 000 X11 app defaults HP64_Softkey near the end of the file to confirm that there are resources specific to your emulator Near the end of the file there will be resource strings that contain references to specific emulators For example if you installed the Graphical User Interface for the 6830x emulator resource name strings will have m6830x embedded in them After you have verified the software installation you must start the X server and an X window manager if you are not currently running an X server If you plan to run the Motif Window Manager mwm or similar window manager continue with Step 4a of these instructions If you plan to run HP VUE skip to Step 4b of these instructions 514 Installation Step 4 Start the X server and the M otif Window Manager mwm Step 4 Start the X server and the Motif Window Manager mwm If you are not already running the X server and a window manager do so now The X server is required to use the Graphical User Interface because it is an X Windows application A
346. pace Supervisor space Supervisor data space Supervisor program space User space User data space User program space To copy a portion of user data memory to a file copy memory fcode ud 1000H thru 1fffH to mymem To modify a location in program memory modify memory fcode p 5000h long to 12345678h 389 bms lt COMMAND gt emul perf lt UINAME gt Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands forw ard forward TE COMMAND RETURN emul ie perf bms FE lt UINAME gt Le This command lets you forward commands to other HP 64700 interfaces that use the emul700dmn daemon process to coordinate actions between the interfaces Sends messages to the Broadcast Message Server or BMS An ASCII string enclosed in quotes that is the command to be forwarded to the named interface Forwards command to the emulator analyzer interface Forwards commands to the software performance analyzer interface Forwards commands to a user interface name other than those available on the softkeys To send the profile command to the software performance analyzer forward perf profile The User s Guide for the interface to which you are forwarding commands 390 lt HELP_FILE gt Examples Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands help help lt HELP_ FILES lt RETURN gt Dis
347. play modify registers e Display modify target system memory e Load store target system memory e Modify SIM registers e Display emulator SIM configuration info If you want to enter one of these commands you must first make an explicit break into the monitor using the break command Because the emulator contains dual port emulation memory commands that access emulation memory are allowed while runs are restricted to real time When the restriction to real time runs is turned off all commands regardless of whether or not they require a break to the emulation monitor are accepted by the emulator 107 Figure 18 Configuring the Emulator When Restricting the Emulator to Real time Runs Reconfiguring the Emulator Copy of the SIM Registers To reconfigure the emulator copy of the SIM registers first start the configuration interface and access the Reconfigure Internal Registers configuration section refer to the previous Using the Configuration Interface section Emulator Configuration Reconfigure Internal Registers Emulator Copy of General Registers ear Ei SCR Emulator Copy of Chip Select Registers CS ox ORO Elgg OR Giga OR Bia ORS Ean BRo ERAH eri Emulator Copy of Interrupt Register G8Gh aw 108 Configuring the Emulator To define values for the emulator copy of the SIM registers To access information about the configuration items use the online help button or press f1 to show
348. play options allow you to cause the address information in the trace display to be offset by the amount specified The offset value is subtracted from the instruction s physical address to yield the address that is displayed If code gets relocated and therefore makes symbolic information invalid you can use the Address Offset or offset_by option to change the address information so that it again agrees with the symbolic information You can also specify an offset to cause the listed addresses to match the addresses in compiler or assembler listings Trace execution from entry of the demo program the main label then offset by the value of main so that the addresses appear the same as the location counter in the assembler listing reset trace run from transfer_address display trace offset_by main 253 Using the Emulation Analyzer To reset the trace display defaults To reset the trace display defaults Choose Settings Display Modes Then in the dialog box click on Default All Settings and click the OK pushbutton This leaves the trace display in the source intermixed and symbols on mode Or using the command line enter set default This turns off all symbolics and source references in the interface To change the number of states available for display Choose Trace Display Options and in the dialog box enter the desired number of states to be made available for display in the field beside Unload
349. plays information about system and emulation features during an emulation session Typing help or displays softkey labels that list the options on which you may receive help When you select an option the system will list the information to the screen The help command is not displayed on the softkeys You must enter it into the keyboard You may use a question mark in place of help to access the help information The parameters are as follows This represents one of the available options on the softkey labels You can either press a softkey representing the help file or type in the help file name If you are typing in the help file name make sure you use the complete syntax Not all of the softkey labels reflect the complete file name help system_commands run This is a summary of the commands that appear on the softkey labels when you type help or press system_commands run trace step break display modify load store copy reset 391 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands help stop_trace end software_breakpoints registers expressions EXPR symbols SYMB specify cmb cmb_execute map set wait pod_command bbaunload coverage performance_measurement_initialize performance_measurement_run performance_measurement_end 392 configuration Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands load load load lt FILE gt af lt RETURN gt
350. ple Specifies the command used to edit a file at a vi d s certain line number lt proc gt actionKeysSub keyDefs paired list Specifies the text that should appear on the of strings action key push buttons and the commands that should be executed in the command line area when the action key is pushed Refer to the To set up custom action keys section for more information lt proc gt dirSelectSub entries list of Specifies the initial values that are placed in strings the File Context Directory pop up recall buffer Refer to the To set initial recall buffer values section for more information lt proc gt recallSub entries list of Specifies the initial values that are placed in strings the entry buffer labeled Q Refer to the To set initial recall buffer values section for more information 331 Setting X Resources To modify the Graphical User Interface resources The following steps show you how to modify the Graphical User Interface s X resources Copy part or all of the HP64_Softkey application defaults file to a temporary file The HP64_Softkey file contains the default definitions for the graphical interface application s X resources For example on an HP 9000 computer you can use the following command to copy the complete HP64_Softkey file to HP64_Softkey tmp note that the HP64_Softkey file is several hundred lines long cp usr lib X11 app defaults
351. previously accessed directories HP64000 monitor HPE4000 demo debug_envihp64798 A single click ona k directory name from the fusersO rogere list highlights the name and copies it to the text area A double click chooses the directory and closes the dialog box lt Selection Text entry area Directory name is either copied here from the recall list or entered directly Clicking this button chooses Clicking this button chooses Clicking this button cancels the the directory displayed inthe the directory displayed in the directory selection operation text entry area and closes the textentry area but keeps the and closes the dialog box dialog box dialog box on the screen instead of closing it 75 Entering Commands To access help information To access help information Display the Help Index by choosing Help gt General Topic or Help Command Line Choose a topic of interest from the Help Index The Help Index lists topics covering operation of the interface as well other information about the interface When you choose a topic from the Help Index the interface displays a window containing the help information You may leave the window on the screen while you continue using the interface 76 Using the Command Line with the Mouse When using the Graphical User Interface the command line portion of the interface gives you the option of entering commands in the same manner as they
352. r 96 Using the Configuration Interface This section shows you how to modify store and load configurations using the emulator configuration interface This section shows you how to e Start the configuration interface e Modify a configuration section e Apply configuration changes to the emulator e Display information if the apply didn t work e Store configuration changes to a file e Change the configuration directory context e Display the configuration context e Access help topics e Access context sensitive f1 help e Exit the configuration interface e Load an existing configuration file This section describes emulator configuration in general The remaining sections in this chapter describe the specific configuration options for your emulator 97 Configuring the Emulator To start the configuration interface To start the configuration interface Choose Modify gt Emulator Config from the emulator analyzer interface pull down menu Or using the command line enter modify configuration The configuration interface top level dialog box see the following example is displayed The configuration sections that are presented depend on the hardware and the features of your particular emulator The configuration interface may be left running while you are using the emulator analyzer interface If youre using the Softkey Interface from a terminal or terminal emulation window you
353. r Analyzer Interface Commands How Pop up Menus Map to the Command Line The following tables show the items available in the pop up menus and the command line commands to which they map Mnemonic Memory Display Pop up Command Line Set Clear Software Breakpoint Edit Source Run Until Trace After Trace Before Trace About Trace Until modify software_breakpoints set clear EXPR vi lt line gt lt file gt no_prompt_before_exit run until EXPR trace after STATE trace before STATE trace about STATE trace before STATE break_on_trigger Breakpoints Display Pop up Command Line Set Inactivate Breakpoint Clear delete Breakpoint Enable Disable Software Breakpoints Set All Breakpoints Clear delete All Breakpoints modify software_breakpoints set deactivate EXPR modify software_breakpoints clear EXPR modify software_breakpoints enable disable modify software_breakpoints set modify software_breakpoints clear Symbols Display Pop up Command Line Display Local Symbols Display Parent Symbols Cut Full Symbol Name Edit File Defining Symbol display local_symbols_in SYMB display local_symbols_in SYMB display global_symbols N A vi lt line gt lt file gt no_prompt_before_exit 349 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands Status Line Pop up Command Line Remove Temporary Message Command Line On Off Display Error Log Displa
354. r speed to be set to Slow in the configuration trace counting state address 10h Count all states in the trace trace counting anystate Count time in the trace trace counting time Disable counting in the trace trace counting off To define a storage qualifier Enter the storage qualifier such as status read in the entry buffer Then choose Trace Only Or using the command line enter trace only lt bus_state gt lt bus_state gt represents a combination of address data and status expressions that must be matched to satisfy the storage qualifier Storage qualifiers can help filter unwanted information from program execution and improve your trace measurement The analyzer stores only the information specified in the storage qualifier Note that if you have a sequencer or trigger specification any states given there are shown in the trace list even if they don t meet the storage qualifier 222 Examples Using the Emulation Analyzer To define a prestore qualifier Trace only address 10h trace only address 10h Trace only data value Offh trace only data Offh Trace only write operations trace only status write To define a prestore qualifier Place your prestore qualification into the entry buffer then choose Trace Only Prestore Using the command line enter commands as follows e Specify a prestore qualifier by entering trace prestore lt bus_state gt lt bus_state gt repr
355. r the external analyzer mode Notice that the analyzer always drives trig1 and the emulator always receives trigl This provides for the break_on_trigger syntax of the trace command 319 Making Coordinated Measurements To disable synchronous measurements You can use the trig1 or trig2 line to make a connection between the analyzer and the CMB connector or BNC connector so that when the analyzer finds its trigger condition a trigger signal is driven on the HP 64700 s Coordinated Measurement Bus CMB or BNC connector This can also be done for the external analyzer when it is configured as an independent state or timing analyzer You can use the trig or trig2 line to make a connection between the emulator break input and the CMB connector BNC connector analyzer or external analyzer when configured as an independent state or timing analyzer so that program execution can break when a trigger signal is received from the CMB BNC or analyzer You can use the trig2 line to make a connection between the analyzer and the CMB connector or BNC connector so that the analyzer can be armed that is enabled when a trigger signal is received from the CMB or BNC connector This can also be done for the external analyzer when it is configured as an independent state or timing analyzer You can use the trig1 and trig2 lines to make several type of connections at the same time For example when the analyzer finds its trigger condition
356. r the trace list line number to be centered in the display Also you can use lt LINE gt with disassemble_from_line_number lt LINE gt prompts you for the line number from which the inverse assembler attempts to disassemble data in the trace list Lists trace information with opcodes in mnemonic format This option allows you to offset the listed address value from the address of the instruction By subtracting the offset value from the physical address of the instruction the system makes the listed address match that given in the assembler or compiler listing This option is also useful for displaying symbols and source lines in dynamically relocated programs Note that when using the set source only command the analyzer may operate more slowly than when using the set source on command This is an operating characteristic of the analyzer When you use the command set source on and are executing only assembly language code not high level language code no source lines are displayed The trace list will then fill immediately with the captured assembly language instructions When using set source only no inverse assembled code is displayed Therefore the emulation software will try to fill the display with high level source code This requires the emulation software to search for any captured analysis data generated by a high level language statement In conclusion you should not set the trace list to set source only when trac
357. ration means to first display the File pull down menu then display the Load cascade menu then select the Configuration item from the Load cascade menu Based on this explanation the general rule for interpreting this notation can be stated as follows e The leftmost item in bold is the pull down menu label e If there are more than two items then cascade menus are involved and all items between the first and last item have cascade menus attached e The last item on the right is the actual menu choice to be made 26 Mouse Button and Keyboard Bindings Getting Started Because the Graphical User Interface runs on different kinds of computers which may have different conventions for mouse buttons and key names the Graphical User Interface supports different bindings and the customization of bindings This manual refers to the mouse buttons using general or generic terms The following table describes the generic mouse button names and shows the default mouse button bindings M ouse Button Bindings and Descriptions Generic Bindings for Bindings for Button HP 9000 Sun SPARCsystem Name SunOS or Solaris paste left left command middle middle paste select right right command left right select pushbutton left left select 1M iddle button on three button mouse Both buttons on two button mouse Description Paste from the display area to the entry buffer Paste from the entry buffer to the
358. reakpoints set EXPR permanent modify software_breakpoints set EXPR temporary modify software_breakpoints set modify software_breakpoints clear EXPR modify software_breakpoints clear 347 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands Pull down Command Line Trace Display display trace Trace Display Options display trace Trace gt Trace Spec Trace gt After Q Trace Before Q Trace gt About 0 Trace gt Only QO Trace gt Only Q Prestore Trace gt Again Trace gt Repetitively Trace Everything Trace gt Until Q Trace gt Until Stop Trace Stop N A browses recall buffer for trace commands trace after STATE trace before STATE trace about STATE trace only STATE trace only STATE prestore anything trace again lt previous trace spec gt repetitively trace trace before STATE break_on_trigger trace on_halt stop_trace Settings Source Symbol Modes Absolute Settings Source Symbol Modes gt Symbols Settings Source Symbol Modes Source Mixed Settings Source Symbol Modes Source Only Settings Display Modes Settings gt Pod Command Keyboard Settings Simulated IO Keyboard Settings Command Line set source off symbols off set source off symbols on set source on inverse_video on symbols on set source only inverse_video off symbols on set display pod_command pod_command keyboard display simulated_io modify keyboard_to_simio N A toggles the command line 348 Emulato
359. red Note that instance names are more specific than class names That is class names may apply to many instances of the widget The class and instance names for the widgets in the Graphical User Interface can be displayed by choosing Help X Resource Names and clicking on the All names button Wildcards Can Be Used A wildcard may be used to match a resource specification to many different widgets at once For example to set the background color of all pushbuttons you can use Application XmPushButton background red Note that resource names with wildcards are more general than those without wildcards 496 Concepts Specific Names Override General Names A more specific resource specification will override a more general one when both apply to a particular widget or application The names for the application and the main window widget in HP64_Softkey applications have been chosen so that you may specify custom resource values that apply in particular situations Apply to ALL HP64_Softkey applications HP64_Softkey lt resource gt lt value gt Apply to specific types of HP64_Softkey applications emul lt resource gt lt value gt for the emulator perf lt resource gt lt value gt for the performance analyzer Apply to all HP64_Softkey applications but only when they are connected to a particular type of microprocessor m6830x lt resource gt lt value gt for the 6830x m68020 lt resource gt l
360. red menu item 65 Entering Commands To choose a pull down menu item using the mouse method 2 Release the mouse button to select the menu choice If you decide not to select a menu item simply continue to hold the mouse button down move the mouse pointer off of the menu and release the mouse button Some menu items have an ellipsis as part of the menu label An ellipsis indicates that the menu item will display a dialog or message box when the menu item is chosen To choose a pull down menu item using the mouse method 2 1 Position the mouse pointer over the menu name on the menu bar 2 Click the command select mouse button to display the menu Move the mouse pointer to the desired menu item If the menu item has a cascade menu identified by an arrow on the right edge of the menu button then repeat the previous step and then this step until you find the desired item Click the mouse button to select the item If you decide not to select a menu item simply move the mouse pointer off of the menu and click the mouse button Some menu items have an ellipsis as part of the menu label An ellipsis indicates that the menu item will display a dialog or other box when the menu item is chosen To choose a pull down menu item using the keyboard To initially display a pull down menu press and hold the menu select key for example the Extend char key on an HP 9000 keyboard and then type the und
361. rements 263 271 characterization of 112 contents listed as asterisk 360 copy command 360 361 display command 374 377 displaying 176 displaying at an address 181 displaying repetitively 182 dual port emulation 107 loading programs into 141 mapping 110 mnemonic format display 177 modify command 399 401 modifying 182 re assignment of memory blocks in mapper 117 store command 432 to file 192 memory mapper resolution 110 memory mapping block size 110 function code specification 118 120 overlaid addresses 118 memory recommendations HP 9000 508 SPARCsystem 509 menu pop up menu in trace list 239 menus editing command line with pop up 79 hand pointer means pop up 25 68 pulldown operation with keyboard 66 67 pulldown operation with mouse 65 66 mixed slave clock mode 304 mixing pod commands with high level commands 225 228 mnemonic memory display 33 177 setting the source symbol modes 185 modes source symbol 185 modify command 396 configuration 397 keyboard_to_simio 398 memory 399 401 register 175 402 SIM registers 403 modify software_breakpoints clear command 169 170 modify software_breakpoints disable command 166 modify software_breakpoints enable command 165 modify software_breakpoints set command 165 166 168 modify_command trace command option 206 module duration measurements SPMT 281 module usage measurements 281 Motif HP 9000 700 requirements 508 mouse b
362. respond to a symbol See the set command for details The parameters are as follows An expression is a combination of numeric values symbols operators and parentheses specifying an offset value for the breakpoint address See the EXPR syntax diagram This option allows you to offset the listed software breakpoint address value from the actual address of the breakpoint By subtracting the offset value from the breakpoint address the system can cause the listed address to match that given in the assembler or compiler listing display software _ breakpoints display software breakpoints offset_by 1000H The copy software_breakpoints modify software_breakpoints and set commands 380 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display trace display trace display e trace depth lt DEPTHH gt lt LINE gt disassemble_from_line_number _ lt LINE gt rN ae mnemonic absolute count absolute relative external ae binary external_label hex offset_by J EXPR gt mm a 64782502 dequeue on off M To lt RETURN gt on DISPLAY diagram x available when external labels are in use This command displays the contents of the trace buffer Captured information can be presented as absolute hexadecimal values or
363. resses in the code segment and absolute otherwise 006 007 888 889 818 811 812 813 814 015 STATUS SE ds16 Disassemble From ds 16 i Edit Source g ds 16 Display Memory At ds16 maint H4444A 44 prgm word rd ds16 maint 8G8C 7156 pram word rd ds16 maint Q4GE MOVEA L 0000717E A3 maint 8G1a 8080 prgm word rd ds16 maint G12 717E prgm word rd ds16 N68332 Running user program Emulation trace complete 239 Examples Using the Emulation Analyzer To display the trace abouta line number To display the trace about a line number Choose Trace Display Options and in the dialog box enter the desired trace list line number in the field beside Move to Line Then click the OK or Apply pushbutton Or using the command line enter display trace lt LINE gt If you need to move to a particular state quickly you can use this command The command places the specified state in the center of the current trace display Display the trace about line number 20 Choose Trace Display Options and in the dialog box enter 20 in the field beside Move to Line Then click the OK or Apply pushbutton Enter the following command on the command line to display the trace about line number 256 display trace 256 240 Using the Emulation Analyzer To move through the trace list To move through the trace list Use the scroll bar at the right
364. rformance_measurement_initialize command 406 407 performance_measurement_run command 408 permanent software breakpoints how to set 167 platform HP 9000 memory needs 508 HP 9000 minimum performance 508 SPARCsystem memory needs 509 SPARCsystem minimum performance 509 platform scheme 330 499 plug in 51 pod commands 409 410 copy command 357 copying to a file 193 541 Index display command 365 display screen 91 keyboard input 91 pod commands used in high level interface 225 228 pop up menu in trace list 239 pop up menus command line editing with 79 hand pointer indicates presence 25 68 positioning the trace display 207 power failure during firmware update 531 prestore qualifier 223 224 prestore qualifiers 536 primary branches analyzer sequencer 536 processor type 56 progflash example 528 program activity measurements SPMT 263 271 program counter mnemonic memory display 34 running from 156 pulldown menus choosing with keyboard 66 67 choosing with mouse 65 66 pushbutton select mouse button 27 Q QUALIFIER in trace command 411 412 qualifiers 211 simple trigger 214 216 slave clock 304 306 R RAM mapping emulation or target 112 range resource note on 413 RANGE in trace command 413 414 READY CMB signal 311 real time runs 536 commands not allowed during 107 restricting the emulator to 107 108 recall buffer 25 columns 337 initial content 337 lin
365. rinter as the destination device you must define PRINTER as a shell variable For example you could enter the text shown below after the symbol PRINTER lp S export PRINTER If you don t want the print message to overwrite the command line execute set PRINTER lp s Copies a list of the contents of the emulation processor registers to the selected destination Copies a list of the current software breakpoints to a selected destination Copies emulation and analysis status information This allows you to specify a destination for the copied information Copies the current trace listing to the selected destination Waits for the UNIX command to complete before returning An exclamation point specifies the delimiter for UNIX commands An exclamation point must precede all UNIX commands A trailing exclamation point should be used if you want to return to the command line and specify noheader Otherwise the trailing exclamation point is optional If an exclamation point is part of the UNIX command a backslash must precede the exclamation point See the following pages on various copy syntax diagrams See the following pages on various copy syntax diagrams 358 SYM B Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands copy local_symbols_in copy local_symbols_in S copy a local_symbols_in To output of LOCAL_SYMBOLS_IN
366. rogram code porthand c process_port i porthand c process_port BLOCK_1 i Notice how you can reference different variables with matching identifiers by specifying the complete scope You also can save typing by specifying a scope with cws For example if you are making many measurements involving symbols in the file porthand c you could specify cws porthand c process_port Then BLOCK_1 i are prefixed with porthand c process_port before the database lookup 439 See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands SYMB If a symbol search with the current working symbol prefix is unsuccessful the last scope on the current working symbol is stripped The symbol you specified is then retested with the modified current working symbol Note that this does not change the actual current working symbol For example if you set the current working symbol as cws porthand c process_port BLOCK_1 and made a reference to symbol i2 the retrieval utilities attempt to find a symbol called porthand c process_port BLOCK_1 1i2 which would not be found The symbol utilities would then strip BLOCK_1 from the current working symbol yielding porthand c process_port i2 which is a valid symbol You also can specify the symbol type if conflicts arise Although not shown in the tree assume that a procedure called port_one is also defined in control c This would conflict with the identifier port_one which declares an in
367. ropriate responses to configuration file questions Invalid attribute for memory type lt attribute gt 140 Cause You tried to specify a memory attribute for target memory Attributes are valid for emulation memory only not for target or guarded memory Action Re enter your specification and use attributes only when specifying emulation memory space Invalid auxiliary subsystem product address lt address gt 904 Cause For future products Invalid ET subsystem product address lt address gt 903 Cause Detects an invalid ET Used only internally Invalid firmware for emulation subsystem 901 Cause This error occurs when the HP 64700 system controller determines that the emulation firmware ROM is invalid Action This message is not likely to occur unless you have upgraded the ROMs in your emulator Be sure that the correct ROM is installed in the emulation controller Invalid trigger duration lt duration gt 2031 Cause This error occurs when you attempt to specify an external timing trigger duration which is in the valid range but is not a multiple of 10 ns Action Re enter the command with the trigger duration as a multiple of 10 ns 470 Error Messages Invalid word access for odd address 2 Cause When the access mode is word you have attempted to modify a target system memory location at an odd address Action Either change to an even address or modify the access mode to bytes if po
368. ror Messages Update HP 64740 firmware to version A 02 02 or newer 181 Cause This error occurred when you attempted to disassemble a trace and the analyzer firmware was found to be out of date Action Refer to Chapter 16 Installing Updating Emulator Firmware You must update the firmware either to the version specified in the message or a newer firmware version Wait time failure could not determine system time Cause The system call failed Action Verify that date executes correctly from the UNIX prompt Warning at least one integer truncated to 32 bits Warning at least one integer truncated to 16 bits Warning at least one integer truncated to 8 bits Cause The number entered was too large for the currently specified display or access size Action Try entering the command again using the correct size of number Width not in range 1 lt valid width lt 80 Cause You tried to specify the width of the field outside the range from 1 to 80 Action Try entering the command again using a valid number for the width Write to ROM break lt address gt 628 Cause When the emulator is configured to break on writes to ROM a memory write access to a location mapped as ROM has occurred during execution of the user program Action Investigate the cause of the write to ROM by the user program You can configure the emulator so that it does not break on writes to ROM Write to ROM break 612 Cause This status
369. rs are as follows A leading comma allows you to append additional expressions to the previous display data command Commas between expression data type specifications allow you to specify multiple variables and types for display with the current command Prompts you for an expression specifying the data item to display The expression can include various math operators and program symbols See the EXPR and SYMB syntax pages for more information Allows you to specify a range of addresses for which you want data display Typically you use this to display the contents of an array You can display both single dimensioned and multi dimensioned arrays Arrays are displayed in the order specified by the language definition typically row major order for most Algol like languages Specifies the format in which to display the information Data type information is not available from the symbol database so you must specify Hex display of one 8 bit location Hex display of one 16 bit location Hex display of one 32 bit location Note that byte ordering in word and long displays is determined by the conventions of the processor in use Display of one 8 bit location as a signed integer using two s complement notation Display of two bytes as a signed integer using two s complement notation Display of four bytes as a signed integer using two s complement notation Display of one byte as an unsigned positive integer Display of two by
370. rt gt 2 void 4 init susteni gt i je FUNCTION init susteni Ka fe Le cab nas ze the target values for tempersture and humidity 33 target i target had ea 35 j In netaliz ze the variables indicating the current emwviromwent editions 3 ront terp 65 3 patiaa 41 4j Ser starting directions for temp and humid 42 teme_dir up STATES cess imit_a aten init_agaten c Command Conse 35 Getting Started Step 5 Display the previous mnemonic display Step 5 Display the previous mnemonic display Click on the Disp Src Prev action key Or using the command line enter display memory mnemonic previous_display This command is useful for example when you have stepped into a function that you do not wish to look at you can display the previous mnemonic display and run until the source line that follows the function call 36 Figure 6 Getting Started Step 6 Run until an address Step 6 Run until an address When displaying memory in mnemonic format a selection in the pop up menu lets you run from the current program counter address until a specific source line Position the mouse pointer over the line proc_spec_initQ press and hold the select mouse button and choose Run Until from the pop up menu This screen shows the command line turned on Hewlett Packard Emulator Anatyzer hpleds2 m6830x File Display Modity Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings
371. s e Display a symbol s parent symbol e Copy and paste a full symbol name to the entry buffer To load symbols Choose File gt Load Symbols Only and use the dialog box to select the absolute file Or using the command line enter load symbols lt absolute_file gt Symbols are loaded automatically unless you use the nosymbols option when loading absolute files If you did use the nosymbols option when loading the absolute file you can load the symbols without loading the absolute file again 144 Using the Emulator To display global symbols Examples To load symbols from the demo program load symbols ecs x To display global symbols e Choose Display Global Symbols Or using the command line enter display global_symbols Listed are address ranges associated with a symbol the segment the symbol is associated with and the offset of that symbol within the segment If there is more than a screen full of information you can use the up arrow down arrow lt NEXT gt or lt PREV gt keys to scroll the information up or down on the display Examples To display global symbols in the demo program display global_symbols 145 Using the Emulator To display local symbols Hewbett Packard Emulator Analyzer hptsdzb m6830x File Display Mody Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings Hi E Ci prog prog STATES NGSIOZ Rumaing ia moniter Software break C0O27bceltsp Biapley global
372. s 0 00 graph_data Address Range 1988H thru 1A40H Memory Activity State Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Mean 0 00 Sdv 0 00 Tim Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Program Activity State Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Mean 0 00 Sdv 0 00 Tim Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 proc_spec_init Address Range 1A48H thru 1A64H Memory Activity State Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Mean 0 00 Sdv 0 00 Tim Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 277 Making Software Performance M easurements To interpret activity measurement reports Program Activity save_points set_outputs update_system read_conditions strcpys8 interrupt_sim write_hdwr proc_specific combsort State Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Mean 0 00 Sdv 0 00 Tim Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Address Range 189CH thru 1980H Memory Activity State Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Mean 0 00 Sdv 0 00 Tim Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Program Activity State Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Mean 0 00 Sdv 0 00 Tim Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Graph of Memory Activity relative state percents gt 1 30 28 KKK KK KK KK KK KK KK 30 28 KKK KK KK KK KK KK KK esa Dal ka KKKKKK 9 75 KKKKK bala EER 6 06 3 845 1 06 Graph of Memo set_outputs update_system read_conditions strcpys8 interrupt_sim write_hdwr proc_specific combsort Graph of Program Activity relativ ry 30 30 E2 Ja Pwo WwW Activity relativ
373. s This option is not available when operating the emulator in the measurement system This option stops all instances of the emulator analyzer interface in one or more windows or terminals The emulation system is released for other users If you do not release the emulation system when ending others cannot access it end end release_system The Exiting the Emulator Analyzer Interface section in the Starting and Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces chapter 385 lt DON T CARE NUMBER gt NORM AL Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands EXPR EXPR lt DON T CARE NUMBER gt lt NUMBER gt Lot eax Lo Beles d en lt OP gt An expression is a combination of numeric values symbols operators and parentheses used to specify address data status executed address or any other value used in the emulation commands The function of an expression EXPR is to let you define the address data status or executed address expression that fits your needs You can combine multiple values to define the expression Certain emulation commands will allow the option of lt EXPR gt after pressing a thru softkey This allows you to enter a range without retyping the original base address or symbol For example you could specify the address range disp_buf thru disp_buf 25 as disp_buf thru 25 The parameters are as follows You can inc
374. s configuration option Answer yes if the emulation emulator analyzer interface should control the external analyzer You must answer yes to access the remaining external analyzer configuration questions At the end of the configuration process the external analyzer mode and threshold voltages will be set existing labels will be deleted and only the labels specified in response to the questions below will be defined Answer no if the emulation emulator analyzer interface shouldn t control the external analyzer If emulation does not control the external bits the external analyzer configuration will not be modified in any way by the emulation interface To specify the threshold voltage Choose yes for the Should emulation control the external bits configuration option Enter the Threshold voltage for bits 0 7 and J clock value Enter the Threshold voltage for bits 8 15 and K clock value The external analyzer probe signals are divided into two groups the lower byte channels 0 through 7 and the J clock and the upper byte channels 8 302 Using the External State Analyzer To specify the external analyzer mode through 15 and the K clock You can specify a threshold voltage for each of these groups The default threshold voltages are specified as TTL which translates to 1 40 volts Voltages may be in the range from 6 40 volts to 6 35 volts with a 0 05V resolution You may also specify CMOS which translate
375. s 0 00 160 1 ms 320 ms 0 00 320 1 ms 640 ms 0 00 640 1 ms 1 2 s 0 00 From Address 101E File main module users guest demo debug_env hp64782 main c Symbolic Reference at main interrupt_sim To Address 10A8 File main module users guest demo debug_env hp64782 main c Symbolic Reference at interrupt_sim 8A Number of intervals 2590 Maximum Time 342343 680 us Minimum Time 52 320 us Avg Time 36987 751 us Statistical summary for 10 traces Stdv 76924 84 95 Confidence 8 07 Error tolerance Graph of relative percents 1 us 10 us 0 00 10 1 us 100 us 14 82 KKK KKKKK 100 1 us 500 us 5 06 500 1 us 1 ms 0 00 1 001 ms 5 ms 24 82 KKK KKK RK KK RK 5 001 ms 10 ms 20 27 KKK RK KKK 10 1 ms 20 ms 102083 Ark 20 1 ms 40 ms 0 003 40 1 ms 80 ms DEBOR KARAS 80 1 ms 160 ms S023 FAS 160 1 ms 320 ms TeSTR EEX 320 1 ms 640 ms 2 47 640 1 ms 1 2 s 0 00 289 Making Software Performance M easurements To interpret duration measurement reports Two sets of information are given in the duration measurement report module duration and module usage The first set is the module usage measurement Module usage measurements show how much time is spent outside the module of interest they indicate how often the module is used The information shown in the first part of the duration report above shows that the average amount of time spent outside the interrupt_sim function is about 55 7 milliseconds The
376. s are saved and will be present when you restart the interface You can predefine entries for the Entry Buffer Recall dialog box and define the maximum number of entries by setting X resources refer to the Setting X Resources chapter See the following To use dialog boxes section for information about using dialog boxes To use the entry buffer Place information into the entry buffer see the previous To place values into the entry buffer using the keyboard To copy and paste to the entry buffer or To recall entry buffer values task descriptions Choose the menu item or click the action key that uses the contents of the entry buffer that is the menu item or action key that contains O 3 71 Entering Commands To copy and paste from the entry buffer to the command line entry area To copy and paste from the entry buffer to the command line entry area Place text to be pasted into the command line in the entry buffer text area You may do this e Copying the text from the display area using the copy and paste feature e Entering the text directly by typing it into the entry buffer text area e Choosing the text from the entry buffer recall dialog box Position the mouse pointer within the command line text entry area If necessary reposition the cursor to the location where you want to paste the text If necessary choose the insert or replace mode for the command entry area Click the
377. s are used instead of the default scheme files For example to use the HOME HP64_schemes HP UX Softkey MyColor color scheme file you would set the HP64_Softkey colorScheme resource to MyColor HP64_Softkey colorScheme MyColor Refer to the previous To customize Graphical User Interface resources section for more detailed information on modifying resources 335 Setting X Resources To set up custom action keys To set up custom action keys e Modify the actionKeysSub keyDefs resource The actionKeysSub keyDefs resource defines a list of paired strings The first string defines the text that should appear on the action key pushbutton The second string defines the command that should be sent to the command line area and executed when the action key is pushed A pair of parentheses with no spaces that is can be used in the command definition to indicate that text from the entry buffer should replace the parentheses when the command is executed Action keys that use the entry buffer should always include the entry buffer symbol in the action key label as a visual cue to remind you to place information in the entry buffer before clicking the action key Shell commands can be executed by using an exclamation point prefix A second exclamation point ends the command string and allows additional options on the command line Also command files can be executed by placing the name of the file in the comma
378. s in the graphical interface is identical The following steps show you how to set up demos or tutorials in the Graphical User Interface 1 Create the demo or tutorial topic files and the associated command files Topic files are simply ASCII text files You can use I to produce inverse video in the text U to produce underlining in the text and N to restore normal text Command files are executed when the Press to perform demo or tutorial button in the topic pop up dialog is pushed A command file must have the same name as the topic file with cmd appended Also a command file must be in the same directory as the associated topic file 339 Setting X Resources To set up demos or tutorials Create the demo or tutorial index file Each line in the index file contains first a quoted string that is the name of the topic which appears in the index pop up and second the name of the file that is raised when the topic is selected For example About demos users guest gui_demos general Loading programs users guest gui_demos loadprog Running programs users guest gui_demos runprog You can use absolute paths for example users guest topicl paths relative to the directory in which the interface was started for example mydir topic2 or paths relative to the product directory for example Xdemo general where the product directory is something like usr hp64000 inst emul 64742A Set the enableDemo or
379. s likely that emulator was unable to break to the monitor to perform the register display See message 608 Don t care number unexpected Cause While defining an expression in your command you included a don t care number a binary octal decimal or hexadecimal number containing x which was not expected Don t care numbers are not valid for all commands See the EXPR command syntax for more information about expressions Emul700dmn continuation failed Cause Communication between the emulator and the host system to continue the emulation session failed Action Check the data communication switch settings on the rear panel of the HP 64700 series emulator If necessary refer to the HP 64700 Installation Service Guide 461 Error Messages Emul700dmn executable not found Cause The emulation session could not begin because the host system could not locate the HP 64700 emulator daemon process executable Action Make sure that software installation is correct Then try starting the emulator again Emul700dmn failed to start Cause The emulation session could not begin because the host system could not start the HP 64700 emulator daemon process Action Make sure there is sufficient disk space under usr hp64000 Make sure the host system is operating properly that all Softkey Interface software has been loaded correctly and the data communication switch settings on the emulator rear panel match the settings
380. s os abols in so ngrbols A D splay Parent Symbols tatio symbol bol nas Cut Full Symbol Name Sagwenit Of feet F6 rase 5a a ISR_ENTRY Edit File Defining Symbol pooo v STATUS Build seccessful ae mornings were is gt oed diapley globsl_symbols Commend conse 151 Using Context Commands The commands in this section display and control the directory and symbol contexts for the interface Directory context The current directory context is the directory accessed by all system references for files primarily load store and copy commands if no explicit directory is mentioned Unless you have changed directories since beginning the emulation session the current directory context is that of the directory from which you started the interface Symbol context The emulator analyzer interface and the Symbol Retrieval Utilities SRU together support a current working symbol context The current working symbol represents an enclosing scope for local symbols If symbols have not been loaded into the interface you cannot display or change the symbol context This section shows you how to e Display the current directory and symbol context e Change the directory context e Change the current working symbol context 152 Using the Emulator To display the current directory and symbol context To display the current directory and symbol context e Choose Display Contex
381. s ranges when mapping memory The function code can be e None supervisor supervisor program supervisor data user user program user data e program data Function code information lets you further characterize memory blocks as supervisor user Supervisor program supervisor data user program or user data space When you specify function codes with mapper ranges the 6830x function code outputs FCO FC1 FC2 are decoded to select particular blocks of memory Function codes let you overlay address ranges When you specify function codes as part of the address the emulator memory mapper knows that overlaid blocks are different memory regions and will define them separately If you specify a function code when mapping a range of memory you must include the function code when referring to locations in that range If you don t include the function code an ambiguous address error message is displayed If you use different function codes it s possible to map address ranges that overlap When address ranges with different function codes overlap you must load a separately linked module for the space associated with each function code The modules are linked separately because linker errors occur when address ranges overlap When address ranges are mapped with different function codes and there are no overlapping ranges your program modules may exist in one absolute file However you have to use multiple
382. s situation you must halt the trace to display the last captured state To display the trace status Choose Display Status Or using the command line enter display status In addition to the analyzer information shown on the status line Emulation trace started Emulation trace complete etc you can display complete analyzer status with the command below To display the trace status display status bhrwlett Pactaed Emolar Aredyoer Spdode ret I0K Fir inpiry benii Exreetion Ereakpetes Trost Seniuyi Rep for Seep Seeree Das Veri Trece l New l Agh 203 Using the Emulation Analyzer To display the trace status The first line of the emulation trace status display shows the user trace has been completed other possibilities are that the trace is still running or that the trace has been halted The second line of the trace status display contains information on the arm condition If the analyzer is always armed the message Arm ignored is displayed If the analyzer is to be armed by one of the internal signals either the message Arm not received or Arm received is displayed The display indicates if the arm condition happened any time since the most recent trace started even if it happened after the trace was halted or became complete The Making Coordinated Measurements chapter explains arm conditions The Arm to trigger line displays the amount of time b
383. s state qualifier You can also use logical operators to build more complex states Refer to the Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands chapter for details The default expression type is address therefore you don t need to specify the address keyword when you enter an address expression Start a trace and store only writes of 0 hex to the graph address in the demo program trace only graph data 0 status write 217 Using the Emulation Analyzer To enter a range in a trace expression To enter a range in a trace expression Use the command line rules described below to create your expression in the entry buffer Then Choose Trace After Trace Before or Trace About as desired Or using the command line enter commands as follows e To specify an address range enter address range lt expression gt thru lt expression gt e To specify a data range enter data range lt expression gt thru lt expression gt e To specify a status range enter status range lt expression gt thru lt expression gt e To take the logical not of a range use the not keyword before the range keyword Ranges allow you to qualify analyzer actions on a contiguous set of values Mostly you ll use address ranges to trigger or store on access to a data block such as a lookup table But you can also use data ranges to qualify a trigger or storage on a range of data values There is only one range term available in the trace
384. s to 2 5 volts or ECL which translates to 1 3 volts To specify the external analyzer mode Choose yes for the Should emulation control the external bits configuration option Choose Emulation State or Timing for the External analyzer mode configuration option The default configuration selects the emulation external analyzer mode In this mode you have 16 external trace signals on which data is captured synchronously with the emulation clock The external analyzer may also operate as an independent state analyzer or it may operate as an independent timing analyzer if a host computer interface program is used Choose emulation to select the emulation mode In this mode the external analyzer becomes an extension of the emulation analyzer In other words they operate as one analyzer The external bits are clocked with the emulation clock External labels may be used in trace commands to qualify trigger storage prestore or count states External labels may be viewed in the trace display Choose state to select the independent state mode of the external analyzer The external bits are not available for use from the emulation interface You can however use pod commands to control the external state analyzer in its independent mode Choose timing to select the timing mode of the external analyzer The external bits are not available for use from the emulation interface Because the pod commands for the tim
385. s when another state occurs In effect windowing allows you capture windows of code execution Windowing is different than storing states in a range the only range option in the trace command syntax because it allows you to capture execution of all states in a window of code whereas storing states in a range won t capture the execution of subroutines that are called in that range or reads and writes to locations outside that range When you use the windowing feature of the analyzer the trigger state must be in the window or else the trigger will never be found If you wish to combine the windowing and sequencing functions of the analyzer note the following restrictions e Up to four sequence terms are available when windowing is in effect e Global restart is not available when windowing is in effect e Occurrence counts are not available 234 Examples In the demo program suppose you are only interested in the execution that occurs within the switch statement of the combsort function You could specify source line number 229 as the window enable state and the source line number of the next statement line number 241 as the window disable state Set up the windowing trace specification with the following command trace enable main main c line 229 disable main main c line 241 set source on Of fset 8 More data off sc Address Opcode or Status w Source Lines time count symbols mnemonic w symbols rel
386. sages Severe error detected file transfer failed 411 Cause An unrecoverable error occurred during a transfer operation Action Retry the transfer If it fails again make sure that the data communications parameters are set correctly on the host and on the HP 64700 Also make sure that you are using the correct command options both on the HP 64700 and on the host Slave clock requires at least one edge Cause The analyzer has an invalid clock specification Action Modify your configuration and try your command again Software breakpoint lt address gt 615 Cause This status message will be displayed if a software breakpoint is encountered during a program run The emulator is broken to the monitor The string lt address gt indicates the address where the breakpoint was encountered Software breakpoint break condition is disabled 661 Cause You have attempted to set or clear a software breakpoint when software breakpoints are disabled Action You must enable software breakpoints before you can set them Specified breakpoint not in list lt address gt 663 Cause You tried to clear a software breakpoint that was not previously set The string lt address gt prints the address of the breakpoint you attempted to clear Action You must first set a software breakpoint before it can be cleared Starting address greater than ending address Cause You specified a starting address that is greater than the ending a
387. sassembly and with status information in mnemonic format make appropriate entries in the Trace Display Options dialog box or enter the following command display trace absolute status mnemonic 247 Using the Emulation Analyzer To display symbols in the trace list To display symbols in the trace list Choose Settings Source Symbol Modes Symbols or choose Settings Display Modes and in the dialog box click on Symbolic Addresses In the Field Widths area of the dialog box you can select the widths of the Label Field and Symbols in Mnemonic Field to control the display space allocated to the symbols To select symbol types use the command line described below Or using the command line enter commands as follows e To display symbols in the trace list enter set symbols on e To display only high level symbols enter set symbols high e To display only low level symbols enter set symbols low e To display all symbols both high and low level enter set symbols all When you enable symbol display addresses and operands are replaced by the symbols that correspond to those values The symbol information is derived from the SRU symbol database for that command file See Chapter 6 Using the Emulator for more information on SRU and symbol handling High level symbols are those that are available only from high level languages such as a compiler Low level symbols are those that are available from
388. screen press and hold the select mouse button and choose Clear delete All Breakpoints from the pop up menu Choose Breakpoints Clear All Or using the command line enter modify software_breakpoints clear To display the status of all execution breakpoints a Choose Breakpoints Display or Display Breakpoints Or using the command line enter display software_breakpoints The breakpoints table shows you whether the breakpoints feature is currently enabled or disabled Also the status is shown for each breakpoint in memory If Pending the BKPT instruction is in memory at that location and the breakpoint is set If Inactive the memory location contains the original instruction and the breakpoint will not be executed Active breakpoints are indicated in the memory mnemonic display by asterisks beside the lines with breakpoints set 171 temporary permanent inactivated pending Using the Emulator To display the status of all execution breakpoints The status of a breakpoint can be one of the following This means the temporary breakpoint has been set but not encountered during program execution These breakpoints are removed when the breakpoint is encountered This means the permanent breakpoint is active Permanent breakpoints remain active after they are encountered during execution This means the breakpoint has been inactivated Pending breakpoints are inactivated when they are encounter
389. second set of information in the duration measurement report is the module duration measurement The module duration report shows that the amount of time it takes for the interrupt_sim function to execute varies from 52 3 microseconds to 342 3 milliseconds The average amount of time it takes for the interrupt_sim module to execute is roughly 37 milliseconds 290 Running Measurements and Creating Reports Several performance measurement tasks are the same whether you are making activity or duration measurements This section describes how to e Run performance measurements e End performance measurements e Create a performance measurement report To run performance measurements Use the performance_measurement_run command The performance_measurement_run command processes analyzer trace data When you end the performance measurement this processed data is dumped to the binary perf out file in the current directory The perf32 report generator utility is used to read the binary information in the perf out file If the performance_measurement_run command is entered without a count the current trace data is processed If acount is specified the current trace command is executed consecutively the number of times specified The data that results from each trace command is processed and combined with the existing processed data The STATUS line will say Processing trace lt NO gt during the run so you will know how yo
390. source lines and symbols to appear in displays where appropriate You can use symbols when specifying expressions The global symbol main is used in the command above to specify the starting address of the memory to be displayed 33 Figure 4 Getting Started Step 3 Run from the transfer address Step 3 Run from the transfer address The transfer address is the entry address defined by the software development tools and included with the program s symbol information e Click on the Run Xfer til action key Or using the command line enter run from transfer_address until main Hewlett Packard Emulator Anatyzer hplsds2 m6830 File Display Modity Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings Fanon nern Diop PREG Jln Se Prev Memory Gip imeementc ifile usr hp64O00 demo debug erw hpht7 3B nain c adirazz laba data 9 extern void updete_syatent j update system variables g2 extern void interrupt _ inlirmt j gt simulate an interrupt 7 33 extern void do_sortlold_e datel char scti_deta 8 imt size Eg naini 37 imtt_syatent gt proc_spec_initl EE 100 ahile true 101 t 102 update_syateni 103 ram_chackatt 164 tnterrupt_ain Erem_chechs 165 tf graph 106 graph_datal 107 proc_spectficl STATES H6SI2 Heening in mooi ter Sefumsare break OOO2bcePsp ST run fron transter_sddress until pain ee e e ea a E Command Return iecas Cursor o e aee fe No
391. specification Once it has been used it cannot be reused That is if you specify a range in a trigger specification you can t duplicate it in the storage specification The Terminal Interface does allow this type of measurement though there is still only one range term Refer to the Hewlett Packard Emulation Bus Analyzer with deep trace memory User s Guide for details Since address is the default range type you can omit the address keyword You can t omit the data or status keywords if those are the bus parts you want to qualify You can use the logical or operator to combine the range term with several state qualifiers See the examples 218 Examples Examples Using the Emulation Analyzer To trigger on a number of occurrences of some state Store only the accesses to the demo program s current_humid location trace only range current_humid thru 1h Store only bus cycles where data is in the range 6h 26h or is 29h trace only data range 6h thru 26h or data 29h To trigger on a number of occurrences of some state Use the occurs lt TIMES gt after specifying the trigger state When specifying a trigger state you can include an occurrence count The occurrence count specifies that the analyzer trigger on the Nth occurrence of some state The default base for an occurrence count is decimal You may specify occurrence counts from 1 to 65535 To trigger on the 20th occurrence of the call of the
392. ss gt 628 Cause A memory access to a location mapped as guarded memory has occurred during execution of the user program Action Investigate the cause of the guarded memory access by the user program 466 Error Messages HP 64700 I O error communications timeout Cause This is a communication failure Action Check power to the emulator and check that all cables are connected properly If you are using LAN and heavy LAN traffic is present try setting the environment variable to HP64700TIMEOUT 30 or larger if needed The value is the number of seconds before timeout occurs Then try running again HP 64700 I O error power down detected Cause The emulator power was cycled Action Do not do this during a user interface session this may force the user interface to end immediately HP64700 I O channel busy communications timed out Cause The communications channel is in use for an unusually long period of time by another command Action try again later HP64700 I O channel in use by emulator lt LOGICAL NAME gt 10331 Cause You tried to start an emulator interface but your attempt failed because the emulator is already in use by someone else Action Current user must release the emulator HP64700 I O channel semaphore failure lt string gt Cause Semaphore ipc facility not installed Action Reconfigure the kernel to add ipc facility HP64700 I O error connection timed out Cause A user abort
393. ssage should never occur It shows that you have an unreleased version of analysis firmware Lab firmware auxiliary subsystem product address lt address gt 914 Cause This message should never occur It shows that you have an unreleased firmware version of the auxiliary subsystem Lab firmware for emulation subsystem 911 Cause This message should never occur It shows that you have an unreleased version of emulation firmware Lab firmware subsystem product address lt address gt 913 Cause This message should never occur It shows that you have an unreleased version of system controller firmware Load aborted Cause While loading a file into the emulator an event occurred that caused the host system to stop the load process Action Use the display error_log command to view any errors If the problem persists make sure the host system and emulator are operating properly and that you are trying to load an acceptable file See the Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands chapter for information about the load command Load completed with errors Cause While loading a file into the emulator one or more events occurred that caused errors during the load process Action Use the display error_log command to view any errors You may need to modify the configuration and map memory before you load the file again If the problem persists make sure the host system and emulator are operating properly and that you are trying
394. sses choose Settings Source Symbol Modes Absolute or using the command line enter the set source off symbols off command To display assembly language mnemonics with absolute addresses replaced by global and local symbols where possible choose Settings Source Symbol Modes Symbols or using the command line enter the set source off symbols on command To display assembly language mnemonics intermixed with high level source lines choose Settings Source Symbol Modes Source Mixed or using the command line enter the set source on inverse_video on symbols on command To display only high level source lines choose Settings Source Symbol Modes Source Only or using the command line enter the set source only inverse_video off symbols on command The source symbol modes affect mnemonic memory displays and trace displays Each display mode cascade menu choice is a toggle Choosing one of these items causes it to be the only one active and toggles all others off Provided that symbols were loaded the interface defaults to e Source only for mnemonic memory displays e Source mixed for trace listing displays 185 Using the Emulator To set the display modes To set the display modes e Choose Settings Display Modes to open the display modes dialog box Press and hold the select mouse button and drag the mouse to select Source Only Source Source Symbols View Mixed or Off ource in M
395. ssible Invalid word access for odd number of bytes 8 Cause When the access mode is word and the display mode is byte you have attempted to modify a range of target system memory perhaps as small as a two byte range with an odd number of byte values Action Either specify an even number of bytes or modify the access mode to bytes if possible Inverse assembly file lt INVERSE ASSEMBLER FILENAME gt could not be loaded Inverse assembly file lt INVERSE ASSEMBLER FILENAME not found lt filename gt Inverse assembly not available Cause The file does not exist Action Reload your interface and or real time operating system software Inverse assembly not available Cause The inverse assembler for your emulator is missing Action Verify proper software installation Joining session already in progress continue file loaded Cause This is a status message When operating the emulator in multiple windows a new emulation session is joined to a current session In this case the new session was able to continue because the continue file loaded properly Joining session already in progress user interface defaulted Cause When operating the emulator in multiple windows a new emulation session is joined to a current session In this case the new session used the user interface default selections 471 Error Messages Lab firmware analysis subsystem product address lt address gt 912 Cause This me
396. state When the trigger state is captured the analyzer is triggered Up to seven sequence terms and an optional occurrence count for each term are available 230 Examples Using the Emulation Analyzer To trigger after a sequence of states In the demo program suppose you wish to trigger on the following sequence of events the save_points function the interrupt_sim function and finally the do_sort function Also suppose you wish to store only opcode fetches of the assembly language LINK A6 0 instruction data values that equal 4E56H to show function entry addresses To set up the sequencing trace specification enter the following trace command trace find_sequence save_points then interrupt_sim trigger about do_sort only data 4e56h set source off More data off screen Address Opcode or Status time count mnemonic wi symbols SC relative upda set_outputs pgm word rd ds16 updat write_hdwr pgm word rd ds16 upda save_points pgm word rd ds16 ma interrupt_sim pgm word rd ds16 pr proc_specific pgm word rd ds16 up update_system AG Haak upda get_targets AG Horak read_condi tions AG He upda set_outputs AG He updat write_hdwr AG Hkk upda save_points AG Hkk ma interrupt_sim AG Hkk pro main do_sort AG Hkk pro main strepy8 AG fk pro main strepy8 AG Hkk pro main strepy8 AG Hr M M 5 En 6 4 Z 3 16 2 5 7 6 4 J Notice the states that contain sq
397. states deep if counting is turned off To disable counting in the 1K analyzer use the command trace counting off When using the emulation bus analyzer with deep memory full memory 251 Examples Using the Emulation Analyzer To select the type of count information in the trace list depth is always available the depth of the deep analyzer is not affected by the counting selected See To count states or time Count time and store only each iteration of the update_sys symbol in the demo program if using the 1K analyzer make sure the clock speed is set to Slow in the configuration Specify the trace for the emulator trace only update_sys counting time Now start the program run then display the trace run from transfer_address display trace count relative Count absolute entries into the get_targets routine of the demo program trace only address range update_sys thru update_sys end counting state get_targets run from transfer_address display trace count absolute 252 Example Using the Emulation Analyzer To offset addresses in the trace list To offset addresses in the trace list Choose Trace Display Options and in the dialog box enter the desired offset value in the field beside Address Offset Then click the OK or Apply pushbutton Or using the command line use the offset_by command line option to the display trace command The Address Offset or offset_by trace dis
398. step mnemonic only after stepping is complete This will speed up stepping of many instructions The default is to update the register step mnemonic after each assembly instruction or source line executes Gif stepping is performed in the same window as the register display This represents the starting address of the program you loaded into emulation or target memory The transfer_address is defined in the linker map This option performs stepping on source lines step step from 810H step 5 source step 20 silently step 4 from main The display registers display memory mnemonic and set symbols commands 430 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands stop trace stop_trace stop_ trace lt RETURN gt This command terminates the current trace and stops execution of the current measurement The analyzer stops searching for trigger and trace states If trace memory is empty no states acquired nothing will be displayed See Also The trace command 431 EXPR FCODE lt FILE gt memory Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands store store lt FILE gt H lt RETURN gt trace_spec Tad HEARS This command lets you save the contents of specific memory locations in an absolute file You also can save trace memory contents in a trace file The store command creates a new file with the name you specify
399. synchronous measurements 317 state external analyzer mode 303 STATE in trace command 427 428 states change the number available for display 254 static discharge protecting the emulator probe against 52 status syntax conventions 351 system requirements HP 64700 minimum version 509 HP 9000 overview 508 HP UX minimum version 508 SunOS minimum version 509 T arget memory loading absolute files 141 arget reset running from 157 arget system 536 dependency on executing code 107 plugging the emulator into 51 RAM and ROM 112 emporary software breakpoints setting 168 erminal emulation window opening 193 erminal interface commands used in high level interface 225 228 hreshold voltages 302 ime range file format SPMT measurements 284 iming external analyzer mode 303 race 536 at EXECUTE 317 continuous stream of execution 225 228 copy command 363 count states 220 221 count time 220 221 display command 381 384 displaying count information 251 252 displaying the 201 204 displaying without disassembly 246 247 listing the 201 204 listing to file 192 load command 394 loading data 259 loading specifications 258 on program halt 225 recalling trace specifications 206 repeat the previous command 207 reset display defaults 254 restoring data 256 restoring specifications 256 saving data 256 saving specifications 256 starting 200 stopping 201 store command 433 storing
400. t Or using the command line enter pwd and pws The current directory and working symbol contexts are displayed and also the name of the last executable file from which symbols were loaded Emulator Analyzer Current Context Example Directory fusrihp64000 demo debug_envihp64798 Symbol File fusrfhp64000 demo debug_envihp64798 ecs x Symbol Scope update_sys Directory context Executable from which symbols were last loaded Symbol context To change the directory context e Choose File gt Context Directory and use the dialog box to select a new directory Or using the command line enter ed lt directory gt The Directory Selection dialog box contains a list of directories accessed during the emulation session as well as any predefined directories present at interface startup 153 Using the Emulator To change the current working symbol context You can predefine directories and set the maximum number of entries for the Directory Selection dialog box by setting X resources see the Setting X Resources chapter To change the current working symbol context e Choose File gt Context Symbols and use the dialog box to select the new working symbol context Or using the command line enter ews lt symbol_context gt Because cws is a hidden command and doesn t appear on a softkey label you have to type it in You can predefine symbol contexts and set the maximum number of
401. t Dequeue Enable Then click the OK or Apply pushbutton Or using the command line enter commands as follows e To dequeue the trace list enter display trace dequeue on e To display the trace list without dequeueing enter display trace dequeue off lt LINE gt is a line number corresponding to a state in the trace list lt STATE gt is the line number of the data operand that is associated with the instruction at lt LINE gt A dequeued trace list is available through the disassembly options Ina dequeued trace list unused instruction prefetch cycles are discarded and operand cycles are placed immediately following the corresponding instruction fetch If you choose a non dequeued trace list instruction and operand fetches are shown exactly as captured by the analyzer 244 Examples Using the Emulation Analyzer To specify trace dequeueing options Once the dequeuer has been started on the correct opcode it will continue to disassemble correctly unless an unusual condition causes it to misinterpret the data By specifying the first instruction state for disassembly and the number of the first operand cycle for that instruction you can resynchronize the disassembly You may see TAKEN NOT TAKEN or TAKEN beside a branch in your dequeued trace list TAKEN is shown beside a branch if the dequeuer determines that the branch was taken NOT TAKEN is shown if the dequeuer determines that the branch was definitely
402. t RETURN gt 64782S01 Use this command with various parameters to save or print emulation and analysis information The copy command copies selected information to your system printer or listing file or directs it to an UNIX process 356 configuration_info data display error_log event_log lt FILE gt global_ symbols help lt HELP_FILE gt UNIX CMD local_symbols_in memory noappend noheader pod command Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands copy Depending on the information you choose to copy default values may be options selected for the previous execution of the display command For example if you display memory locations 10h through 20h then issue a copy memory to myfile command myfile will list only memory locations 10h through 20h The parameters are as follows Copies the last configuration information display Copies a list of memory contents formatted in various data types see display data Copies the display to a selected destination Copies the most recent errors that have occurred Copies the most recent events that have occurred This prompts you for the name of a file where you want the specified information to be copied If you want to specify a file name that begins with a number you must precede the file name with a backslash For example copy display to 12 10 Copies a list of global symbols to the selected destination Copies the contents of the emulation help files
403. t against damage to the instrument Indicates dangerous voltage terminals fed from the interior by voltage exceeding 1000 volts must be marked with this symbol Protective conductor terminal For protection against electrical shock in case of a fault Used with field wiring terminals to indicate the terminal which must be connected to ground before operating the equipment Low noise or noiseless clean ground earth terminal Used for a signal common as well as providing protection against electrical shock in case of a fault A terminal marked with this symbol must be connected to ground in the manner described in the installation operating manual before operating the equipment Frame or chassis terminal A connection to the frame chassis of the equipment which normally includes all exposed metal structures Alternating current power line Direct current power line Alternating or direct current power line Caution The Caution sign denotes a hazard It calls your attention to an operating procedure practice condition or similar situation which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the product Warning The Warning sign denotes a hazard It calls your attention to a procedure practice condition or the like which if not correctly performed could result in injury or death to personnel Certification and Warranty Certification Hewlett P
404. t find the sequencing flexibility you need from within Softkey Interface refer to the 6830x Installation Service Terminal Interface User s Guide 229 Using the Emulation Analyzer To trigger after a sequence of states To trigger after a sequence of states Create your first specification form on the command line That will enter the proper format in the Trace Specification Selection dialog box Obtain the dialog box by choosing Trace Trace Spec You can click on your specification in the dialog box edit it if desired and click OK Or using the command line enter trace find_sequence lt bus_state gt occurs lt times gt then lt bus_state gt occurs lt times gt trigger lt bus_state gt lt bus_state gt represents a combination of address data and status expressions that must be matched to satisfy the trigger or sequence qualifier lt times gt is the number of times that bus state must occur to satisfy the qualifier The analyzer s sequencer has several levels also called sequence terms Each state in the series of states to be found before triggering as well as the trigger state is associated with a sequence term When triggering using the sequencer the analyzer searches for the state associated with the first sequence term When that state is captured the analyzer starts searching for the state associated with the second term and soon The last sequence term used is associated with the trigger
405. t value gt for the 68020 Apply to a specific HP64_Softkey application connected to a specific processor perf m6830x lt resource gt lt value gt for the 6830x perf analyzer emul m68020 lt resource gt lt value gt for the 68020 emulator If all four examples above are used for a particular resource 3 will override 2 for all applications connected to a 6830x emulator and 4 will override 2 but only for the specifically mentioned type of microprocessor When modifying resources your resource paths must either match or be more specific than those found in the application defaults file How X Resource Specifications are Loaded When the Graphical User Interface starts up it loads resource specifications from a set of configuration files located in system directories as well as user specific locations 497 HP UX SunOS Concepts Application Default Resource Specifications Default resource specifications for an application are placed in a system directory usr lib X11 app defaults usr openwin lib X1 1 app defaults The name of the Graphical User Interface application defaults file is HP64_Softkey same as the application class name This file is well commented and contains information about each of the X resources you can modify You can easily view this file by choosing Help Topic and selecting the X Resources App Default File topic Do not modify the application defaults file any changes to this fi
406. teger pointer SRU can resolve the difference You must specify control c port_one static to reference the variable and control c port_one procedure to reference the procedure address The copy local_symbols_in and display local_symbols_in commands Also refer to the Symbolic Retrieval Utilities User s Guide for further information on symbols 440 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands sync_sim_registers sync_sim_registers sync_sim_registers from_6830x_to_config lt RETURN gt t f f 0_6830x_from_can g 64749508 This command synchronizes the 6830x s system integration module SIM registers to the emulator s EMSIM registers The parameters are as follows from_6830x Copies the microprocessor s SIM registers into the emulator s EMSIM _to_config registers to_6830x Copies the emulator s EMSIM registers into the microprocessor s SIM _from_config registers difference Displays the differences between the microprocessor s SIM registers and the emulator s EMSIM registers See Also The modify register commands and the Concepts chapter 441 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands trace trace trace cre raunar R again lt RETURN gt repetitively modify command _ TRIGGER 1 anything break_on_ trigger repetitively
407. teraction is disabled the emulator ignores the CMB EXECUTE and READY lines 318 Using Trigger Signals The HP 64700 contains two internal lines trig and trig2 over which trigger signals can pass from the emulator or analyzer to other HP 64700s on the Coordinated Measurement Bus CMB or other instruments connected to the BNC connector You can configure the internal lines to make connections between the emulator analyzer external analyzer if it is configured as an independent state or timing analyzer CMB connector or BNC connector Measurements that depend on these connections are called interactive measurements or coordinated measurements This figure below illustrates the possible connections between the internal lines trig and trig2 and the emulator analyzer and external devices Figure 29 Interactive Measurement Specification BNC lt lt gt gt BNC lt lt gt gt CMBT lt lt gt gt CMBT lt lt gt gt Emulator lt lt Analyzer lt lt gt gt External Analyzer lt lt gt gt The connections marked are set up here in configuration drive gt gt receive lt lt The display won t change however The External Analyzer question is only asked when the External Analyzer mode is state or timing Note that the External Analyzer connection for Trig2 is only available if you have selected state or timing fo
408. tes as an unsigned positive integer Display of four bytes as an unsigned positive integer Displays one byte as an ASCII character in the range 0 through 127 Control characters and values in the range 128 through 255 are displayed as a period Q 370 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display data Examples display data Msg_A thru 17 char Stack long set symbols on set width label 30 display data Msg_B thru 17 char Msg_Dest thru 17 char See Also The copy data and set commands 371 See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display global_ symbols display global_symbols lt RETURN gt O display global symbols on DISPLAY diagram This command displays the global symbols defined for the current absolute file Global symbols are symbols declared as global in the source file They include procedure names variables constants and file names When the display global_symbols command is used the listing will include the symbol name and its logical address The copy global_symbols command 372 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display local_symbols_in display local_symbols_in S display local_symbols_in gt T lt RETURN gt on SB L DISPLAY diagram This command displays the local symbols in a specified source file and their relative segment program data or common 0
409. tformScheme HP UX Names the subdirectory for platform specific SunOS schemes This resource should be set to the custom platform on which the X server is running and displaying the Graphical User Interface if it is different than the platform where the application is running HP64_Softkey colorScheme BW Names the color scheme file Color custom HP64_Softkey sizeScheme Small Names the size scheme file which defines the Large fonts and the spacing used custom HP64_Softkey labelScheme Label Names to use for labels and button text The LANG default uses the LANG environment variable custom if it is set and if a scheme file named Softkey LANG exists in one of the directories searched for scheme files otherwise the default is Label HP64_Softkey inputScheme Input Specifies mouse and keyboard operation custom 330 Setting X Resources To modify the Graphical User Interface resources Commonly Modified Application Resources Resource Values Description HP64_Softkey lines 24 Specifies the number of lines in the main min 18 display area HP64_Softkey columns 100 Specifies the number of columns in min 80 characters in the main display area HP64_Softkey enableCmdline True Specifies whether the command line area is False displayed when you initially enter the Graphical User Interface editFile example Specifies the command used to edit files vi S editFileLine exam
410. the Making Software Performance Measurements chapter for examples of performance measurement specification and use 408 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands pod_command pod_command escono Lena a lt RETURN gt keyboard Allows you to control the emulator through the direct HP 64700 Terminal Interface The HP 64700 Card Cage contains a low level Terminal Interface which allows you to control the emulator s functions directly You can access this interface using pod_command The options to pod_command allow you to supply only one command at a time Or you can select a keyboard mode which gives you interactive access to the Terminal Interface There are certain commands that you should avoid while using the Terminal Interface through pod_command stty po xp Do not use These commands will change the operation of the communications channel and are likely to hang the Softkey Interface and the channel echo mac Using these may confuse the communications protocols in use on the channel wait Do not use The pod will enter a wait state blocking access by the emulator analyzer interface init pv These will reset the emulator pod and force an end release_system command t Do not use The trace status polling and unload will become confused To see the results of a particular pod_command the information returned by the emulator pod you us
411. the command line enter display event_log The last 100 events that have occurred during the emulation session are displayed The status of the emulator and analyzer are recorded in the event log as well as the conditions that cause the status to change for example software breakpoints and trace commands To display the error log Choose Display Error Log Position the mouse pointer on the status line press and hold the select mouse button and then choose Display Error Log from the pop up menu Or using the command line enter display error_log The last 100 error messages that have occurred during the emulation session are displayed 189 Using the Emulator To edit files To edit files e Choose File Edit File and use the dialog box to specify the file name e To edit a file based on an address in the entry buffer place an address reference either absolute or symbolic in the entry buffer then choose File gt Edit At Location e To edit a file based on the current program counter choose File Edit At PC Location e To edit a file associated with a symbol when you are displaying symbols position the mouse pointer over the symbol press and hold the select mouse button and choose Edit File Defining Symbol from the pop up menu e To edit a file when displaying memory in mnemonic format position the mouse pointer over the line of source where you want to begin the edit press and
412. the file Ses eee EFA GEESE libe aoa where the highlighted dopen Beers WEF libe Bee symbol is defined BES BEI ibe Start Global Symbots Display a B eee Display Local Symbols f lab Wapi renl eet Ae DEELT a ikl ios Cut Full Symbol Heme ce cies orean Edt File Defining Symbol aich closs FECA oan BREF SG GEIR prog Bara do aort Azil BEG prog BFA STATES WEE a maier 191 Using the Emulator To copy information to a file or printer To copy information to a file or printer e Choose File Copy select the type of information from the cascade menu and use the dialog box to select the file or printer Or using the command line enter copy ASCII characters are copied to the file or printer If you copy information to an existing file it will be appended to the file Refer to the following paragraphs for details about the different copy options Display Copies information currently in the display area This option is useful for restricting the number of lines that are copied Also this option is useful for copying the contents of register classes other than BASIC Memory Copies the contents of a range of memory The format is the same as specified in the last display memory command For example if you copy memory after displaying a range of memory in mnemonic format the file would contain the mnemonic memory information If there is no previous display memory command the format used is a blocke
413. the program activity Produce a summary limited to the memory activity Produce a report based on the information contained in lt file gt instead of the information contained in perf out For example the following commands save the current performance measurement information in a file called perfl out and produce a histogram showing only the program activity occupied by the functions and variables mv perf out perfl out perf32 hpf perfl out 293 Examples Making Software Performance Measurements To create a performance measurement report Options h s p and m affect the contents of reports generated for activity measurements These options have no effect on the contents of reports generated for duration time interval measurements Now to generate a report from the perf out file type the following on the command line to fork a shell and run the perf32 utility perf32 more 294 Using the External State Analyzer 295 Using the External State Analyzer The HP 64703A analyzer provides an external analyzer with 16 external trace channels These trace channels allow you to capture activity on signals external to the emulator typically other target system signals The external analyzer may be configured as an extension to the emulation analyzer as an independent state analyzer or as an independent timing analyzer When the external analyzer is configured as an independent state
414. the trace mode To configure the trace mode Background specifies that the analyzer trace only background cycles This is rarely a useful setting for user program debugging Both specifies that the analyzer trace both foreground and background cycles You may wish to specify this option so that all emulation processor cycles may be viewed in the trace display Foreground specifies that the analyzer trace only foreground cycles aa 123 Setting Simulated I O To set the debug trace options you must start the configuration interface and access the Simulated I O configuration section refer to the Using the Configuration Interface section Figure 23 Enable Polling for Simulated I O Yes No Simio Control Address 1 _systemio_buf Simio Control Address AR Simio Control Address 3 Simio Control Address q Simio Control Address s Simio Control Address pooo File for Standard Input dev simio keyboard File for Standard Output dev simio display File for Standard Error dev simio display Enable Simio Status Messages Q Yes No To access information about the configuration items use the online help button or press f1 to show context sensitive help on an individual item 124 Verifying the Emulator Configuration The 6830x emulator lets you display information about emulator configuration and processor SIM programming You can also display information about i
415. tice the message Software break lt address gt is displayed on the status line and that the emulator is Running in monitor you may have to click the select mouse button to remove temporary messages from the status line When you run until an address a breakpoint is set at the address before the program is run Notice the highlighted bar on the screen it shows the current program counter 34 Getting Started Step 4 Step high level source lines Step 4 Step high level source lines You can step through the program by high level source lines The emulator executes as many instructions as are associated with the high level program source lines 1 To step a source line from the current program counter click on the Step Source action key Or using the command line enter step source Notice that the highlighted bar the current program counter moves to the next high level source line 2 Step into the init_system function by continuing to step source lines either by clicking on the Step Source action key by clicking on the Again action key which repeats the previous command or by entering the step source command on the command line Figure 5 Hewlett Packard Emutator Analyzer hptsdzb m6830 File Display Mody Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings step Source lt Your Key gt Lt ee See Se al Se E E 7Bap imeronlo ifile init_systentmodule Init Astat an aa Pr dara vold Lnit_vel_ar
416. tion accuracy of 214 specifying a simple 214 216 stop driving on break 324 TRIGGER CMB signal 311 U uploading memory 5 user target memory loading absolute files 141 user program 535 v values 208 version firmware 530 voltages threshold 302 Ww wait command 447 448 WINDOW in trace command 449 windowing and sequencing specification 236 238 239 windows defined 495 general form 495 instance name for applications 496 instance name for widgets 496 loading order 498 modifying resources generally 330 333 RESOURCE_MANAGER property 498 scheme file system directory 501 scheme files Graphical User Interface 499 predefined for analyzer state qualifiers 211 scheme files named 500 schemes forcing interface to use certain 499 Softkey BW 500 Softkey Color 500 Softkey Input 500 Softkey Label 500 Softkey Large 500 Softkey Small 500 wildcard character 496 xrdb 498 xrm command line option 499 X server 328 498 X Window System 55 xbits external analyzer label 307 See X resource exiting emulator analyzer 61 opening new emulator analyzer 59 running emulator analyzer interface in multiple 55 terminal emulation opening 193 workstation HP 9000 memory needs 508 HP 9000 minimum performance 508 SPARCsystem memory needs 509 SPARCsystem minimum performance 509 write to ROM break 122 ransfer address 157 x client 328 rigger 536 X resource 328 XAPPLRESDIR
417. tiple emulator analyzer interface windows The tasks associated with starting and exiting HP 64700 interfaces are grouped into the following sections e Starting the emulator analyzer interface e Opening other HP 64700 interface windows e Exiting HP 64700 interfaces 54 Starting the Emulator Analyzer Interface Before starting the emulator analyzer interface the emulator and interface software must have already been installed as described in the Installation chapter This section describes how to e Start the interface e Start the interface using the default configuration e Runa command file on interface startup e Display the status of emulators defined in the 64700tab net file e Unlock an interface that was left locked by another user To start the emulator analyzer interface Use the emul700 lt emul_name gt command If usr hp64000 bin is specified in your PATH environment variable as shown in the Installation chapter you can start the interface with the emul700 lt emul_name gt command The emul_name is the logical emulator name given in the HP 64700 emulator device table usr np64000 etc 64700tab net It may also be the LAN address If you are running a window system on your host computer for example the X Window System you can run the interface in a maximum of 10 windows This capability provides you with several views into the emulation system For example you can display memory in one
418. to install all of the products on the tape However to save disk space or for other reasons you can choose to install selected filesets If you plan on using the conventional Softkey Interface instead of the Graphical User Interface you can save about 3 5 megabytes of disk space by not installing the XUI suffixed filesets Also if you choose not to install the Graphical User Interface you will not have to use a special command line option to start the Softkey Interface Refer to the Software Installation Notice for software installation instructions After you are done installing the software return here 516 Installation Step 2 Start the X server and OpenWindows Step 2 Start the X server and OpenWindows If you are not already running the X server do so now The X server is required to run the Graphical User Interface because it is an X application Start the X server by entering usr openwin bin openwin at the UNIX prompt Consult the OpenWindows documentation if you do not know about using OpenWindows and the X server Step 3 Set the necessary environment variables The DISPLAY environment variable must be set before the Graphical User Interface will start Also you should modify the PATH environment variable to include the usr hp64000 bin directory and if you have installed software in a directory other than you need to set the HP64000 environment variable The following instructions show you ho
419. to load an acceptable file Logical emulator name unknown not found in 64700tab file 10315 Cause This message may occur while trying to start up the emulator It indicates that the emulator name specified could not be found in the 64700tab net or etc hosts files Action Specify the name in one of these files 472 Error Messages Map term n limited to 4 chip selects 165 Cause This status message occurs if more than 4 chip selects are assigned to a mapped term as defined by the EMSIM registers EMCSOR 0 10 EMCSBR 0 10 EMCSORBT or EMCSBRBT Only the first 4 chip selects will be allowed Measurement system not found Cause You tried to end the current emulation session and select another measurement system module which could not be located by the host system Action Either try the end select measurement_system command again or end and release the emulation session Memory allocation failed ending released Cause This is a fatal system error because the emulation session was unable to allocate memory Action You may need to reconfigure your UNIX kernel to increase the per process maximum memory limit and available swap space Reboot your UNIX system and try starting a new session again Memory modify aborted next address lt address gt 754 Cause This message is displayed if a break occurs during processing of a modify memory command The break could result from any of the break conditions except a
420. tomate measurements Suppose you re using the emulator in a manufacturing test application The target system is your product board You might build a command file that recalls a trace specification makes the trace on the target board and then recalls a previous measurement result from a working product and compares it to the new measurement using the UNIX diff command This section describes how to e Store a trace specification e Store trace data e Load a trace specification e Load trace data To store a trace specification Choose File gt Store Trace Spec In the dialog box select an existing filename or specify a new filename to contain the present trace specification Then click OK Using the command line store the current trace specification by entering store trace_spec lt filename gt lt filename gt is any UNIX file name including paths The extension TS is automatically added to the file name The trace specification file is a binary file 256 Example Example Using the Emulation Analyzer To store trace data The store trace_spec command allows you to save a trace specification effectively the current trace command with all trigger storage and sequence options in a file for later use For example you might have several trace commands that you want to make every time your target system program is modified You can store each trace command in a separate file and recall it l
421. trepy8 AG Hkk pro main strcpy AG Hkk pro main strepyd AG Hake pro main stropy AB Hrt pro main stropyd AB tak kk pro main strcpy AB Hake pro main strepyd AG Hkk Notice in the preceding trace you may have to press lt PREV gt in order to see the states captured prior to the trigger that in addition to states captured in the sequence sq adv is also shown next to states which cause a sequencer restart 233 Using the Emulation Analyzer To trace windows of program execution To trace windows of program execution Create your first specification form on the command line That will enter the proper format in the Trace Specification Selection dialog box Obtain the dialog box by choosing Trace Trace Spec You can click on your specification in the dialog box edit it if desired and click OK Or using the command line enter commands as follows e To trace only the states occurring after a particular bus cycle enter trace enable lt bus_state gt e To trace only the states occurring between two particular bus cycles enter trace enable lt bus_state gt disable lt bus_state gt lt bus_state gt represents a combination of address data and status expressions that must be matched to satisfy the windowing qualifier Windowing refers to the analyzer feature that allows you to turn on or enable the capturing of states after some state occurs then to turn off or disable the capturing of state
422. tructions when properly installed on that instrument HP does not warrant that the operation of the instrument or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free Limitation of Warranty The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied software or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside of the environment specifications for the product or improper site preparation or maintenance No other warranty is expressed or implied HP specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Exclusive Remedies The remedies provided herein are buyer s sole and exclusive remedies HP shall not be liable for any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages whether based on contract ort or any other legal theory Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Hewlett Packard products For any assistance contact your nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office
423. try addresses and the last exit address in a series of exit addresses see the figure below All of the entry and exit addresses which precede these last addresses are assumed to be unused prefetches and are ignored during time measurements When measuring a recursive function module duration will be measured between the last recursive call and the true end of the recursive execution This will affect the accuracy of the measurement If a module is entered at the normal point and then exited by a point other than the defined exit point the entry point will be ignored It will be judged the same as any other unused prefetch and no 281 Making Software Performance Measurements To set up the trace command for duration measurements time duration measurement will be made Its time will be included in the measure of time spent outside the procedure or function If a module is exited from the normal point and then re entered from STAR assumed prefetch STAR assumed prefetch STAR assumed prefetch STAR last ENTRY address END assumed prefetch END assumed prefetch Measure duration END assumed prefetch END last EXIT address STAR assumed prefetch STAR assumed prefetch Measure duration STAR assumed prefetch STAR last ENTRY address END assumed prefetch END assumed prefetch some other point the exit will also be assumed
424. ts e Combinations of paths filenames and line numbers referencing a particular source line e Combinations of paths filenames and segment identifiers identifying a particular PROG DATA or COMN segment or a user defined segment The Symbolic Retrieval Utilities SRU handle symbol scoping and referencing These utilities build trees to identify unique symbol scopes If you use the SRU utilities to build a symbol database before entering the emulation environment the measurements involving a particular symbol request will occur immediately If you then change a module and re enter the emulation environment without rebuilding the symbol database the emulation software rebuilds the changed portions of the database in increments as necessary Further information regarding the SRU and symbol handling is available in the Symbolic Retrieval Utilities User s Guide Also refer to that manual for information on the HP64KSYMBPATH environment variable The last symbol specified in a display local_symbols_in SYMB command or with the cws command is the default symbol scope The default is none if no current working symbol was set in the current emulation session You also can specify the current working symbol by typing the cws command on the command line and following it with a symbol name The pws command displays the current working symbol on the status line Display memory mnemonic also can modify the current working symbol
425. ts chapter for examples of performance measurement specification and use 407 lt COUNT gt Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands performance_measurement_run performance_measurement_run Y performance_meosurement_run iF lt COUNT gt This command begins a performance measurement lt RETURN gt This command causes the emulation system to reduce trace data contained in the emulation analyzer which will then be used for analysis by the performance measurement software The default is to process data presently contained in the analyzer The parameters are as follows This represents the number of consecutive traces you specify The emulation system will execute the trace command process the resulting data and combine it with existing data This sequence will be repeated the number of times specified by the COUNT option Note that the trace command must be set up correctly for the requested measurement For an activity measurement you can use the default trace command trace For a duration measurement you must set up the trace specification to store only the points of interest To do this for example you could enter trace only lt symbol_entry gt or lt symbol_exit gt performance_measurement_run 10 per formance_measurement_run The performance_measurement_end and performance_measurement_initialize commands Refer to
426. ts are listed as an asterisk under the following conditions e The address refers to guarded memory e Runs are restricted to real time the emulator is running a user program and the address is located in user memory Values in emulation memory can always be displayed Initial values are the same as those specified by the command display memory 0 blocked bytes offset_by 0 Defaults are to values specified in the previous display memory command 360 EXPR FCODE Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands copy memory The parameters are as follows An expression is a combination of numeric values symbols operators and parentheses specifying a memory address or offset value See the EXPR syntax diagram The function code used to define the address space being referenced See the syntax diagram for FCODE to see a list of the function codes available and for an explanation of those codes A comma used immediately after memory in the command line appends the current copy memory command to the preceding display memory command The data specified in both commands is copied to the destination specified in the current command Data is formatted as specified in the current command The comma is also used as a delimiter between values when specifying multiple memory addresses copy memory start to printer copy memory 0 thru 100h start thru 5 500H target2 to memlist copy memory 2000h thru 2
427. ts file The file named by the XENVIRONMENT environment variable If the XENVIRONMENT variable is not set the HOME Xdefaults host file typically containing resource specifications for a specific remote host is read 328 Setting X Resources 5 Resource specifications included in the command line with the xrm option 6 System scheme files in directory usr hp64000 lib X11 HP64_schemes 7 System wide custom scheme files located in directory XAPPLRESDIR HP64_schemes 8 User defined scheme files located in directory HOME HP64_schemes note the dot in the directory name Scheme files group resource specifications for different displays computing environments and languages This chapter shows you how to e Modify the Graphical User Interface resources e Use customized scheme files e Set up custom action keys e Set initial recall buffer values e Set up demos or tutorials Refer to the X Resources and the Graphical Interface section in the Concepts chapter for more detailed information 329 Setting X Resources To modify the Graphical User Interface resources To modify the Graphical User Interface resources You can customize the appearance of an X Windows application by modifying its X resources The following tables describe some of the commonly modified application resources Application Resources for Schemes Resource Values Description HP64_Softkey pla
428. ts set lt address gt Se permanent The breakpoints feature must be enabled before individual breakpoints can be set When displaying memory in mnemonic format asterisks appear next to breakpoint addresses An asterisk shows the breakpoint is active Also if assembly level code is being displayed the disassembled instruction mnemonic at the breakpoint address will show the breakpoint instruction 167 Using the Emulator To seta temporary breakpoint To set atemporary breakpoint e Type in the absolute or symbolic address of the breakpoint you want to set in the entry buffer Then choose Breakpoints Temporary or choose Breakpoints Set if your version of HP 64700 system firmware is less than A 04 00 e Choose Breakpoints Set All to set all existing breakpoints in the breakpoint table e Inside the breakpoints list display press and hold the select mouse button and then choose Set All Breakpoints from the pop up menu Or using the command line enter commands as follows e To set a breakpoint at a location given by lt address gt enter modify software_breakpoints set lt address gt e To set all existing breakpoints in the breakpoint table enter modify software_breakpoints set To add a new breakpoint you can choose Breakpoints gt Temporary with the name of the new breakpoint in the entry buffer or use the modify software_breakpoints set command and specify the address for the breakpoint You c
429. ul_mem absfile To load absolute files without symbols Choose File Load Program Only and use the dialog box to select the absolute file Or using the command line enter load lt absolute_file gt nosymbols 142 Using the Emulator To store memory contents into absolute files To store memory contents into absolute files e Using the command line enter store memory lt expression gt You can store emulation or target system memory contents into HP format absolute files on the host computer Absolute files are stored in the current directory If no extension is given for the absolute file name it is given a X aaa Examples To store the contents of memory locations 900H through 9FFH to an absolute file on the host computer named absfile store memory 900h thru 9ffh to absfile After the command above a file named absfile X exists in the current directory on the host computer 143 Using Symbols If symbol information is present in the absolute file it is loaded along with the absolute file unless you use the nosymbols option Both global symbols and local program module symbols can be displayed Long symbol names can be truncated in the symbols display however you can increase the width of the symbols display by starting the interface with more columns refer to the Setting X Resources chapter This section describes how to e Load symbols e Display global and local symbol
430. ulator is reset and they can never be set in target ROM You can however copy target ROM to emulation memory by storing the contents of target ROM to an absolute file re mapping the range as emualtion RAM and loading the absolute file When you set a software breakpoint the emulator replaces the opcode at the address specified with the TRAP instruction When the emulator detects a read from the appropriate vector table location TRAP instruction has executed in the user program execution breaks to the monitor If the TRAP was generated by a software breakpoint a message containing the address of the breakpoint is displayed on the status line and if the breakpoint is temporary the original opcode is resotroed in the user program If the breakpoint is permanent it 163 CAUTION Using the Emulator To reset the emulation processor remains active A subsequent run or step command will execute from the breakpoint address If the TRAP was not inserted as the result of a modify software_breakpoints set command in other words it is part of the user program the Undefined software breakpoint message is displayed on the status line To continue with the program execution you must run or step from the user program s TRAP instruction vector address This section shows you how to e Set execution breakpoints in RAM e Set execution breakpoints in ROM e Use temporary and permanent breakpoints e Enable and d
431. ur measurement is progressing The only way to stop this series of traces is by using lt CTRL gt c sig INT The more traces you include in your sample the more accurate will be your results At least four consecutive traces are required to obtain statistical interpretation of activity measurement results 291 Examples M aking Software Performance Measurements To end performance measurements To run the performance measurement enter the following command performance_measurement_run 20 The command above causes 20 traces to occur The SPMT processes the trace information after each trace and the number of the trace being processed is shown on the status line To end performance measurements Use the performance_measurement_end command The performance_measurement_end command takes the data generated by the performance_measurement_run command and places it in a file named perf out in the current directory Ifa file named perf out already exists in the current directory it will be overwritten Therefore if you wish to save a performance measurement you must rename the perf out file before performing another measurement The performance_measurement_end command does not affect the current performance measurement data which exists within the emulation system In other words you can add more traces later to the existing performance measurement by entering another performance_measurement_run command Once you h
432. urement_initialize restore command allows you to restore old performance measurement data from the perf out file in the current directory If you have not exited and re entered emulation you can add traces toa performance measurement simply by entering another performance_measurement_run command However if you exit and re enter the emulation system you must enter the performance_measurement _initialize restore command before you can add traces to a performance measurement When you restore a performance measurement make sure your current trace command is identical to the command used with the restored measurement The restore option checks the emulator software version and will only work if the perf out files you are restoring were made with the same software version as is presently running in the emulator If you ran tests using a former software version and saved perf out files then updated your software to a new version number you will not be able to restore old perf out measurement files 269 Examples Making Software Performance Measurements To initialize activity performance measurements Suppose the addr_ranges file contains the names of all the functions in the ecs demo program loop combsort do_sort gen_ascii_data get_targets graph_data interrupt_sim proc_specific read_conditions save_points set_outputs strcpys8 update_system write_hdwr Since these labels are program symbols you do not have to
433. use by placing the information in a file and entering the file name in the performance_measurement_initialize command Time range files may contain comments and time ranges in units of microseconds us milliseconds ms or seconds s An example time range file is shown below Any line which starts with a is a comment 1 ous LOT 3h D9 us ms S Th Se H H H H 20 us ms 100 6 ms s 6 77 s microseconds milliseconds seconds abov the only abbreviations allowed The space between th number and the units abbreviation is required When no user defined time range file is specified the following set of default time ranges are used 1 us 10 us 10 1 us 100 us 100 1 us 500 us 500 1 us 1 ms 1 001 ms 5 ms 284 Making Software Performance Measurements To initialize duration performance measurements 5 001 ms 10 ms 10 1 ms 20 ms 20 1 ms 40 ms 40 1 ms 80 ms 80 1 ms 160 ms 160 1 ms 320 ms 320 1 ms 640 ms 640 1 ms 1 2 s Restoring the Current Measurement The performance_measurement_initialize restore command allows you to restore old performance measurement data from the perf out file in the current directory If you have not exited and re entered emulation you can add traces to a performance measurement simply by entering another performance_measurement_run command However if you exit and re enter the emulation system you must enter the performance_measurement _initialize restore com
434. usion of source lines in the trace and memory mnemonic display lists This option displays source program lines preceding actual processor instructions with which they correlate This enables you to correlate processor instructions with your source program code The option works for both the trace list and memory mnemonic displays This option displays only source lines Processor instructions are only displayed in memory mnemonic if no source lines correspond to the instructions Processor instructions are never displayed in the trace list This prevents symbol display This displays symbols This option works for the trace list memory software breakpoints and register step mnemonics Displays only high level symbols such as those available from a compiler See the Symbolic Retrieval Utilities User s Guide for a detailed discussion of symbols Displays only low level symbols such as those generated internally by a compiler or an assembly symbol Displays all symbols This option allows you to define the number of spaces inserted for tab characters in the source listing Prompts you for the number of spaces to use in replacing the tab character Values in the range of 2 through 15 may be entered Sets update option for trace displays only When using multiple windows or terminals and specifying this option the display buffer in that window or terminal will be updated when a new measurement completes This is the default
435. ust ended The emulator logical name is located in the usr hp64000 etc 64700tab net or 64700tab file 452 Error Messages lt LOGICAL NAME gt End released Cause This is a status message The emulation session is being exited with the end release_system command When the session has ended the emulator is released meaning that others can access and use it When you restart the emulation session later the new session will use all default settings The emulator logical name is located in the usr np64000 etc 64700tab net or 64700tab file 64700 command aborted 10371 Cause User abort occurred due when emulator is monopolized by another command Action Don t issue an abort Address range too small for request request truncated Cause Too small of an address range is specified in a modify memory command Action Specify a larger memory range Adjust PC failed during break 600 Cause System failure or target condition Action Run performance verification Terminal Interface pv command and check target system Ambiguous address lt address gt 312 Cause Certain emulators support segmentation or function code information in addressing The emulator is unable to determine which of two or more address ranges you are referring to based upon the information you entered Action Re enter the command and fully specify the address including segmentation or function code information Analyzer Break
436. ute file name to be loaded Not compatible trace file load aborted Cause You tried to load a file TR that was created by another type of emulator Action Only load trace data files that were created by the same type of emulator Number of lines not in range 1 lt valid lines lt 50 Cause You tried to enter a number of lines that was outside the range from 1 to 50 Action Try entering the command again using a valid number of lines Number of spaces not in range 2 lt valid spaces lt 15 Cause You tried to enter a number of spaces outside the range from 2 to 15 Action Try entering the command again using a valid number of spaces 475 Error Messages opcode extends beyond specified address range Cause Memory disassembly is attempted on an address range that is too small Action Display memory mnemonic using a large address range or no address range at all perf out file could not be opened created Cause The performance analyzer failed to open or create a file named perf out in response to your performance_measurement_end command Action Free up some file space or correct the write permissions in your current working directory Perfinit Absolute file database must be loaded line lt LINE NUMBER gt Cause No symbolic data base has been opened or exists for the target file when you executed the performance_measurement_initialize command Action Make sure a data base has b
437. ute files into the emulator and storing memory contents into absolute files This section shows you how to e Load absolute files into memory e Load absolute files without symbols e Store memory contents into absolute files To load absolute files Choose File gt Load Executable and use the dialog box to select the absolute file Or using the command line enter load lt absolute_file gt You can load absolute files into emulation or target system memory You can load IEEE 695 format absolute files You can also load HP format absolute files The store memory command creates HP format absolute files If you wish to load only that portion of the absolute file that resides in memory mapped as emulation RAM or ROM use the command line s load emul_mem syntax If you wish to load only the portion of the absolute file that resides in memory mapped as target RAM use the command line s load user_mem syntax If you want both emulation and target memory to be loaded do not specify emul_mem or user_mem 141 Examples Using the Emulator To load absolute files without symbols To load the demo program absolute file and the configuration file enter the following commands m D load configuration Config load ecs x To load only portions of the absolute file that reside in target system RAM load user_mem absfile To load only portions of the absolute file that reside in emulation memory load em
438. uttons 27 choosing menu items 65 66 multi window copy and paste from entry buffer 72 multiple commands 82 multiple emulator start stop 5 N name_of_module command 188 nesting command files 85 NORMAL key 351 386 nosymbols 144 notes perf out file is in binary format 292 CMB EXECUTE and TRIGGER signals 312 external timing analyzer does not use configuration labels 307 measurement errors on recursive multiple entry routines 282 only one range resource available 413 re assignment of memory blocks by mapper 117 some compilers emit more than one symbol for an address 272 step command doesn t work when CMB enabled 317 trigger found but trace memory unfilled 203 number bases 208 numerical values 208 o occurrence counts 219 230 octal numbers 208 offset addresses in trace list 253 online help 84 86 87 operating system HP 64700 Series minimum version 509 HP UX minimum version 508 SunOS minimum version 509 operators 209 overlaid addresses memory mapping 118 parameter passing in command files 86 parent symbol displaying from symbols screen 150 paste mouse button 27 PATH UNIX environment variable 55 perf out SPMT output file 269 285 291 293 405 perf32 SPMT report generator utility 262 291 292 interpreting reports 271 280 286 290 options 293 using the 293 294 performance measurements See software performance measurements performance_measurement_end command 405 pe
439. values display To display data values Choose Display Data Values Or using the command line enter display data Items must be added to the data values display before you can use this command 183 Using the Emulator To clear the data values display and add a new item The data display shows the values of simple data types in the user program When the display mode setting turns ON symbols a label column that shows symbol values is added to the data display Step commands and commands that cause the emulator to enter the monitor for example encountering a breakpoint cause the data values screen to be updated To clear the data values display and add a new item e Place an absolute or symbolic address in the entry buffer then choose Display gt Data Values New and select the data type from the cascade menu Or using the command line enter display data lt address gt lt format gt To add items to the data values display e Place an absolute or symbolic address in the entry buffer then choose Display gt Data Values Add and select the data type from the cascade menu Or using the command line enter display data lt address gt lt format gt 184 Changing the Interface Settings This section shows you how to e Set the source symbol modes e Set the display modes To set the source symbol modes To display assembly language mnemonics with absolute addre
440. ve lt Absolute y te 2 Dequeue Enable Click to select trace list dequeuing if available for your emulator Enter the desired depth of the trace memory to be unloaded for display or storage ina file Enter a value to be subtracted from addresses and symbol source line references shown in the trace list Enter the desired trace list line number to be placed on screen Click OK to Click Apply to Click these Click this specify the trace specify the trace pushbuttons to pushbutton to options and close options and leave selectpredefined cancel the entries the dialog box the dialog box or previously and close the open specified entries dialog box 238 Using the Emulation Analyzer To specify both sequencing and windowing To use the trace list pop up menu Click to begin trace disassembly from the selected line moving that line to the top of the display Click to open an edit window into the source file that contains the address of the selected line Click to open a display window into memory containing the address of the selected line Note that the format of the Of fset G Opcode or Status w Source Lines mnemonic w symbols 003 005 prog main main LINK W AB 0000 maint aaa2 prgm word rd ds16 J data word wr ds16 sysstack 007F9 data word wr ds16 maigggaggad MOVE i Bf A mai Choose Action for Highlighted Line memory display will be mnemonic for add
441. ve OR Values symbols and operators may be used together in analysis specification expressions For example if the local symbol exists the following is a valid expression module c symb 0b67dh amp 0fff00h However you cannot add two symbols unless one of them is an EQU type symbol 209 Using the Emulation Analyzer To position the trace display on screen Emulation Analyzer Trace Signals When you qualify states you specify values that should be found on the analyzer trace signals The signals are described in the table that follows Emulation Analyzer Trace Signals Analyzer Status Signal Signal Channel Bit Name Description 0 23 A0 A23 Address lines 0 23 24 31 A24 A31 Address lines 24 31 68306 only 32 47 DO D15 Data lines 0 15 48 0 BKG 0 in background monitor 1 in foreground monitor 49 51 1 3 FCO0 FC2 Function Code lines 0 2 52 4 R W 0 write bus cycle 1 read bus cycle 53 5 IAC 0 external processor cycle 1 internal processor cycle 54 6 DMA 0 processor cycle 1 dma cycle bus arbitrated 55 7 MAP_ BYTE 0 emulation memory access mapped as byte 1 normal access This bit is currently unused 56 58 8 10 IPLO IPL2 Interrupt Priority Level lines 0 2 from target 59 11 Unused 60 12 HALT 0 processor halt 1 processor not halted 61 13 BERR 0 bus error 1 no bus error 62 14 DATA_ LSB 0 lower byte of data bus not valid 1 lower
442. ve user program execution and begin executing in the monitor lt RETURN gt The behavior of break depends on the state of the emulator Break diverts the processor from execution of your program to the emulation monitor Break releases the processor from reset and diverts execution to the monitor The break command does not perform any operation while the emulator is executing in the monitor The reset run and step commands 354 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands cmb_execute cmb_execute cmb execute lt RETURN gt The cmb_execute command causes the emulator to emit an EXECUTE pulse on its rear panel Coordinated Measurement Bus CMB connector All emulators connected to the CMB including the one sending the CMB EXECUTE pulse and configured to respond to this signal will take part in the measurement See Also The specify run and specify trace commands 355 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands copy copy N MEMORY TRACE REGISTERS Software_breakpoints global_symbols N LOCAL_SYMBOLS_IN Sega lt HELP_FILE gt gt display error_log event_log pod_command i J status configuration_info printer lt FILE gt CH HP_UX_CMD noappend wait_for_exit noheader y l
443. w 508 IP 98659 RS 422 Interface Card 5 IP UX minimum version 508 IP64KPATH UNIX environment ariable 89 IP64KSYMBPATH environment ariable 435 gum lt I IEEE 695 absolute file format 141 input pod commands 91 simulated io 195 input scheme 330 500 installation 508 HP 9000 software 511 SPARCsystem software 516 instance name X applications 496 interactive measurements 319 interface emulator configuration exiting 105 modifying a section 100 starting 98 99 interface exiting 62 inverse video graphical interface demo tutorial files 339 K keyboard accelerators 67 choosing menu items 66 67 focus policy 67 pod commands 91 simulated io 195 keyboard_to_simio modify command 398 L label scheme 330 334 500 labels configuration file 307 LANG environment variable 500 LD_LIBRARY_PATH environment variable 518 libraries Motif for HP 9000 700 508 line numbers source file symbol display 146 lines in main display area 331 332 list trace 201 204 load command 393 394 absolute files 141 configuration 393 trace 394 trace_spec 394 load trace command 259 load trace_spec command 256 258 local symbols 209 373 copy command 359 display command 146 149 373 initializing the performance measurement with 269 540 Index to file 193 log_commands command 395 M map command 119 mapping memory 110 maximum trace depth 220 221 memory 360 361 activity measu
444. w to set these variables at the UNIX prompt Modify your profile or login file if you wish these environment variables to be set when you log in The following instructions also assume that youre using csh if you re using sh environment variables are set in the lt VARIABLE gt lt value gt export lt VARIABLE gt form The DISPLAY environment variable is usually set by the openwin startup script Check to see that DISPLAY is set by entering echo DISPLAY If DISPLAY is not set you can set it by entering setenv DISPLAY lt hostname gt lt server_number gt lt screen_number gt For example setenv DISPLAY myhost 0 0 Consult the OpenWindows documentation for an explanation of the DISPLAY environment variable 517 Installation Step 3 Set the necessary environment variables Set the HP64000 environment variable For example if you installed the HP 64000 software relative to the root directory you would enter setenv HP64000 usr hp64000 If you installed the software relative to a directory other than the root directory it is strongly recommended that you use a symbolic link to make the software appear to be under usr hp64000 For example if you installed the software relative to directory users team you would enter In s users team usr hp64000 usr hp64000 If you do not wish to establish a symbolic link you can set the HP64000 variable to the full path that contains the HP 64000 software also s
445. window manager is not required to execute the interface but as a practical matter you must use some sort of window manager with the X server Start the X server by entering x1 1start at the HP UX prompt Consult the X Window documentation supplied with the HP UX operating system documentation if you do not know about using X Windows and the X server After starting the X server and Motif Window Manager continue with step 2 of these instructions Step 5 Start HP VUE If you are running the X server under HP VUE and have not started HP VUE do so now HP VUE is a window manager for the X Window system The X server is executing underneath HP VUE Unlike the Motif Window Manager HP VUE provides a login shell and is your default interface to the HP 9000 workstation 515 Installing Sun SPARCsystem Software This section shows you how to install the Graphical User Interface on Sun SPARCsystem workstations These instructions also tell you how not to install the Graphical User Interface if you want to use just the conventional Softkey Interface This section shows you how to e Install the software from the media e Start the X server and OpenWindows e Set the necessary environment variables e Verify the software installation e Map your function keys Step 1 Install the software from the media The tape that contains the Graphical User Interface software may contain several products Usually you will want
446. ws you how to e Display the pod commands screen e Use pod commands 90 Examples Entering Commands To display the pod commands screen To display the pod commands screen Choose Display Pod Commands The pod commands screen displays the results of pod Terminal Interface commands To set the interface to use pod commands choose Settings Pod Command Keyboard To use pod commands To begin using pod commands choose Settings gt Pod Command Keyboard To end using pod commands click the suspend pushbutton softkey The Settings Pod Command Keyboard command displays the pod commands screen and activates the keyboard for entering pod command on the command line To see a list of pod command categories available choose Settings gt Pod Command Keyboard and on the command line type help To see a list of pod commands that control the emulator type help emul To see details of the emulator r run user code command type help r 91 Forwarding Commands to Other HP 64700 Interfaces To allow the emulator analyzer interface to run concurrently with other HP 64700 interfaces like the software performance analyzer a background daemon process is necessary to coordinate actions in the interfaces This background process also allows commands to be forwarded from one interface to another Commands are forwarded using the forward command available in the command line The general syntax
447. x and click the OK pushbutton Notice that the value main has been returned to the entry buffer To trigger on the address main and store states that occur after the trigger choose Trace After Or using the command line enter trace after main Notice the message Emulation trace started appears on the status line This shows that the analyzer has begun to look for the trigger state which is the address main on the processor s address bus Run the emulator demo program from its transfer address by choosing Execution Run from Transfer Address Or using the command line enter run from transfer_address Notice that now the message on the status line is Emulation trace complete This shows the trigger state has been found and the analyzer trace memory has been filled 41 Getting Started Step 10 Trace the program 5 To view the captured states choose Display Trace Or using the command line enter display trace Figure 10 Hewlett Packard Emulator Anatyzer hplsds2 m8309 File Display Modity Execution Ereakpoints Trace Settings Help Aetion heys Dap ORES Label Addresa Opcode or Status w Source Lines time count a Beas ambo eis wale relative gy after Prog natn natn 4ES6 spr date roo Rn 08 an _syetemto_buf 10002 mpr dats rd 23 6 9S 002 syatent of M0002 40673 spr dats rd 4 2 oS 003 ayatent of 000 7464 mpr deta rd 4 3 u5 tH _aystemtotOQ0005 46572 mpr data rd 4
448. x enter the desired trace unload depth in the field beside Unload Depth Then click the OK or Apply pushbutton Or using the command line enter display trace depth lt depth gt Using one of the above command forms you specify the number of states that will be unloaded for display copy or file storage By reducing the trace unload depth you shorten the time it takes for the interface to unload the trace information You can increase the trace unload depth to view more states of the current trace Regardless of how much or how little unload depth you specify the entire trace memory will be filled with captured states during a trace In the emulation bus analyzer with deep memory the maximum number of trace states depends on whether or not you installed memory modules in the analyzer card and the capacity of the memory modules Refer to the Hewlett Packard Emulation Bus Analyzer with deep trace memory User s Guide for details In the 1K analyzer the maximum number of trace states is 1024 when counting is turned off and 512 otherwise In either analyzer the minimum trace depth is 9 Trace data must be unloaded before it can be displayed copied or stored in a file If you wish to reduce the number of states that are unloaded for display you must enter the unload depth specification in one of the two ways shown above before you enter the trace command The above commands cannot be used to reduce the number of states displaye
449. xternal analyzer signals 307 Making Coordinated Measurements Making Coordinated Measurements 310 Setting Up for Coordinated Measurements 313 To connect the Coordinated Measurement Bus CMB 313 To connect to the rear panel BNC 315 Starting Stopping Multiple Emulators 317 To enable synchronous measurements 317 To start synchronous measurements 318 To disable synchronous measurements 318 Using Trigger Signals 319 To drive the emulation analyzer trigger signal to the CMB 322 To drive the emulation analyzer trigger signal to the BNC connector 322 To drive the external analyzer trigger signal to the CMB 323 To drive the external analyzer trigger signal to the BNC connector 323 To break emulator execution on signal from CMB 323 To break emulator execution on signal from BNC 323 To break emulator execution on external analyzer trigger 324 To arm the emulation analyzer on signal from CMB 324 To arm the emulation analyzer on signal from BNC 324 To arm the emulation analyzer on external analyzer trigger 325 To arm the external analyzer on signal from CMB 325 To arm the external analyzer on signal from BNC 325 To arm the external analyzer on emulation analyzer trigger 325 16 11 Part 3 12 Contents Setting X Resources Setting X Resources 328 To modify the Graphical User Interface resources 330 To use customized scheme files 334 To set up custom action keys 336 To set initial recall buffer values 337 To set up
450. xy bus cycle is a data transfer ded_int1 Oxxxx xxxO XXXX XXXXY dedicated mode interrupt 1 ded_int6 Oxxxx xxOX XXXX XXXXY dedicated mode interrupt 6 ded_int7 Oxxxx xOXX XXXX XXXXY dedicated mode interrupt 7 dma OxxxxX XXXX X1XX XXXXY bus released to DMA device ext_cyc OxxxxX XXXX XxXOX XXXXY external processor cycle fetch 0xx11 xxxx xxxl x10xy fgd OxxxX XXXX XXXX XxXxly emulator in foreground halt 0xx10 XXXX XXXX XXXXY processor halt hibyte O10xx XXXX XXXX XXXXY high byte bus transfer intack Oxxxx XXXX XXXX 111lxy interrupt acknowledge cycle int_cyc 0XXXX XXXX XX1X XXXXY internal processor cycle lobyte 001XxX XXXX XXXX XXXXY low byte bus transfer map_byte OxxxxX XXXX OXXX XXXXY emulation memory address is byte wide map_word OxxxxX XXXX 1XXX XXXXY emulation memory address is word wide no_dma 0XXXX XXXX XOXX XXXXY bus not released to DMA device no_intr Oxxxx x111 xxxx XXXXY no interrupt nor_int1 Oxxxx x110 XXXX XXXXY normal mode interrupt level 1 nor_int2 Oxxxx x101 xxxx xxxxy normal mode interrupt level 2 nor_int3 Oxxxx x100 xxxx xxxxy normal mode interrupt level 3 nor_int4 Oxxxx Xx011 xxxx xxxxy normal mode interrupt level 4 nor_int5 Oxxxx x010 xxxx XXXXY normal mode interrupt level 5 nor_int6 Oxxxx x001 xxxx XXXXY normal mode interrupt level 6 nor_int7 Oxxxx x000 xxxx XXXXY normal mode interrupt level 7 prog OxxxxX XXXX XXXX Xl0xy program cycle read OxxxxX XXXX XXXl XXXXY bus cycle is a read retry 0xx00 XXXX XXXX XXXXY sup OxxxxX XXXX XXXX
451. y area lets you type in the register name and a value Name iF Recan To define the type of value press and hold Value Type Hex the command select mouse button and Z Read Current Register Value drag the mouse to select the value type Clicking this checkbox causes the current value of the named register to be placed in the Value text entry area Clicking this button modifies the register to Clicking this button modifies the Clicking this button cancels modification the value specified and closes the dialog register to the value specified and and closes the dialog box box leaves the dialog box open Or using the command line enter modify register lt register gt to lt value gt 175 Displaying and Modifying Memory You can display and modify the contents of memory in hexadecimal formats and in real number formats You can also display the contents of memory in assembly language mnemonic format This section shows you how to Display memory Display memory in mnemonic format Display memory in mnemonic format at the current PC Return to the previous mnemonic display Display memory in hexadecimal format Display memory in real number format Display memory at an address Display memory repetitively Modify memory Modify memory at an address To display memory Choose Display Memory This command either re displays memory in the format specified by the last memory display
452. y duration lt FILE gt global_ symbols local_symbols_in restore SYM B Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands performance_measurement initialize The parameters are as follows This option causes the performance measurement process to operate as though an option is not specified This option sets the measurement mode to duration Time ranges will default to a predetermined set unless a user defined file of time ranges is specified This represents a file you specify to supply user defined address or time ranges to the emulator This option specifies that the performance measurement will be set up with the addresses of all global symbols and procedures in the source program This causes addresses of the local symbols to be used as the default ranges for the measurement This option restores old measurement data so that a measurement can be continued when using the same trace command as previously used This represents the source file that contains the local symbols to be listed This also can be a program symbol name in which case all symbols that are local to a function or procedure are used See the SYMB syntax diagram performance_measurement_initialize performance_measurement_initialize duration performance_measurement_initialize local_symbols_in mod_name The performance_measurement_run and performance_measurement_end commands Refer to the Making Software Performance Measuremen
453. y modify memory set and store memory commands 377 lt CLASS gt lt REGISTER gt Examples See Also Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display registers display registers C display a registers To lt RETURN gt on lt CLASS gt DISPLAY diagram lt REGISTER gt This command displays the current contents of the emulation processor registers If a step command just executed the mnemonic representation of the last instruction is also displayed if the current display is the register display This process does not occur in real time The emulation system must be configured for nonreal time operation to display registers while the processor is running Symbols also may be displayed in the register step mnemonic string see set symbols With no options specified the basic register class is displayed as the default This includes the local and global registers The parameters are as follows This allows you to display a particular class of emulation processor registers This displays an individual register or control register field display registers display registers BASIC D2 The copy registers modify registers set and step commands 378 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display simulated_io display simulated_io lt RETURN gt on O display gt simulated _io j T DISP
454. y Event Log N A toggles command line display error_log display event_log Command Line Pop up Command Line Position Cursor Replace Mode Position Cursor Insert Mode Execute Command Clear to End of Line Clear Entire Line Command Line Off lt INSERT CHAR gt key when in insert mode lt INSERT CHAR gt key lt RETURN gt key lt CTRL gt e lt CTRL gt u toggles command line 350 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands Syntax Conventions Conventions used in the command syntax diagrams are defined below Oval shaped Symbols Oval shaped symbols show options available on the softkeys and other commands that are available but do not appear on softkeys such as log_commands and wait These appear in the syntax diagrams as global_symbols Rectangular shaped Symbols Rectangular shaped symbols contain prompts or references to other syntax diagrams Prompts are enclosed with angle brackets lt and gt References to other diagrams are shown in all capital letters Also references to expressions are shown in all capital letters for example EXPR and SYMB see those syntax diagrams These appear in the following syntax diagrams as lt REGISTERS gt SEXP RS Circles Circles indicate operators and delimiters used in expressions and on the command line as you enter commands These appear in the syntax diagrams as The NORMAL Key The softkey labeled NORMA

MC6830x Emulation/Analysis Graphical User Interface

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents